JP2024096502A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing a player's motivation to play a game by increasing a degree of attention to the game and an interest in the game.

SOLUTION: A game machine 10 can set a jackpot probability of a lottery resulting in a jackpot in a jackpot lottery from among mutually different multiple jackpot probabilities. An MPU 41 displays a game setting value regarding a jackpot probability on a particular main display part 37a. An MPU 51 moves an accumulation box 39 for disabling visual recognition of a game setting value displayed on the particular main display part 37a or for preventing the game setting value from being easily recognized visually so as to be capable of allowing at least one portion of the game setting value to be visually recognized when game balls enter a particular out ball port 363.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 73

COPYRIGHT: (C)2024,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines and slot machines, have multiple game setting values with different odds of winning a jackpot in a jackpot lottery. The game setting values may be suggested to the player by a predetermined presentation.

JP 2000-024234 A

Incidentally, it is important for a gaming machine to increase the player's interest and enthusiasm for the game.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the attention and interest in the game and improve the player's motivation to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
A storage means (412) for storing performance information (such as a game setting value, a unit number of lottery draws for a big win, a base, a consecutive role ratio, and a role ratio) that is an index showing ball output performance;
A performance information display means (3) for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means (412).
7a) and
A performance information display control means (37a) for causing the performance information display means (37b) to display the performance information
41) and
a visibility limiting means (39, 39A) for making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to view;
a visibility state control means (51) for controlling the visibility restriction means (39, 39A) when a specific condition is satisfied, and making at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) visible;
The present invention is characterized by comprising:

1 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of a game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a memory area of a main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main control device. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance information display device of a main control device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example on a performance display monitor of the performance information display device. A figure showing an example of display on the game setting value display section of the performance information display device. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a main timer interrupt process executed by the main control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for start winning processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of Figure 13. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the first pending command setting process executed in the start winning process of Figure 14. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by a main control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for variable game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 16. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a data setting process executed in the variable game control process of Figure 17. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the variable start processing executed in the variable game control processing of Figure 17. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for a game setting value change process executed in the main process of FIG. 16 . 17 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a specific performance information update process executed in the main process of FIG. 16 . 21 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 20 . 17 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 16 . 17 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 16 . 17 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 16 . 17 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 16 . 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a sub timer interrupt process executed by the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . 28 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of an operation detection process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 27 . 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an operation detection pattern determination process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 27 . 11 is a diagram showing an example of an operation data table showing the relationship between an operation detection pattern and an operation situation. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a command determination process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 27 . A figure showing an example of a first stop pattern selection table and a variation type table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of Figure 31. A figure showing an example of a performance pattern type table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of Figure 31. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the ball output performance suggestion image display processing executed in the command determination processing of Figure 31. A figure showing an example of a game setting value suggestion character type that suggests a game setting value. A figure showing an example of a game setting value suggestion character selection table used in the ball output performance suggestion image display process of Figure 34. A figure showing an example of a character mode selection table used in the ball output performance suggestion image display process of Figure 34. A figure showing an example of a character mode selection table used in the ball output performance suggestion image display process of Figure 34. A figure showing an example of a ball output performance suggestion image displayed on the sub-image display unit during variable play. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for determining a big win game presentation executed in the command determination process of Figure 31. A figure showing an example of an opening basic effect selection table used in the opening effect determination process executed in the jackpot game effect determination process of Figure 40. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a rank suggestion image type suggesting the rank of the number of unit jackpot lottery draws. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a unit jackpot lottery count suggestion image selection table used in the opening performance determination process. A figure showing an example of an opening screen in a jackpot game. A figure showing an example of an ending basic effect selection table and a unit jackpot number of lottery suggestion image selection table used in the ending effect determination process executed in the jackpot game effect determination process of Figure 40. A figure showing an example of an ending screen in a big win game. A figure showing an example of an opening and closing execution mode presentation scenario selection table used in the opening and closing execution mode presentation determination process executed in the jackpot game presentation determination process of Figure 40. A figure showing an example of an opening/closing execution mode performance scenario selection table used in the opening/closing execution mode performance determination process. A figure showing an example of a round game character selection table and a unit jackpot number of lottery suggestion image selection table used in the opening and closing execution mode presentation determination process. A figure showing an example of a round game screen in the opening and closing execution mode during a jackpot game. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the jackpot game presentation processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of Figure 27. A figure showing another example of an image indicating ball output performance in variable play. A figure showing another example of an image indicating ball output performance in variable play. A figure showing another example of a round game screen in the open/close execution mode during a jackpot game. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a command determination process executed by a voice lamp control device of an amusement machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for a command determination process. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing a big win game presentation. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the round game presentation start processing executed in the jackpot game presentation processing of Figure 57. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the ball output performance suggestion image display processing executed in the jackpot game presentation processing of Figure 57. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for displaying an image indicating ball output performance in a command determination process executed by a voice lamp control device of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an example of a point table and a combined point rank correspondence table used in the ball output performance suggestion image display process. A figure showing an example of a combined point suggestion character selection table referenced in the ball output performance suggestion image display process of Figure 60. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for displaying an image indicating ball output performance in a command determination process executed by a voice lamp control device of a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. 64(A) is a diagram showing an example of an expected value rank correspondence table, and FIG. 64(B) is a diagram showing an example of an expected value rank suggestion character selection table used in the ball output performance suggestion image display process of FIG. 63. FIG. 13 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. A front view showing an enlarged view of the main parts of the gaming machine shown in Figure 65. An oblique view showing an example of a crane device of the gaming machine shown in Figure 65. 68(A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X1-X1 cutting line in FIG. 67, and FIG. 68(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X2-X2 cutting line in FIG. Figure 69(A) is a front view showing the retention box and its surroundings when the retention box is in the upper limit position, Figure 69(B) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of Figure 69(A), and Figure 69(C) is a cross-sectional view along the X3-X3 cutting line of Figure 69(A). Figure 70 (A) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to Figure 69 (B) showing the retention box and its surroundings when the retention box is at the lower limit position; Figure 70 (B) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to Figure 69 (C) showing the retention box and its surroundings when the retention box is at the lower limit position; Figure 70 (C) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to Figure 69 (B) showing the retention box and its surroundings when the retention box is at an intermediate position between the upper limit position and the lower limit position; and Figure 70 (D) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to Figure 69 (C) showing the retention box and its surroundings when the retention box is at an intermediate position. A block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in Figure 65. FIG. 72(A) is a front view showing an example of the special main display section, and FIG. 72(B) is a view showing an example of the display of the special main display section. A diagram showing the visibility state of the special main display section at downward movement levels 0 to 2. Figure 74 (A) and Figure 74 (A) are schematic diagrams showing the visible state of the special main display section at downward movement levels 3 and 4, and Figure 74 (C) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls retained in the retention box and the downward movement level of the retention box. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a sub-timer interrupt processing executed in a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of Figure 75. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a retention box lowering process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 76 . 76 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a retention box recovery process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 75 . A front view showing an example of a crane device and its surroundings of an amusement machine according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention. Cross-sectional view taken along the X4-X4 cutting line in Figure 79. Figure 81 (A) is an oblique view showing an example of a special main display unit and a translucent monitor, Figure 81 (B) is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the visibility level of the translucent monitor and the visibility state of the special main display unit, and Figure 81 (C) is a diagram showing the relationship between the special out ball count and the visibility level of the translucent monitor. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a sub-timer interrupt processing executed in a gaming machine according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of Figure 82. 84 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a visual control process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 83 . 83 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a light blocking control process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 82 . 13A and 13B are diagrams showing other examples of the relationship between the visibility level and the visibility state of the special main display portion. Figure 87 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between multiple areas and the visibility state of the special main display section, and Figure 87 (B) is a diagram showing another example of the relationship between the visibility level and the visibility state of the special main display section. FIG. 13 is an enlarged front view showing a main part of a gaming machine according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention. Cross-sectional view taken along line X5-X5 in Figure 88. 89, but with the ejection member in its operative position; FIG. Cross-sectional view of an area including a retention box and a special main display section in an amusement machine. Figures 92(A) and 92(B) are diagrams showing an example of the relationship between the downward movement level of the retention box and the output levels of the upper limit position detection sensor and the lower limit position detection sensor, and Figure 92(C) is a diagram showing the visual control state of the special main display unit by a translucent monitor. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a retention box operation check process executed by the voice lamp control device. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of an error processing procedure executed in the stay box operation check process of FIG. 94. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a retention box lowering process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 76 . 76 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a retention box recovery process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 75 .

Hereinafter, the first to fourth embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings to facilitate understanding of the present invention. Note that each of the following embodiments is merely an example of the present invention and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First embodiment]
First, a gaming machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[General configuration of gaming machine 10]
Here, Fig. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, Figs. 2 and 3 are development views of the gaming machine 10, and Fig. 4 is a front view of a gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the expressions of front/rear, left/right, and up/down used in this embodiment are defined by the front/rear direction D1, the up/down direction D2, and the left/right direction D3 shown in Figs. 1 to 3.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 includes a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, and a back pack unit 1.
The pachinko gaming machine is equipped with a slot machine, a slot machine housing ...

[Configuration of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed relative to the outer frame 14 by having its left end portion rotatably supported by the outer frame 14. The inner frame 12 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11 by having its left end portion rotatably supported by the front frame 11. The back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12 by having its left end portion rotatably supported by the inner frame 12.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper tray 23, a lower tray 24, and a panel 25.
, a speaker 26, and an illumination unit 27.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper tray 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 5) that switches an input signal to the voice lamp control device 5 described later depending on whether or not the operation button 20 is pressed. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 5, the operation button 20
It is possible to determine the operation state (operation or no operation) of the operation button 20.
is operated to execute an operation button presentation that is executed in response to a player's operation of the operation button 20 during a predetermined specific period in a variable game presentation executed in a variable game that clearly indicates to the player the results of the jackpot lottery.

The location of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper tray 23, but may be any location on the front frame 11 as long as the button is operable by the player. The number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, but may be two or more.

Also, instead of the operation button 20, a touch panel that displays touch keys and accepts operation of the touch keys by the player may be provided. The operation button 20 may also be equipped with a jog dial. In these cases, the operation of the touch panel or panel 25 by the player in the variable game presentation is reflected in the operation button presentation, etc.

The launch handle 22 is a rotary handle that is operated by the player to launch the game ball. In the gaming machine 10, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 (described later) with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22 by the player, thereby performing a basic game. In the gaming machine 10, when the launch handle 22 is being operated by the player, one ball is launched every 0.6 seconds.
The game ball launching mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that the game balls are launched toward the game area.

The upper tray 23 is disposed under the panel 25, and is connected to the dispensing device 1 of the dispensing mechanism 130 described later.
The lower tray 24 is disposed below the upper tray 23 and is used to store the game balls dispensed from the upper tray 23 and guide the stored game balls in a line to the game ball launching mechanism 32. The lower tray 24 is disposed below the upper tray 23 and is used to store the game balls that are surplus to the upper tray 23.

The panel 25 is made of colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin, and allows a player to see the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10.
The illumination unit 27 is a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end of the frame 11, and performs an audio output effect by outputting sound. The installation position of the speakers 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. The illumination unit 27 also has a built-in light source such as an indicator lamp or LED, and performs a lamp effect by changing the illumination color or flashing mode such as turning on or off.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. Note that in Fig. 2, the surface of the game board 31 is omitted for the sake of simplicity.

The control unit 33 has a main control unit 331 and a sub-control unit 332. In the gaming machine 10, commands (control signals) for instructing control content are transmitted in one direction from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332. The main control unit 331 and the sub-control unit 332 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 has an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, and a general winning hole 3
13, first winning port 314, second winning port 315, variable winning port 316, through gate 317,
An outlet 318, a variable display unit 34 and a main display section 37 are provided.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are a transport path for sending the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the game area on the surface of the game board 31.
After being launched from the outer rail 312, the ball is launched into the general winning hole 313, the first winning hole 314, the second winning hole 315, and the third winning hole 316.
Game balls that do not enter the winning hole 315 or the variable winning hole 316 are discharged from the outlet 318.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a launch rail 321 and a ball feed device 3
22, and a solenoid 323. The launch rail 321 is formed from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and guides the game balls launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. The ball feed device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 one by one onto the launch rail 321. The solenoid 323 drives the launch rail 321
This is a driving means for launching the game balls supplied onto the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. In the gaming machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in response to the operation of the launch handle 22 by the player, and the game balls are launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 to the game board 31.
In addition, the game ball launching mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that launches the game ball using other driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

Returning to the explanation of Fig. 4, the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the outlet 318 have openings formed therein that penetrate the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. Then, on the rear side of the game board 31, ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, and 316a (see Fig. 5) that correspond to the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316, respectively, are provided that can individually detect the entry of game balls.
In addition, the game balls that pass through the openings of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the out opening 318 are collected on the back side of the game board 31 and detected by the out ball sensor 35 (see FIG. 5) described later.
is a gate through which the game ball can pass, and has an entrance ball sensor 317a (see FIG. 5) that can individually detect game balls passing through the through gate 317. In the game board 31, when a game ball sent to the game board 31 passes through the right side of the game board 31, that is, when the game ball is hit from the right side, there is a possibility that the game ball will pass through the through gate 317.

The entrance ball sensors 313a to 317a and the out ball sensor 35 (see FIG. 5) are electrically connected to a main control unit 331, and the detection results of the entrance ball sensors 313a to 317a and the out ball sensor 35 are input to the main control unit 331.
(MPU 41) controls the payout control device 7 according to the detection results of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a.
The ball entry sensors 313a to 317 then send a command to the ball entry sensors 313a to 317 to dispense the game balls.
The detection of the entrance of a game ball by the ball sensor 35 may be referred to as a winning. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) counts the number of out balls based on the detection result by the out ball sensor 35. The number of out balls counted here coincides with the number of launched game balls that have been launched onto the game board 31 by the game ball launching mechanism 32. The ball entrance sensors 313a to 317a and the out ball sensor 35 are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but may be any sensor capable of individually detecting the entrance of game balls by other detection methods.

The second winning opening 315 is provided with an electric device 315b that switches between restricting and not restricting the entry of game balls into the second winning opening 315. The electric device 315b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the game board 31, the electric device 315b opens to allow game balls to enter the second winning opening 315, and the electric device 315b closes to restrict the entry of game balls into the second winning opening 315.

Furthermore, the variable winning opening 316 is provided with an opening/closing door 316b that switches between restricting and not restricting the entry of game balls into the variable winning opening 316. The opening/closing door 316b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. When the opening/closing door 316b is opened, game balls can enter the variable winning opening 316, and the opening/closing door 316b is turned on and off.
Closing of 16b restricts the entry of game balls into the variable winning opening 316.

In the gaming machine 10, when the ball entrance sensor 314a or the ball entrance sensor 315a detects the entrance of a gaming ball into the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315, the main control unit 331 performs a jackpot lottery. The main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display section 37 according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery.
The lottery result is transmitted to the sub-control unit 332, and the sub-control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34, etc. in accordance with the lottery result.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when the ball entry sensors 313a to 316a detect the entry of game balls into the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316, a preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls is 10 when the ball enters the general winning opening 313, the number of prize balls is 3 when the ball enters the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, and the number of prize balls is 13 when the ball enters the variable winning opening 316. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the state transitions to a jackpot game state (special game state), and a round game (unit game) described later in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times, 16 times), so that a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, a jackpot lottery is executed. If the lottery result is a win, the game moves to a predetermined jackpot game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state. In this embodiment, the jackpot game state includes a 5R
Jackpot game state (5R normal jackpot game state and 5R special jackpot game state), and 1
The 5R jackpot gaming state includes a 6R jackpot gaming state. The 5R jackpot gaming state includes an open/close execution mode in which a round game (unit game) in which the variable winning port 316 is open is played five times until a predetermined time has elapsed or until a predetermined number (e.g., 9) or more game balls enter the variable winning port 316. The 16R jackpot gaming state includes an open/close execution mode in which a round game (unit game) is played 16 times, and is a gaming state in which a larger amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out than in the 5R jackpot gaming state, making it more advantageous for the player than the 5R jackpot gaming state.

The variable display unit 34 has a pattern display section 341 such as a liquid crystal display arranged so as to be visible through an opening 31A formed in the approximate center of the game board 31. The pattern display section 341 displays still or moving images, and the display contents of the pattern display section 341 are controlled by the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, the pattern display section 341 displays the first
Various displays such as a symbol variation display and a variable game performance display according to the lottery result of the big win lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to the entry of a ball into the winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 are performed. The symbol display unit 341 is an example of the image display means of the present invention.
Furthermore, the pattern display unit 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display with an organic EL display.

For example, the variable display of symbols in the symbol display section 341 is performed by sequentially scrolling a plurality of main symbols numbered, for example, "1" to "9" in a vertical, horizontal, diagonal, etc. Note that sub-symbols such as other letters or symbols may be displayed between the main symbols.
In this embodiment, there are no sub-patterns, and there are nine main patterns, from "1" to "9."

In the gaming machine 10, in a variable game, the pattern variable display is executed so that the variation of all main patterns stops after a preset variation display time has elapsed from the start of the pattern variable display in the pattern display section 341. More specifically, in the pattern variable display, first, all main patterns change along a preset variation direction (e.g., horizontal direction, vertical direction, etc.), and the variation of the multiple main patterns stops in order. Then, when the variation of the main patterns on all lines stops and a predetermined time has elapsed, the pattern variable display ends.

When the pattern variation display in the pattern display section 341 ends, the pattern display section 341 displays a state in which the main patterns are lined up on one or more effective lines. At this time, the stopped state of the main patterns clearly indicates or suggests the lottery result of the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, if the lottery result is a "5R variable probability jackpot", a "16R variable probability jackpot", or a "5R normal jackpot", the state in which the main patterns of the same pattern are lined up on the effective lines is displayed, and it is clearly indicated that it is a jackpot. In addition, the type of jackpot may be clearly indicated by the combination of the main patterns on the effective lines, but it is not necessarily so. Specifically, for example, if the lottery result is a "16R variable probability jackpot", a state in which the pattern combination of the main patterns, for example "777", which is set as a pattern combination indicating a 16R variable probability jackpot, is lined up on the effective lines is displayed, or a state in which the combination of the same patterns other than "777" is lined up on the effective lines is displayed. In addition, if the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot," the main symbols are displayed in a valid line along a combination of symbols that have been set in advance as a combination that indicates a 5R special jackpot, such as "333."
A state where a combination of the same symbols other than the combination of symbols indicating a 16R or 5R probability variable jackpot, such as "777" or "333", is lined up on an effective line is displayed. Also, if the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot", a state where a combination of the same symbols other than the combination of symbols indicating a probability variable jackpot, such as "222" or "444", which is set in advance as a combination of symbols indicating a normal jackpot, is lined up on an effective line is displayed. Also, if the lottery result is a "lose", a state where a combination of different main symbols (for example, "323" or "723") is lined up on an effective line is displayed.

In addition, in the symbol display section 341, along with the main symbol variation display in the variable game, a variable game presentation that suggests the expectation of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is displayed. In addition, when the lottery result is a "16R jackpot", if a jackpot symbol combination other than the main symbol combination indicating a 16R jackpot is displayed in line with the active line,
As a variable game presentation, a suggestive presentation is executed to suggest that it is a 5R variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot. In this case, in the jackpot game presentation, a promotion presentation is executed to clearly indicate that the lottery result for the variable game is a 16R variable jackpot. Similarly, when the lottery result is a "5R variable jackpot," if a jackpot pattern combination other than the main pattern combination indicating a variable jackpot is displayed in a line, as a variable game presentation,
In this case, in the big win game presentation, a promotion presentation or the like is executed to clearly indicate that the lottery result for the variable game is a 5R variable jackpot.

Furthermore, when the gaming state transitions to a jackpot gaming state, the symbol display section 341 displays jackpot gaming effects including an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect.

In the left area on the front side of the pattern display unit 341, a sub-image display unit 3 such as a liquid crystal display is provided.
8 is provided. In this sub-image display section 38, game effects are executed together with the symbol display section 341 in variable play and big win play. In addition, in the sub-image display section 38, effects are executed that suggest to the player information (performance information) regarding ball output performance in variable play and big win play. Details of the performance information will be described later, but this performance information includes, for example, game setting values, unit big win lottery number information, base information, continuous role ratio information, role ratio information, etc.
The sub-image display unit 38 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display,
The display may be an organic EL display, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display with an organic EL display.

Further, it is also conceivable to provide a magnetic sensor or a radio wave sensor (neither of which are shown) on the game board 31. The magnetic sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning hole 314 or the variable winning hole 316.
The magnet sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the magnet sensor are input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent behavior when a magnet is used to fraudulently guide a gaming ball to the first winning opening 314 or the variable winning opening 316. On the other hand, the radio wave sensor is provided, for example, near the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the radio wave sensor are input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent behavior when a radio wave is fraudulently input to the ball entry sensors 314a, 315a, causing a false detection of a game ball entry. The radio wave sensor,
For example, it is possible to detect radio waves from 50 MHz to 3 GHz.

The main display section 37 includes an LED pair 371 arranged in the upper right portion of the game board 31, two 7-segment displays 372 and 373, and an LED group 374. The LED pair 371 is triggered by a winning entry to the through gate 317, and controls the electric role 31 in the main control unit 331.
The result of the lottery as to whether or not to open 5b is displayed by a combination of lights on and off (lighting pattern). In the seven-segment display 372, winning at the first winning port 314 is used as a trigger to display a varying pattern, and a pattern corresponding to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 331 is frozen and displayed. In the seven-segment display 373, winning at the second winning port 315 is used as a trigger to display a varying pattern, and a pattern corresponding to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 331 is frozen and displayed. In the LED group 374, the reserved number N and reserved number M of the variable display caused by winning at the first winning port 314 and the second winning port 315 are displayed by the lighting pattern of multiple LEDs.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a dispensing mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 1
It has 40.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 for paying out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23. When the upper tray 23 is saturated with game balls, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower tray 24.

As shown in Fig. 5, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132, etc. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 3 in response to the operation of the launch handle 22.
The power supply control device 9 converts the power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected, to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies it to the control device and drive means provided in the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main control unit 331]
5, the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of the game in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for transitioning to a preset jackpot game state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input/output I/F 42, and a performance information display device 4A.

The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and is an example of the main control means of the present invention. The MPU 41 also includes a built-in ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Some or all of the processing executed by the main control device 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input/output I/F 42 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the main control device 4 and outputs a control signal from the main control device 4. The input/output I/F 42 also includes an entrance ball sensor 313a.
The MPU 41 is connected to the ball entry sensor 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 35, and the main display unit 37. The MPU 41 detects the general winning hole 3 based on the detection signals from the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a.
13, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, the variable winning port 316, and the through gate 31
The MPU 41 determines whether or not a ball has entered the ball slot 7. The MPU 41 also counts the number of out balls (number of shot balls) based on a detection signal from the out ball sensor 35. The input/output I/F 42 is further connected to the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the shot control device 8, the power supply control device 9, and the like.

Then, the MPU 41 outputs commands to the voice lamp control device 5, such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round play start command, an ending start command, a jackpot play end command, a game setting value change command, and a unit jackpot lottery count update command.

The variation pattern command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the variation display time and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and includes information on the jackpot type when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The variation pattern command is set in step S1605 in the variation start process in FIG. 19 described later, based on information stored in the reserve storage area 412b described later, when the main display unit 37 starts displaying the pattern variation. The variation pattern command may be a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of only the variation display time. In this case, the command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type is set as a command separate from the variation pattern command.

The first and second reserved commands are commands that, when the reserved number N or reserved number M stored in the reserved storage area 412b described later increases, notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the increased reserved number, the fluctuation pattern, and the reserved number N or reserved number M. The first and second reserved commands are set based on the information stored in the reserved storage area 412b described later when the reserved number N or reserved number M increases (step S1207 or step S1
209).

The shift command is, when the reserved number N or the reserved number M is decreased, the first reserved area REA1
This is a command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 that the winning/losing information indicating the lottery result in the big win lottery in the first to fourth reserved areas REA4 or the first to fourth reserved areas REB1 to REB4 has shifted. The shift command is executed in step S
This is set at 1508.

The jackpot game start command is a command that notifies the voice and lamp control device 5 that a jackpot game is about to start, i.e., that the game state is about to transition to a jackpot game state, and is set in the game state transition process in the main process of FIG. 16, which will be described later, when transitioning to the jackpot game state. In addition, since the jackpot game start command is a command that notifies the voice and lamp control device 5 that a jackpot game is about to start, the voice and lamp control device 5 can know that not only the jackpot game is about to start, but also that the opening is about to start by receiving the jackpot game start command. However, an opening start command may be set separately from the jackpot start command, and the voice and lamp control device 5 may know that the opening is about to start by the opening start command.

The round game start command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the start of each round game in the open/close execution mode in the jackpot game and round number information indicating which round the round game is, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 16 described later. Note that the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp that the opening ends and the open/close execution mode starts by the round game start command, but an opening end command may be set at the end of the opening separately from the round game start command, or an open/close execution mode start command may be set at the start of the open/close execution mode. Also, a command indicating the number of rounds of the round game that will be started may be set at the start of the round game separately from the round game start command, and the command may be sent to the voice lamp control device 5.

The jackpot game end command is a command for notifying the voice and lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is ending, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 16 described later.

The game setting value change command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and the changed game setting value, and is set in step S1710 in the game setting value change process of Figure 20 described below.

The unit jackpot lottery count update command is a command to update the number of times a certain number of negative balls (for example, minus 25) are drawn in a normal game state (a state in which the game is in a low probability mode and not in a high frequency support mode).
This is a command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the number of times that the pattern change display of the 7-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37 has been executed (the number of times that a jackpot has been drawn) in response to a winning entry into the first winning slot 314 of a ball (0 balls won), and is updated in step S1805 of the specific performance information update process in Figure 21 described below.

In addition, commands other than the above-mentioned commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, but their explanation will be omitted.

The main control device 4 also includes an oscillator circuit and a frequency divider circuit as means for supplying an operating clock to the MPU 41. The oscillator circuit outputs a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and the frequency divider circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillator circuit to generate an operating clock for the MPU 41.
Specifically, the execution period of a main timer interrupt process, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by a clock signal output from a frequency divider circuit.

In this embodiment, the frequency divider circuit outputs a predetermined interval (for example, 4 msec) to the MPU 41.
) a clock signal is supplied, and the MPU 41 receives the rising (or falling) edge of the clock signal.
Each time an interrupt occurs, a main timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is started and executed. Note that an oscillator circuit and a frequency divider circuit are also mounted in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply operating clocks for the main controls in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. A clock signal may also be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

The ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit in which various information can be read and written.
It is used as a temporary storage area (work area) for the processing executed by U41. For example,
The RAM 412 is used for setting commands to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, etc. The RAM 412 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

Here, the storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform the big win lottery and the like will be described with reference to Fig. 6. Specifically, the MPU 41 executes the big win lottery and the setting of the variable display time, etc., using the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the reserved storage area 412b, and the electric role reserved area 412c of the RAM 412.

The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C used for lottery selection of the jackpot.
1, a big win type counter C2 used to determine the big win type, and a reach random number counter C3 used to determine the miss type.
In a, a random number initial value counter CIN1 used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1
and a variation type counter CS1 that determines the variation display time in the main display section 37 and the symbol display section 341. Furthermore, the lottery counter 412a includes a normal win random number counter C4 used in the lottery for determining whether or not the electric role device 315b of the second winning port 315 is in an electric role open state, and a normal win initial value counter CIN2 used to set the initial value of the normal win random number counter C4. Hereinafter, when these multiple types of counters are collectively described, they will be simply referred to as counters.

The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value at short time intervals by the MPU 41 and the counters return to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. Updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 and are referred to by the MPU 41 when drawing a jackpot and setting the variable display time.

The reserved storage area 412b includes a first reserved storage area REA, a second reserved storage area REB,
and an execution area AE. The first reserved storage area REA includes a first reserved area REA1,
It includes the second reserved area REA2, the third reserved area REA3, the fourth reserved area REA4, and the reserved number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, the type of variable game in which a jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first reserved storage area REA and the seven-segment display 372 displays a variable display and a stop display may be referred to as a first special symbol game. The second reserved storage area REB includes the first reserved area REB1, the second reserved area REB2, the third reserved area REB3, the fourth reserved area REB4, and the reserved number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, the type of variable game in which a jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second reserved storage area REB and the seven-segment display 373 displays a variable display and a stop display may be referred to as a second special symbol game.

When a game ball enters the first winning hole 314, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is acquired as winning/losing information used in the jackpot lottery, and the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 of the first reserved storage area REA are stored in the RAM 412.
In addition, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 315, the game ball is stored in the RAM
Information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 stored in 412 is acquired as win/lose information used in the jackpot lottery, and stored in one of the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second reserve storage area REB. The win/lose information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 41, which functions as the determination means of the present invention, by executing processing according to a control program. Note that the lottery counters 412a (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS1) are set in correspondence with each of the first reserve storage area REA and the second reserve storage area REB.
2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1, etc.) may be provided separately.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2
In addition to the reach random number counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 and the second reserved storage area RE of the first reserved storage area REA
The received data is stored in one of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of B.

Therefore, in addition to the lottery result of the big win lottery for the variable game executed based on the winning/losing information stored in the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 and the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second reserve storage area REB,
It is possible to determine in advance the change pattern (change display time) of the pattern change display displayed in 1.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314, the winning/losing information is stored in the first reserved area R
The winning/losing information is stored in the first reserve area REA1, the second reserve area REA2, the third reserve area REA3, and the fourth reserve area REA4 in the order of priority in an available area. The number of reserved areas NAA in which winning/losing information is stored is stored as the reserved number N.

In addition, when the game ball enters the second winning hole 315, the winning/losing information is stored in the first reserve area REB.
The reserved number storage area NAB stores the reserved number of the first reserved area REB1, the second reserved area REB2, the third reserved area REB3, and the fourth reserved area REB4 in the order of priority.
The number of areas from B1 to the fourth holding area REB4 in which winning/losing information is stored is stored as the holding number M.

That is, in the gaming machine 10, the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 and the first
A total of eight memory areas corresponding to the maximum number of reservations in the reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 make it possible to reserve up to four pieces of winning or losing information as the winning history for the first winning slot 314 and the second winning slot 315, respectively.

In addition, as another embodiment, a reserve area with a maximum reserve number of eight may be provided in common to the first winning port 314 and the second winning port 315. In this case, the maximum reserve number of eight may be provided in total.
It is possible to hold the winning/losing information as the winning history for up to one time. The winning/losing information is stored as follows:
The MPU 41 executes the processes according to the control program.

The execution area AE is a memory area used to move the winning/losing information stored in the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA or the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB when the display of changing patterns is started in the main display unit 37 and the pattern display unit 341. Specifically, the winning/losing information in the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE with priority, and when there is no winning/losing information in the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB and the reserved number memory area NAB is 0, the winning/losing information in the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

In addition, the reserved number M stored in the reserved number storage area NAA of the first reserved storage area REA
In another embodiment, when the difference between the reserved number N stored in the reserved number storage area NAB of the first reserved storage area REB and the reserved number N stored in the reserved number storage area NAB of the second reserved storage area REB is 2 or more, the value of the reserved area with the larger number is preferentially moved to the execution area AE.
Another embodiment can be considered in which the win/loss information of the first reserve area REA1 of A and the first reserve area REB1 of the second reserve storage area REB are alternately moved to the execution area AE.

Then, when one variable game is started, the MPU 41 performs a lottery for a big win based on the numerical information stored in the execution area AE as winning/losing information. At this time, if the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE,
The pass/fail information stored in the holding area REA2 is shifted to the first holding area REA1, the pass/fail information stored in the third holding area REA3 is shifted to the second holding area REA2, and the pass/fail information stored in the fourth holding area REA4 is shifted to the third holding area REA3.

Similarly, when the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the winning/losing information stored in the second reserved area REB2 is transferred to the first reserved area REB
1, and the winning/losing information stored in the third reserve area REB3 is shifted to the second reserve area REB2.
and the win/lose information stored in the fourth holding area REB4 is shifted to the third holding area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 637, and is reset to 0 after it reaches a maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1 (0 to 738). The jackpot random number counter C1 is,
It is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved storage area 412b when the game ball enters the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315.

The random number value for the big win is set to two types corresponding to the low probability mode and the high probability mode which is a sure-win state, according to the win/loss table stored in the win/loss table storage area in the ROM 411. Here, Fig. 7(A) is a diagram showing an example of the low probability mode win/loss table corresponding to the low probability mode, and Fig. 7(B) is a diagram showing an example of the high probability mode win/loss table corresponding to the high probability mode.

In the examples shown in Figures 7(A) and 7(B), a plurality of winning/losing tables are provided as a low probability mode winning/losing table and a high probability mode winning/losing table, each of which has a different probability (jackpot probability) of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery depending on the game setting value. The low probability mode winning/losing table and the high probability mode winning/losing table each include four winning/losing tables corresponding to the four game setting values 1 to 4. The game setting value 4, game setting value 3, game setting value 2, and game setting value 1 have a higher jackpot probability of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery being a jackpot, in that order, which is more advantageous for the player.

For game setting value 1, of the 65,536 random number values from 0 to 65,535, the number of random number values that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 206 (0 to 205) for the low probability mode win/lose table and 824 (0 to 823) for the high probability mode win/lose table.
In other words, with the game setting value 1, the probability of winning in the low probability mode is about 1/318.1 (206/
65536), and the probability of winning in the high probability mode is about 1/4, which is about four times that of the low probability mode.
The ratio is 79.5 (824/65536).

For game setting value 2, of the 65,536 random number values from 0 to 65,535, the number of random number values that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 213 (0 to 212) for the low probability mode win/lose table and 852 (0 to 851) for the high probability mode win/lose table.
In other words, with the game setting value 2, the probability of winning in the low probability mode is about 1/307.7 (213/
65536), and the probability of winning in the high probability mode is about 1/4, which is about four times that of the low probability mode.
The ratio is 76.9 (852/65536).

For game setting value 3, of the 65,536 random number values from 0 to 65,535, the number of random number values that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 220 (0 to 219) for the low probability mode win/lose table and 880 (0 to 879) for the high probability mode win/lose table.
In other words, with the game setting value 3, the probability of winning in the low probability mode is about 1/297.9 (220/
65536), and the probability of winning in the high probability mode is about 1/4, which is about four times that of the low probability mode.
The ratio is 74.5 (880/65536).

For game setting value 4, of the 65,536 random number values from 0 to 65,535, the number of random number values that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 227 (0 to 226) for the low probability mode win/lose table and 908 (0 to 907) for the high probability mode win/lose table.
In other words, with a game setting value of 4, the probability of winning in the low probability mode is about 1/288.7 (227/
65536), and the probability of winning in the high probability mode is about 1/4, which is about four times that of the low probability mode.
72.2 (908/65536).

If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a random number other than the random number that results in a jackpot win, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a loss.

Here, in the low probability mode hit/miss table and the high probability mode hit/miss table, the random numbers that result in a hit lottery for a hit lottery between the same game setting value are the same, but it is also possible that the random numbers that result in a hit are not the same. Also, the random numbers that result in a hit may not be consecutive values, but may be partially or entirely discrete values.

In addition, four low probability mode winning/losing tables and four high probability mode winning/losing tables are provided according to the four game settings, but at least one winning/losing table for each mode is sufficient. In other words, the game settings are not limited to four levels. In addition, it is also possible to provide multiple low probability mode winning/losing tables corresponding to multiple game settings, while providing one high probability mode winning/losing table. In other words, it is also possible to provide multiple settings for the low probability mode, not provide a gradual game setting for the high probability mode, and make the jackpot probability uniform. Of course, it is also possible to make the jackpot probability uniform in the low probability mode, and provide multiple game settings for the high probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by one within the range of 0 to 19, and is reset to 0 after it reaches a maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved storage area 412b when a gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two jackpot types, the special jackpot and the normal jackpot, is set by the allocation table stored in the allocation table storage area in the ROM 411.

Here, FIG. 7C is a diagram showing an example of the distribution table. In the example shown in FIG.
When the type of the variable game is a first special symbol game triggered by winning the first winning port 314,
The number of random numbers that will result in a 5R special jackpot is 10 numbers from 0 to 9, the number of random numbers that will result in a 16R special jackpot is 5 numbers from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R normal jackpot is 5 numbers from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of variable game is a second special symbol game triggered by winning the second winning slot 315, the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R special jackpot is 5 numbers from 0 to 4, the number of random numbers that will result in a 16R special jackpot is 10 numbers from 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R normal jackpot is 15.
In other words, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop probability game machine in which the probability of a probability jackpot in the first special symbol game and the probability of a probability jackpot in the second special symbol game are the same.
In this case, the probability of a 16R special jackpot is set higher in the second special symbol game than in the first special symbol game. That is, in the special symbol game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode),
The expected value of winning game balls when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is set higher than in the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the normal game state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode).

In this embodiment, an individual allocation table is set for the first winning slot 314, which triggers the execution of the first special symbol game upon winning, and the second winning slot 315, which triggers the execution of the second special symbol game upon winning, and the game balls are allocated to the first winning slot 314 and the second winning slot 315.
The allocation probability of the jackpot type differs depending on which of the two is won, but it is also possible that the allocation probability of the jackpot type is the same for the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game.
Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a loop variable-rate machine, and may be configured as a so-called ST machine, V-ST machine, type 1/type 2 mixed machine, or the like.

Then, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a "5R sure jackpot," a "16R sure jackpot," a "5R normal jackpot," or a "miss."

Here, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R variable probability jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which the round game in which the variable winning port 316 is opened is repeated five times in the jackpot game. Also, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R variable probability jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which the round game is repeated 16 times in the jackpot game.

In the case of a 5R or 16R jackpot, the game moves to a high probability mode in which the probability of winning a jackpot is high and the probability of opening the electric device 315b is high after the jackpot game ends. In this embodiment, the high probability mode is
This continues until U41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery is a "5R special jackpot", a "16R special jackpot", or a "5R normal jackpot".

On the other hand, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to a time-saving game state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is low in a low probability mode and the probability of opening the electric role 315b is high in a high frequency support mode. In this embodiment, the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) continues until the lottery results of the jackpot lottery a preset number of times, such as 50 times or 100 times, are notified to the player, or ends when the lottery results of the jackpot lottery are notified to the player before the specified number of times have elapsed.

Incidentally, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine, rather than a loop probability variable machine, after the end of the jackpot game at the probability variable jackpot, a preset number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 50 times, 100 times) are executed in the probability variable game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), and if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery does not become a jackpot before the specified number of times has elapsed, the game transitions to a normal game state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode), and the high frequency support mode ends. In addition, in variable play, a lottery for falling from the probability variable game state to a time-saving game state or a normal game state can also be considered as another embodiment. Note that if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, the game does not transition to the jackpot game state or the time-saving game state. In this embodiment, an example will be described in which the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpots: a 5R special jackpot, a 16R special jackpot, and a 5R normal jackpot. However, this is not limited to this, and it is also possible for the gaming machine 10 to have other jackpot types, such as a 2-round special jackpot, a 2-round normal jackpot, and a 16R normal jackpot.

The reach random number counter C3 is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 238.
After reaching the maximum value, it is reset to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is set in the reserved storage area 41 at the timing when the game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315.
2b.

In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of the stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when the lottery result in the big win lottery is a miss. Specifically, the miss type table stored in the miss type table storage area in the ROM 411 sets the values of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to three types of miss types: a front-back miss reach in which the final stop symbol stops shifted by one symbol before or after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, a non-front-back miss reach in which the final stop symbol stops other than before or after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and a complete miss in which no reach occurs.

Here, Fig. 7(D) is a diagram showing an example of a miss type table. In the example shown in Fig. 7(D), the random number value for a front or rear miss reach is 0 to 8, the random number value for a reach other than a front or rear miss is 9 to 38, and the random number value for a complete miss is 39 to 238. Note that in a variable game in which a 5R certainty variable jackpot, a 16R certainty variable jackpot, or a 5R normal jackpot is won, that is, in a variable game that transitions to an open/close execution mode, the MPU 41 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Here, the reach is a state of change in which a state is indicated in which the main pattern combination indicating a big win is likely to occur between the start of the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display section 341 and the stop display of the pattern. In one example, the same pattern is displayed at two of the three stop positions on the pay line on the pattern display section 341, and the display pattern corresponding to the remaining stop position is variable. In addition, during the variable state of the reach on the pattern display section 341, a story presentation process is executed in which a video of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, and a player-participation type operation presentation process is executed in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the presentation. Note that, during the execution of these presentation processes, the variable display on the pattern display section 341 may be hidden or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged form.

The electric role opening counter C4 is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 250, and is reset to 0 after reaching a maximum value. The electric role opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and when a game ball enters the through gate 317, the electric role holding area 41 in the RAM 412 is incremented by one.
2c. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held to determine whether the electric role 315b will be opened for a predetermined time based on the value of the electric role opening counter C4 stored in the electric role reservation area 412c. For example, it is considered that a win occurs when the electric role opening counter C4 is 0 to 199, and a loss occurs when the electric role opening counter C4 is 200 to 250.

The variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 199, and is reset to 0 after reaching a maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 according to the lottery result in the big win lottery. In this way, by determining the variation pattern type,
In the voice lamp control device 5, the types of rough variable game performances such as high-speed variable performances (basic performances, non-reach performances), normal reach performances, super reach performances, and special reach performances are
It is determined according to the fluctuation pattern type (fluctuation display time). The fluctuation type counter CS1 is
The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process described later is executed by the PU 41, and is also repeatedly updated during the remaining time in the main process.
2b.

Then, the MPU 41 determines a variation pattern indicating the variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and a preset variation table.
The type of the variation pattern is specified by referring to the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variable jackpot variation table, or the miss variation table stored in advance in the variation table storage area 11. These variation tables may be provided separately for the low probability mode and the high probability mode. Also, the probability variable jackpot variation table may be provided separately for each of the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot.

Here, FIG. 8(A), FIG. 8(B) and FIG. 8(C) are diagrams showing examples of a normal big win fluctuation table, a probability big win fluctuation table and a miss fluctuation table.
As shown in Fig. 8B and Fig. 8C, in the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variable jackpot variation table, and the loss variation table, the variation patterns are previously associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1. Then, the MPU 41 refers to the normal jackpot variation table when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is "5R normal jackpot", the probability variable jackpot variation table when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot" or "16R probability variable jackpot", and the loss variation table when the lottery result is "loss", respectively, to identify the type of variation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8(A) and FIG. 8(B), in the normal big win fluctuation table and the probability big win fluctuation table, the fluctuation pattern "
When the variation pattern "01" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 sets the variation display time to 3 as the variation type (performance pattern type).
A normal reach presentation pattern with a variable display time of 60 s is determined, and the normal reach presentation pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341. The normal reach presentation pattern is a presentation pattern in which the final individual presentation type in the variable game presentation is a normal reach presentation. In addition, when the variable pattern "02" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a super reach presentation pattern with a variable display time of 60 s as the variable type (presentation pattern type), and the super reach presentation pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341. The super reach presentation pattern is a presentation pattern in which the final individual presentation type in the variable game presentation is a super reach presentation. In addition, when the variable pattern "03" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a special reach presentation pattern with a variable display time of 90 s, the longest, as the variable type (presentation pattern), and the special reach presentation pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341. The special reach presentation pattern is a presentation pattern in which the final individual presentation type in the variable game presentation is a special reach presentation.

As shown in FIG. 8(C), in the miss fluctuation table, a correspondence relationship between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern is defined for each stop type at the time of miss (reach before or after miss, reach other than before or after miss, complete miss) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of miss is reach before or after miss or reach other than before or after miss, one of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of miss is a complete miss, one of the fluctuation patterns "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Note that the fluctuation pattern "
When "04" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a no-reach presentation pattern (non-reach presentation pattern) with a variation display time of 7 s as the variation type (presentation pattern type), and the non-reach presentation pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341 (see FIG. 27). Also, when the variation pattern "05" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a no-reach presentation pattern (non-reach presentation pattern) with a variation display time of 10 s as the variation type (presentation pattern type), and the non-reach presentation pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, the variation display at the time of loss corresponding to the variation pattern "04" is as follows:
A losing pattern variable display is executed in which the variable display stops at a losing symbol without accompanying a notice effect in which a character, a message, etc. is displayed. In addition, in the gaming machine 10, as a losing variable display corresponding to the variable pattern "05", a losing pattern variable display is executed in which the variable display stops at a losing symbol accompanied by a notice effect in which a character, a message, etc. is displayed. In addition, when a losing variable display corresponding to the variable pattern "05" is executed, a player participation type operation effect in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected may be executed as a notice effect.

In addition, the type of the variation pattern is not limited to the examples shown in Figures 8 (A), 8 (B) and 8 (C). In addition, the probability variable jackpot variation table may be provided separately for each of the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of normal reach presentations with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as normal reach presentations executed in the normal reach presentation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "01", and one of the normal reach presentations selected from them is executed.

Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of super reach effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as the super reach effects executed in the super reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "02", and any one of the super reach effects selected from them is executed. The super reach effect is a reach effect with a longer variation time than the normal reach effect, and is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is higher than that of the normal reach effect, and the probability (expectation) of winning the jackpot is lower than that of the special reach effect.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, as the special reach performance executed in the special reach performance pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "03", a plurality of types of special reach performances with different characters and stories are prepared, and one of the special reach performances selected from among them is executed. The special reach performance is a reach performance with a longer variation time than the normal reach performance, and is, for example, a performance that develops from the normal reach performance or the super reach performance. The special reach performance is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation level) of winning the jackpot is higher than the normal reach performance or the special reach performance.

In addition, the presentation patterns corresponding to the variation patterns may include player participation type operation presentations, such as an operation presentation in which the operation status of the player on the operation button 20 is reflected in the presentation, for example a single operation presentation in which a single operation is reflected in the presentation, a rapid-fire operation presentation in which the player's rapid tapping of the operation button 20 is reflected in the presentation, and a long press operation presentation in which the player's long press of the operation button 20 is reflected in the presentation.

Then, when the MPU 41 specifies a variation pattern indicating the variation display time by the seven-segment displays 372, 373 and the pattern display unit 341 of the main display unit 37, it inputs a variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern and the lottery result of the big win lottery to the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is a "5R normal big win", the MPU 41 outputs one of the variation pattern commands "A01" to "A03" in which "A" indicating a 5R normal big win is added before the variation pattern "01" to "03". Also, the MPU 41
If the lottery result is a "5R probability jackpot," the variation pattern commands "B01" to "B03" are added with "B" indicating a 5R probability jackpot before the variation patterns "01" to "03."
Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "16R guaranteed jackpot," the MPU 41 outputs one of the fluctuation pattern commands "C01" to "C03," which are preceded by a "C" indicating that the jackpot is a 16R guaranteed jackpot. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "miss," the MPU 41 outputs one of the fluctuation pattern commands "01" to "03," which are preceded by a "C" indicating that the jackpot is a 16R guaranteed jackpot.
The variable pattern command "D01" to "D05" with "D" added to indicate that it is a miss.
5". This allows the voice lamp control device 5 to determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation display time) and the lottery result based on the fluctuation pattern command, and determines the details of the fluctuation mode such as the fluctuation type and performance type to be displayed on the pattern display unit 341 based on the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result. Then, the voice lamp control device 5 causes the pattern display unit 341 to execute a fluctuation display based on the determined details of the fluctuation mode, plays a sound in accordance with the fluctuation display from the speaker 26, and turns on, blinks, or turns off the illumination unit 27.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 executes a simple process of determining the variation pattern (variation display time) for the variation display in the symbol display section 341 based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation table. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the big win lottery. In addition, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed in the symbol display section 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of variation modes as the variation mode.

Here, FIG. 9 shows the RAM 412 in the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine shown in FIG.
1 is a block diagram showing an example of a game information storage area 412d set in the game information storage area 412d. The game information storage area 412d stores game information related to game history, ball output performance, and the like. In this embodiment, the game information storage area 412d stores the game information such as "number of balls out,""number of balls paid out from general winning port,""number of balls paid out from first winning port,""number of balls paid out from second winning port,""number of balls paid out from variable winning port,""game setting value,""baseinformation,""sequential role ratio information,""role ratio information,""cumulative number of jackpot lottery draws,""number of unit jackpot lottery movements,""number of jackpots," and "number of consecutive misses." Of this game information, the "game setting value,""baseinformation,""sequential role ratio information,""role ratio information," and "number of unit jackpot lottery movements" are
This corresponds to game information (performance information) regarding ball output performance.

The "number of balls out" is the cumulative number of balls that have been shot onto the game board 31 in a normal game state (a state in which the game is in a low probability mode and not in a high frequency support mode).
is stored as a count value of the out balls detected by the out ball sensor 35 in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 13 described later.

The "number of balls paid out from the general winning port" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out in response to a winning into the general winning port 313 in normal game mode (low probability mode, not high frequency support mode). When a winning into the general winning port 313 is detected by the ball entry sensor 313a in normal game mode, this "number of balls paid out from the general winning port" is updated to a value adding the number of balls paid out from the current winning when setting a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to a winning into the general winning port 313 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing of Figure 16 described below.

The "number of balls paid out from the first winning port" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out in response to a winning into the first winning port 314 in normal game mode (low probability mode, not high frequency support mode). When a winning into the first winning port 314 is detected by the ball entry sensor 314a in normal game mode, this "number of balls paid out from the first winning port" is updated to a value that includes the number of balls paid out from the current winning when setting a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning into the first winning port 314 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main process of Figure 16 described below.

The "number of balls paid out from the second winning port" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out in response to a winning into the second winning port 315 in the time-saving game mode (a state in which the mode is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode). When a winning into the second winning port 315 is detected by the ball entry sensor 315a in the time-saving game mode, this "number of balls paid out from the second winning port" is updated to a value that includes the number of balls paid out from the current winning when setting a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning into the second winning port 315 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 16 described below.

The "variable winning port payout number" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out for winning into the variable winning port 316 in a jackpot game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode state).
When a winning ball is detected in the variable winning opening 316 by the control unit 6a, in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 16 described later, when setting a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning ball in the variable winning opening 316,
The value will be updated to include the number of balls paid out for this winning attempt.

In addition, the "number of balls out,""number of balls paid out from the general winning port,""number of balls paid out from the first winning port,""number of balls paid out from the second winning port," and "number of balls paid out from the variable winning port" are determined as follows: when the "number of balls out" reaches 60,000 balls (step S1806: Yes) in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 21 described later,
The number of balls is cleared to 0 (step S1810).

The "game setting value" is for selecting a low probability mode win/lose table (see FIG. 7(A)) and a high probability mode win/lose table (see FIG. 7(B)) to be used in the jackpot lottery (win/lose determination). In other words, the "game setting value" specifies the jackpot probability in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In this embodiment, as described below, four game settings (four types of low probability mode win/lose tables (see FIG. 7(A)) and high probability mode win/lose tables (
7B) is prepared. The "game setting value" is updated in the game setting value change process shown in FIG.

"Base information" is information about the "base," which is the payout rate (ball payout rate) in the normal game mode (low probability mode, not high frequency support mode), and this "base" is the ratio of the combined number of paid-out balls, the "number of balls paid out from the general winning port" and the "number of balls paid out from the first winning port," to the "number of out balls" in the normal game mode. Expressed mathematically, "base" =
100 x ("Number of balls paid out from the general winning slot" + "Number of balls paid out from the first winning slot") / "Number of balls out.""Baseinformation" is the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the previous 60,000 ball base B
Here, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 are updated every time the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 21 described later (steps S1807 and S1808).
The "base" when the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls is stored as the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the "base" when the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls before that is stored as the 60,000 ball base B2 before that, both of which are stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM 412. Also, until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls, it is calculated as the current base BL (
Step S1803), the current base BL is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM 412.

In this embodiment, the "base information" is "current base BL" and "previous 60,000 ball base B
The "base information" includes "base B1" and "base B2 of 60,000 balls from the previous game", and the past two bases of 60,000 balls are stored as history, but the past three or more bases of 60,000 balls may be stored as history. In addition, the "base information" may include the cumulative base from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present.

The "sequential prize ratio information" is information regarding the "sequential prize ratio," which is the ratio of the number of balls paid out from the variable prize opening to the total number of balls paid out from all prize openings from which prize balls are paid out (general prize opening 313, first prize opening 314, second prize opening 315, and variable prize opening 316).
The formula for the "sequential feature ratio" is "sequential feature ratio" = 100 x "number of balls paid out from variable winning slots".
/"total number of paid-out balls". The "sequential role ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 21 described later. In this embodiment, the "sequential role ratio information" is stored as the cumulative consecutive role ratio from the time the gaming machine 10 is installed in the gaming hall to the present. The "sequential role ratio information" may be the consecutive role ratio for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), the period until a certain number of jackpot draws (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal gaming state, or the period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls)). Of course, the "sequential role ratio information" is the cumulative consecutive role ratio and,
It may also include both the ratio of consecutive features over a certain period of time.

The "reel ratio information" is information on the "reel ratio," which is the ratio of the total number of balls paid out from the second winning port and the variable winning port to the total number of balls paid out from all winning ports (general winning port 313, first winning port 314, second winning port 315, and variable winning port 316) that pay out prize balls. The "reel ratio" can be expressed mathematically as follows: "reel ratio" = 100 x (
"Number of balls paid out from the second winning port" + "Number of balls paid out from the variable winning port" / "Total number of balls paid out". "Gem ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 21 described later. In this embodiment, the "Gem ratio information" is stored as the cumulative gem ratio from the time the gaming machine 10 is installed in the gaming hall to the present. The "Gem ratio information" may be the gem ratio for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), the period until a certain number of jackpots are drawn in the normal game state (for example, 1,000 times), or the period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls)). Of course, the "continuous gem ratio information" may include both the cumulative gem ratio and the gem ratio for a certain period.

The "accumulated number of jackpot lotteries" is the number of jackpot lotteries performed in the normal game mode (low probability mode, not high frequency support mode) from the start of the gaming machine 10 before the opening of the gaming hall to the present. In other words, the "accumulated number of jackpot lotteries" is also the accumulated number of variation display times in which the pattern variation display of the 7-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37 is executed in response to a winning entry into the first winning slot 314 in the normal game mode. The "accumulated number of jackpot lotteries" is incremented by one each time the pattern variation display of the main display unit 37 is started in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 19 described later. The "accumulated number of jackpot lotteries" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

The "unit jackpot lottery count" is the number of times a jackpot lottery has been drawn triggered by winning the first winning slot 314 per a certain number of negative difference balls in a normal gaming state (a state in which the ball is in a low probability mode and not in a high frequency support mode) (the number of times indicated by the seven-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37).
In this embodiment, the fixed number is "250 balls", and the difference in balls is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the "number of balls paid out to the general winning port" and the "number of balls paid out to the first winning port" from the "number of out balls". In other words, the "unit number of jackpot lotteries" is the number of times the seven-segment display 372 displays the pattern change (the number of jackpot lotteries) on average for 1000 yen when 250 balls are lent for 1000 yen at an amusement hall. The "unit number of jackpot lotteries" may be the number of times a jackpot lottery is received per a fixed number of "out balls" in the normal gaming state. The "unit number of jackpot lotteries" is updated in step S1805 in the specific performance information update process in FIG. 21 described later. In this embodiment, the "unit number of jackpot lotteries" is
It is stored as the cumulative number of unit jackpot draws from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall until the present. The "unit jackpot draw number" may be for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpot draws (e.g., 100 draws), a period until a certain number of jackpot draws (e.g., 1,000 draws) are executed in the normal game state, or a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (e.g., 60,000 balls)). Of course, both the cumulative number of unit jackpot draws and the number of unit jackpot draws in a certain period may be stored as gaming information as the "unit jackpot draw number."

The "number of jackpots" is the number of times that the lottery results in jackpots have been won since the start of the gaming machine 10 before the opening of the gaming hall until the present. The "number of jackpots" is incremented by one each time the gaming state is shifted to a jackpot gaming state in the gaming state shift process executed in step S1306 in the main process of Fig. 16 described later.
In addition, the "number of jackpots" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

The "number of consecutive misses" is the number of consecutive misses in the jackpot lottery in the normal game state (low probability mode, not high frequency support mode), and is cleared to 0 if the lottery result is a jackpot. When the pattern variation display of the main display unit 37 is started in step S1606 in the variation start processing in FIG. 19 described later, the "number of consecutive misses" is incremented by 1 if the result of the win/loss determination based on the low probability mode win/loss table in step S1603 is a miss, and is cleared to 0 if the result of the win/loss determination is a jackpot.
In this embodiment, the "number of consecutive misses" is stored in the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.
Of course, the "number of consecutive misses" may be configured not to be cleared from the game information storage area 412d when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

Returning to the explanation of Fig. 5, the performance information display device 4A displays "base information" and "game setting values" stored as game information (performance information) in a game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a game setting value display section 45, a setting value change operation section 46, and a ROM 47. Here, Fig. 10 is a diagram showing a schematic example of the performance information display device 4A.

As shown in FIG. 10, the performance display monitor 43 displays "base information" of the gaming machine 10, and is provided in a position where it can be seen when the inner frame 12 is expanded (see FIG. 3). The performance display monitor 43 is a display that includes a plurality of (four in this embodiment) seven-segment displays 4.
The performance display monitor 43 is composed of 31 to 434 and is called a 4-digit 7-segment display. It is preferable that the performance display monitor 43 is provided in the main control device 4, but it may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, or may be provided in another component of the game other than the main control unit 331. It is also possible to use the two 7-segment displays 372, 373 of the main display section 37 to display "base information."

The seven-segment displays 431 to 434 are capable of displaying the numbers "0" to "9" and the letters "A" to "F." When displaying the letter "B" on the seven-segment displays 431 to 434, a dot is lit up to display "8." in order to distinguish it from the number "8," and when displaying the letter "D," a dot is lit up to display "0." in order to distinguish it from the number "0." Furthermore, when displaying any of the letters "A" to "F," it is also possible to light up a dot to clearly indicate that it is an alphabet.

The performance display monitor 43 is made up of four seven-segment displays 431 to 434, the two on the left.
The segment indicators 431 and 432 are identification segments that display the "base type" as an abbreviated symbol, and the two right 7-segment indicators 433 and 434 are ratio segments that display the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41. For example, when the current base BL is 31%, the two left 7-segment indicators 431 and 432, which are identification segments, display the current base BL.
The abbreviation "BL" is displayed as "8." and "L", and the two right 7 ratio segments are
In the seven-segment displays 433 and 434, the base value "31" is displayed as "3" and "1".
8. ", "L", "3", and "1" are displayed.

The performance display switch 44 is operated to switch the power supply of the performance display monitor 43 (four seven-segment displays 431 to 434) on and off collectively by pressing it, and is provided in a position that allows easy operation when the inner frame 12 is unfolded (see FIG. 3). In the illustrated example, the power supply is turned on by pressing the upper half of the performance display switch 44, and the power supply is turned off by pressing the lower half. When the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn the power on, electricity is supplied to the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434, and the display of base information on the performance display monitor 43 is enabled. On the other hand, when the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn the power off, electricity is cut off to the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is not displayed. The performance display switch 44 may be provided in a location other than the main control device 4.

Here, FIG. 11 is an example of a display on the performance display monitor 43. As shown in FIG. 11(A), when the performance display switch 44 is off, the seven-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off, and so the base information is not displayed. As shown in FIG. 11(B) to FIG. 11(D), when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, unless the performance display switch 44 is turned off, each base is displayed repeatedly at regular intervals as "base information", in the order of current base BL → previous 60,000 ball base B1 → previous 60,000 ball base B2 → current base BL. In the example shown in FIG. 11(B), the current base BL is shown to be 28%, and in FIG. 11(C), the current base BL is shown to be 28%.
In the example shown in FIG. 11(A), the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 34%, and in the example shown in FIG. 11(D), the previous 60,000 ball base B2 is 32%. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11(A), when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the seven-segment indicators 431 to 434
is turned off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is not displayed.

In addition, the programs necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, such as a program for calculating the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the previous 60,000 ball base B2, and a program for displaying the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 in sequence at regular intervals on the performance display monitor 43, are stored in the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.
The program is stored in a ROM 47 provided separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41. This reduces the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has sufficient capacity, the ROM 411 may store the program required to display the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43. Also, the program required to display the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main control device 4.

In addition, the performance display monitor 43 may display other performance information stored in the game information storage area 412d, such as "continuous feature ratio information" or "feature ratio information", instead of or in addition to the "base information".

Furthermore, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to a seven-segment display, and may be configured with other types of display, such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, or an organic EL display.

Returning to the explanation of Fig. 10, the game setting value display unit 45 displays the above-mentioned game setting values for selecting the low probability mode win/lose table (see Fig. 7(A)) and the high probability mode win/lose table (see Fig. 7(B)) to be referenced in the big win lottery, and is configured with a 7-segment display. Note that the game setting value display unit 45 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured with other types of display such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, or an organic EL display, and the game setting values may be displayed using the performance display monitor 43.

The setting value change operation unit 46 switches the power of the seven-segment display on and off when pressed, and enables the game setting value to be changed by rotating when the power of the seven-segment display is on. The setting value change operation unit 46 has a function as a contact switch that is turned on and off by pressing, for example, and a function as a rotary switch whose contacts are switched by rotating (rotating by a predetermined angle). Here, Fig. 12 is a diagram showing an example of display on the game setting value display unit 45 of the main control device.

12A, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the game setting value display unit 45 is turned off, the seven-segment display is energized and a number is displayed on the game setting value display unit 45. The number displayed at this time is the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and indicates the current game setting value. In the illustrated example, the game setting value is "1". On the other hand, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the game setting value display unit 45 is turned on, the seven-segment display is de-energized and the game setting value display unit 45 is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 12(B), when the game setting value display section 45 is in a lit state, if a rotation operation is performed on the setting value change operation section 46, the number displayed on the game setting value display section 45 changes. In the illustrated example, the number displayed on the game setting value display section 45 becomes larger when the game setting value display section 45 is rotated to the right, and the number displayed on the game setting value display section 45 becomes smaller when the game setting value display section 45 is rotated to the left. Then, when the number displayed on the game setting value display section 45 is changed by rotating the game setting value display section 45, the changed number is stored as the game setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Therefore,
When the number corresponding to the target game setting value is displayed on the game setting value display unit 45, and the power supply of the seven-segment display is turned off by pressing the setting value change operation unit 46, the number displayed just before the power supply was turned off is determined as the game setting value.
The low-probability mode winning/losing table (see FIG. 7A) or the high-probability mode winning/losing table (see FIG. 7B) is selected according to the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412.
A jackpot lottery may be held based on the above (see (B)).

The method of changing the game setting value is not limited to the method of turning the setting value change operation unit 46 and then turning off the power supply of the game setting value display unit 45. For example, the game setting value may be determined by turning the setting value change operation unit 46 and then pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1 ).
A method of repeatedly or long-pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) to change the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 and then turning off the power of the game setting value display unit 45;
Alternatively, a method may be used in which a key is inserted into a keyhole provided in a machine or the like, and the key is turned to change the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45, and then the key is removed.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in Figure 5, the sub-control unit 332 is equipped with a voice lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and performs pattern variation display and performance display in the pattern display section 341 based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The voice and lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51 and an input/output I/F 52.
The MPU 51 is a computing device configured as a one-chip microcomputer.
511 and RAM 512 are built in.

The ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The ROM 511 also stores information such as sounds and lamp blinking patterns used in variable game presentations and big win game presentations. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. The RAM 512 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

The voice lamp control device 5 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51, and inputs a command (control signal) to the display control device 6 based on a command (control signal) input from the main control device 4, and controls the pattern display unit 341.
The sound lamp control device 5 also controls the playback sound output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 in accordance with the display of the pattern display unit 341. For example,
51 is a symbol display unit 341 when performing a variable game performance and a big win game performance described later.
The control section 24 controls the image display on the monitor 21, the audio output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the illumination section 27.

The input/output I/F 52 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the voice lamp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input/output I/F 52. Then, commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command are input from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5. In addition, the voice lamp control device 5 outputs a display variation pattern command, etc. to the display control device 6. Note that, as another embodiment, a configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the voice lamp control device 5 is also considered. In addition, as another embodiment, a configuration in which the sub-control unit 332 includes one control device having the functions of both the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also considered.

The input/output I/F 52 is also connected to the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27. In the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the voice output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 based on a command input from the main control device 4. The input/output I/F 52 is also connected to the operation switch 20a. This allows the MPU 51 to detect that an operation has been performed on the operation button 20, and based on the detection result, it is also possible to control the image game presentation executed by the pattern display unit 341, the sound output presentation in which sound is output from the speaker 26, the lamp presentation by the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27, and the like.

The MPU 51 executes predetermined calculation processing based on commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command input from the main control device 4 .

Specifically, when a variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (a combination of stopped symbols of main symbols (see FIG. 32A), a variation display time, a variation type (see FIG. 32B)) and a performance pattern type (see FIG. 33A to
33(C)) and transmits a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern to the display control device 6 (see step S23057 in the command determination process in FIG. 31).
The MPU 51 starts displaying the variation of the symbols in the symbol display section 341. At this time, in the symbol display section 341, when the variation pattern command indicates a miss, a combination of main symbols corresponding to the miss is displayed. In addition, when the variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 executes a ball-out performance suggestion image display process for displaying a ball-out performance suggestion image suggesting the ball-out performance on the sub-image display section 38.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the pattern display unit 341 based on a command (control signal) input from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 controls the display of the pattern display unit 341 based on a display variation pattern command input from the voice lamp control device 5, thereby executing the pattern variation display and the performance display.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61 and an input/output I/F 62, and the voice lamp control device 5 and the pattern display unit 341 are connected to the input/output I/F 62. Note that the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 may be capable of bidirectional communication.

The MPU 61 is a computing device configured as a one-chip microcomputer.
The display control device 6 includes a built-in ROM 611 and a built-in RAM 612. The display control device 6 also includes other circuits, such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for receiving interrupts.
The display control device 61 executes processes according to a control program stored in a ROM 611 or the like. In addition, a part or all of the processes executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

In addition to the control program, the ROM 611 stores a plurality of types of images, such as variable patterns, such as main patterns, used in the variable pattern display of the pattern display unit 341, preview performance images, reach performance images, big win performance images, and miss performance images. The images displayed on the pattern display unit 341 include still images and videos. The ROM 611 also stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the type of image to be used, the display timing, and the variable display time of the variable pattern. In the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays images on the pattern display unit 341 according to the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, thereby realizing the variable pattern display and performance display.

The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for the processes executed by the MPU 61.
2 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

[Dispensing control device 7]
The dispensing control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input/output I/F 72, etc.
Reference numeral 71 denotes a computing device configured as a one-chip microcomputer.
OM711 and RAM712 are built in.

The ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 71. The RAM 712 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

The input/output I/F 72 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the dispensing control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the dispensing control device 7. Specifically, the input/output I/F 72 includes a
32 and a ball lending device 100 are connected.

As described above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23, and includes a drive unit 132a such as a motor that drives a ball stop member that switches whether or not game balls are paid out, and a payout sensor 132b that detects the game balls that are paid out individually. The payout control device 7 pays out any number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result by the payout sensor 132b. The payout control device 7 is also provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated, for example, to resolve ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error such as ball jamming occurs in the payout device 132.

The ball dispensing device 100 is installed in an island facility together with the gaming machine 10.
In response to the operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10, the ball lending device 100 can pay out a number of game balls equivalent to a preset amount within the range of the amount stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 and lend them to a player. Specifically, when a control signal for paying out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the MPU 71 controls the payout device 132 to pay out the predetermined number of game balls. Note that the recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium with an IC chip built in. The ball lending device 100 may also be capable of lending out a predetermined number of game balls according to the amount of cash inserted by inserting cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 is equipped with a launch control IC 81 that controls the operation of the game ball launch mechanism 32.
Specifically, while the launch handle 22 is being rotated, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feed device 322 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 to supply the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the launch rail 321. The launch control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the launch handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation, thereby launching the game balls on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feed device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON/OFF at a preset period (e.g., 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec.

The launch handle 22 is also provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation by the player, and a voltage is input to the launch control IC 81 according to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22. As a result, the launch control IC 81 adjusts the voltage applied to the solenoid 323 based on the voltage value input according to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22 so that the greater the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22, the stronger the launch strength of the game balls from the game ball launch mechanism 32.

Furthermore, the launch handle 22 is provided with a touch sensor 21a for detecting whether the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b that the player operates to stop the launch of the game ball at will.
Using the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b, when it is detected by the touch sensor 21a that the player is not touching the launch handle 22, or when it is detected that the ball stop switch 21b is being operated by the player, the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism 32 is stopped. As a result, for example, the launch handle 22 is fixed in a rotating state, and a game is prevented in a situation where the player is not touching the launch handle 22. Also, the player can stop the launch of the game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b with his/her thumb or the like at any timing while rotating the launch handle 22.

[Power supply control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a +12V voltage for driving various sensors and drive units, a +5V voltage for logic used in the control device, etc. The power supply control device 9 then supplies the generated +12V or +5V voltage to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, etc.

The power supply control device 9 is provided with a power supply switch 90 for turning the power supply of the gaming machine 10 ON/OFF, and a RAM erase switch 91 which is operated to return the gaming machine 10 to its initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power supply switch 90 is operated to turn on the power supply while the RAM erase switch 91 is ON.

The power supply control device 9 is also provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means that are charged with power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is retained for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the capacitor. Also, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

Furthermore, when the power supply control device 9 determines that the power supply has been cut off, it
A power outage signal is input to the voice lamp control device 5, the dispensing control device 7, etc. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24 V based on the power supplied from the power supply facility, it determines that a power outage has occurred when the DC voltage reaches a preset value below 22 V. When the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the dispensing control device 7, etc. receive a power outage signal from the power supply control device 9, they interrupt the control being executed and execute a specified NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main control device 4]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to Figures 13 to 26. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 executes start-up processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the start-up processing, main timer interrupt processing that is started periodically, and NMI interrupt processing that is executed in the event of a power outage. Note that in this embodiment, explanations of the start-up processing and NMI interrupt processing will be omitted, and only the main timer interrupt processing and main processing will be described.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main control unit 4]
Here, FIG. 13 is a flowchart for explaining an example of a procedure of a main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt process is, for example, 2 msec.
The main timer interrupt process is executed every c. The main timer interrupt process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1001>
As shown in FIG. 13, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process to determine the detection state of the sensors connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection states of the entrance ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 35, etc. are determined.
When the MPU 41 detects the entry of a game ball into any of the entry sensors 313a to 317a, it stores the information as winning detection information in the RAM 412. When the MPU 41 detects an out ball by the out ball sensor 35, it adds 1 to the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to update the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d. The number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d is cleared to 0 when the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is calculated by reaching 60,000 balls (see step S1810 in the specific performance information update process in FIG. 21).

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 increments the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN
Specifically, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN
The counter value in 2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0.

<Step S1003>
Next, in step S1003, the MPU 41 executes updating of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal win random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal win random number counter C4, respectively, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
Thereafter, the MPU 41 executes a start winning process associated with a winning at the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315 (step S1004), and executes a launch control process (step S1005).
The details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, the launch control process is carried out by detecting the touch sensor 22 when the player touches the launch handle 22.
The launch control process is a process for validating the launch of game balls on the condition that the launch is detected by the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch is not operated. The launch control process is a process for invalidating the launch of game balls when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. When the launch of game balls is valid, the MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch the game balls.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 executes a through gate process to determine whether or not the electric role 315b of the second winning port 315 is in an electric role open state based on the normal win random number counter C4 stored in the electric role reserve area 412c. Specifically, in the through gate process, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the current game mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency support mode flag. Then, when the high frequency support mode is not in effect, the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol wins when the normal win random number counter C4 is 0 to 29, and determines that the normal symbol wins when the normal win random number counter C4 is 30 to 249. In addition, when the high frequency support mode is in effect, the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol wins when the normal win random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and determines that the normal symbol wins when the normal win random number counter C4 is 200 to 249. When the MPU 41 determines that a normal symbol has been won in the through gate process, the electric device 315b is opened for a predetermined time. This allows a win in the second winning hole 315 in the upper right of the game board 31 where the electric device 315b is arranged.

[Start-up winning process]
Here, FIG. 14 shows the main timer interrupt process in step S1004 of FIG.
1 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a start winning process executed by the game machine 1.
The start-up winning process will be explained with reference to 4.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 14, in step S1101, the MPU 41 judges whether or not a prize has been won at the first prize slot 314. Here, when the MPU 41 judges that a prize has been won at the first prize slot 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process returns to step S110.
2, and if it is determined that there is no winning at the first winning slot 314 (step S110
1: No), and proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 judges whether the reserved number N stored in the reserved number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum reserved number (4 in this embodiment). If the reserved number N is the maximum reserved number (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1106. On the other hand, if the reserved number N is not the maximum reserved number (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the reserved number N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 acquires the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of Figure 13, and the variable type counter CS1, which is updated in the main processing described below (steps S1302 and S1313 of Figure 16), and stores the counter values in the first empty reserve area among the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first reserve storage area REA of the reserve storage area 412b in RAM 412.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 checks the contents of the winning/losing information for the first reservation acquired in step S1104 before it becomes the subject of judgment of winning/losing of the jackpot in the fluctuation start process (S1408 in FIG. 17, FIG. 19) described later, and executes a first reserved command setting process to set the first reserved command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. The details of the first reserved command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 15.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a win has been made at the second winning port 315. If the MPU 41 determines that a win has been made at the second winning port 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107. If the MPU 41 determines that a win has been made at the second winning port 315 (step S1106: No), the process ends the initial winning process and proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 judges whether the reserved number M stored in the reserved number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum reserved number (4 in this embodiment). If the reserved number M is the maximum reserved number (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and moves the process to step S1005 in FIG.
41, if the reserved number M is not the maximum reserved number (step S1107: No),
(step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 acquires the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of Figure 13, and the variable type counter CS1, which is updated in the main processing described below (steps S1302 and S1313 of Figure 16), and stores the counter values in the first empty reserve area among the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second reserve storage area REB of the reserve storage area 412b in RAM 412.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 checks the content of the win/loss information for the second reserved command acquired in step S1109 before the information is used to determine whether or not a jackpot has been won in the fluctuation start process described below (S1408 in FIG. 17, FIG. 19), and executes a second reserved command setting process to set a second reserved command in RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. Here, the second reserved command setting process is similar to the first reserved command setting process described below with reference to FIG. 15, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that the second reserved command setting process is the same as the first reserved command setting process in FIG. 15, except that the "first reserved command" is changed to the "second reserved command",
Simply read "reserved number N" as "reserved number M."

[First Pending Command Setting Process]
Here, Fig. 15 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first reserved command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in the start winning process in Fig. 14. The first reserved command includes information indicating that the command is the first reserved command, and information such as the type of the first reserved command (jackpot type or miss), the fluctuation pattern, and the number of reserved commands N. The first reserved command setting process will be described below with reference to Fig. 15.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 15, the MPU 41 stores the reserved number storage area N
The reserved number N is read from AA, and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first reservation is read from RAM 412 (step S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the mode is the high probability mode. If the mode is the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203. If the mode is not the high probability mode (step S1202: No), the process proceeds to step S1204.
For example, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the mode is the high probability mode based on a high probability mode flag that is set to ON when the mode is switched to the high probability mode in a game state switching process (step S1306 in FIG. 16) in the main process described later, and is set to OFF when the mode is switched from the high probability mode to another game state such as a big win game state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads the high probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 7(
B) is read out, and based on the high probability mode hit/miss table, step S1201
On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads out a low-probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 7A) that is saved according to the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value change process in FIG. 20 described later, and executes a win/loss judgment as to whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out in step S1201 corresponds to a jackpot win based on the low-probability mode win/loss table.

In steps S1203 and S1204, the win/loss determination is performed based on the high probability mode win/loss table or the low probability mode win/loss table stored according to the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value change processing of FIG. 20 described later.
After reading out the game setting value stored in the memory, a win/lose determination may be made by selecting one by one the high probability mode win/lose table or the low probability mode win/lose table corresponding to the game setting value.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 judges whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot win. If the MPU 41 judges that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot win (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206. If the MPU 41 judges that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 does not correspond to a jackpot win (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads the jackpot type counter C2 from the RAM 412.
For example, when the winning/losing information is stored in the third reserved storage area RE3 in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. 14, the counter values of the big win type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1 included in the winning/losing information stored in the third reserved storage area RE3 are read out. Note that, among the first reserved storage area RE1 to the fourth reserved storage area RE4, the counter values of the big win type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1 included in the winning/losing information stored in the third reserved storage area RE3 in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG.
The reserved area in which the winning/losing information is stored in 104 can be determined by the value of the reserved number N stored in the reserved number storage area NA.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1, and the reserved number N in the first reserved command. In this way, since the first reserved command includes the reserved number N read out in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 that receives the first reserved command can recognize which of the first reserved storage area RE1 to fourth reserved storage area RE4 the winning/losing information stored in the first reserved storage area RE1 to fourth reserved storage area RE4 corresponds to by referring to the reserved number N included in the first reserved command.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets information indicating that the lottery result in the big win lottery is a miss, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the reserved number N in the first reserved command (
Step S1209).

The first reserved command set to ON in the first reserved command setting process is
412, and is erased after being sent to the voice lamp control device 5 together with other commands in step S1301 of the main process in Fig. 16, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Furthermore, the contents of the first hold command described here are merely an example, and are not limited to those described here as long as the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the same contents as the hold command. For example, it is conceivable that some or all of the information of the first hold command is included in another command.

[Main Processing of Main Control Device 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to Fig. 16. In the main processing, main control processing for the progress of variable play and big win play is executed. In the main processing, the processing of steps S1301 to S1310 is executed as a regular processing of, for example, a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update processing of steps S1311 to S1313 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processing of steps S1301 to S1310 until the next cycle.

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 16, in step S1301, the MPU 41 transmits output data such as commands set in the main timer interrupt process or the previous main process in FIG. 13 to the sub-control unit 3.
32 or the peripheral control unit 140. For example, when commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a game setting value change command, and a unit jackpot lottery count update command are set in the RAM 412, the command is sent to the voice lamp control device 5.
In the main process, in the prize ball command setting process in step S1303 described later, RAM4
If a prize ball command is set in 12, that prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 controls the dispensing control device 7 and the sub-control unit 332.
Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the winning ball command to be output to the RAM 412.
Based on the winning detection information stored in the MPU 12, the MPU 12 judges whether or not a winning has occurred in the general winning port 313, the variable winning port 316, etc. Then, if a winning has occurred, a winning ball command indicating the number of winning balls to be paid out according to the winning is set in the RAM 412.
41 is in the normal game state (low probability mode, not high frequency support mode),
When a win occurs in the general winning port 313 or the first winning port 314, the number of balls paid out from the general winning port or the number of balls paid out from the first winning port stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is
The MPU 41 updates the number of payout balls from the second winning port stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value that includes the number of payout balls from the current winning. In addition, in the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode state) or the sure-change game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode state), if a winning occurs in the second winning port 315, the MPU 41 updates the number of payout balls from the second winning port stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value that includes the number of payout balls from the current winning. In addition, in the big win game state, if a winning occurs in the variable winning port 316, the MPU 41 updates the number of payout balls from the variable winning port stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value that includes the number of payout balls from the current winning.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a variable game control process for controlling the game in the variable game. The details of the variable game control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 17. In the variable game control process, the jackpot lottery described above is executed, and a variable pattern command required for the variable pattern display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 executes the jackpot random number counter C updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG.
1. Big win type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and step S1 of this process
Based on the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in step S1313 and step S1302,
A variable pattern command indicating the lottery result of the big win lottery and the variable display time is set in RAM 412.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, a control process for the jackpot game consisting of an opening, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 executes a round game in which the variable winning port 316 is opened, by controlling the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 316b, the number of times corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game (jackpot type). For example, the MPU 41 executes a round game five times when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot and a 5R variable jackpot, and executes a round game 16 times when the jackpot type is a 16R variable jackpot. In addition, in the jackpot game control process, when starting each round game in the opening/closing execution mode, a round game start command is set in the RAM 412, and when starting an ending, an ending start command is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for transitioning the game state based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in step S1602 or S1603 in the fluctuation start process in Fig. 19 described later. In the game state transition process, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the MPU 41 transitions the game state to a jackpot game state in which the open/close execution mode is executed, a sure-variable game state which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a time-saving game state which is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a normal game state which is a low probability mode but not a high frequency support mode, and the like.

For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to a jackpot gaming state after the variable game in which the result of the lottery is notified is finished.
The MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the jackpot game state to a predetermined game state according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the execution of the jackpot game. In this embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R variable probability jackpot or a 16R variable probability jackpot, the MPU 41 transitions the game state to a variable probability game state after the jackpot game ends, and when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R normal jackpot, the MPU 41 transitions the game state to a time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends. In addition, when the notification of the lottery result for the specified number of jackpot lotteries ends in the time-saving game state, the MPU 41 transitions the game state to a normal game state after the variable game ends.

In addition, when the MPU 41 transitions the game state, it sets the flag for the game state before the transition to OFF, while setting the flag for the game state after the transition to ON. For example, when the game state transitions from the jackpot game state to the probability variable game state, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game flag to OFF, while setting the high probability mode flag to ON. On the other hand, when the game state transitions from the probability variable game state to the jackpot game state, it sets the high probability mode flag to OFF, while setting the jackpot game flag to ON.

Furthermore, when the MPU 41 transitions the game state to a jackpot game state, it sets a jackpot game start command in the RAM 412 and adds one to the "number of jackpots" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes a display control process for the main display unit 37. By this display control process, the seven-segment displays 372 and 373 in the main display unit 37 are
In step 3, the pattern change display is executed only during the change display time corresponding to the change pattern command,
The symbol variation display is stopped and displayed with a symbol that indicates the lottery result. In addition, the display control process causes each LED lamp in the LED pair 371 in the main display unit 37 to flash only during a predetermined normal symbol variation display time, and the presence or absence of a normal symbol winning is indicated by a lighting pattern that is a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the pair of LED lamps. In addition, when a normal symbol is winning, the electric device 315b associated with the second winning hole 315 is opened for a predetermined time.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes a game setting value change process. In this game setting value change process, a process is executed to control display or non-display of the game setting value, or change of the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d, according to an operation on the setting value change operation unit 46. Details of the game setting value change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 20.

In this embodiment, the game setting value change process is executed in the main process, but it may be executed only in the start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, or during the period from the start-up process until the launch of the game ball begins. As a result, after the player starts playing, the game setting value cannot be changed until the next time the power is turned on.
This makes it possible to prevent changes to game setting values during the opening hours of the game hall.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 executes a process of updating specific performance information from among game information. In this embodiment, the base information, the number of unit big win lotteries, the consecutive role ratio, and the role ratio are updated as the specific performance information. Details of the specific performance information update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21 and FIG. 22.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 executes a display control process for the performance display monitor 43. In the display control process for the performance display monitor 43, a process for displaying the base information updated in step S1309 on the performance display monitor 43 is executed.
The display control process will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS.

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 judges whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process. If the MPU 41 judges that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1311: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1301 and executes each process from S1301 onward. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 judges that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1311: No), the MPU 41 repeatedly executes steps S1311, S1312, and S1313 until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, during the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process, until it judges that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1311: Yes).

<Step S1312>
In step S1312, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values.

<Step S1313>
In step S1313, the MPU 41 updates the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the fluctuation type counter CS1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, after updating the fluctuation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1311.

[Variable game control processing]
Here, FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. 16. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG.
The variable game control process will now be described.

<Step S1401>
As shown in FIG. 17, in step S1401, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in a jackpot game. If the gaming machine 10 is in a jackpot game (step S1401: Yes),
s), the variable game control process is terminated, and if the jackpot game is not being played (step S140
1: No), and the process proceeds to step S1402. Whether or not a jackpot game is being executed is determined based on a jackpot game flag that is set to ON when the game state is transitioned to the jackpot game state and is set to OFF when the game state is transitioned from the jackpot game state to another game state, for example, in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the pattern change is being displayed, and if the pattern change is being displayed (step S1402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1403, and if the pattern change is not being displayed (step S1402: No), the process proceeds to step S1406. For example, whether or not the pattern change is being displayed is set to ON at the start of the change display in step S1606 in the change start process in FIG. 19 described later, and when the change display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1405 in the change game control process.
This is determined based on the variable display flag which is set to OFF in step 05.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the pattern. If it is judged that the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403:
If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the variable game control process is terminated.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
If the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the seven-segment displays 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 to stop displaying a pattern corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable game (step S1404), and sets the variable display in progress flag to off (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
If the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not both the reserved number N stored in the reserved number storage area NAA of the reserved storage area 412b and the reserved number M stored in the reserved number storage area NAB are 0 (step S140
Here, if both the reserved number N and the reserved number M are 0 (step S
1406: Yes), the variable game control process is terminated.
If either one of the reserved number M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the process proceeds to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes a data setting process for the winning/losing information data stored in the reserved storage area 412b.
If the process is completed, the process proceeds to step S1408. Details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 displays a variable display based on the winning/losing information on the symbol display unit 34.
1, executes the variable start process, and ends the variable game control process.
Details of the fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Fig. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 in Fig. 17. The data setting process will be described below with reference to Fig. 18.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 18, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether the reserved number M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0 or not. If the reserved number M is 0 (step S150
On the other hand, if the reservation number M is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
If the reserved number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the reserved number N stored in the reserved number storage area NAA (step S1502), and moves the winning/losing information from the first reserved area REA1 to the execution area AE (step S1503). Next, the MPU 41 shifts the winning/losing information of the second reserved area REA2 to the fourth reserved area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the winning/losing information of the second reserved area REA2 is moved to the first reserved area REA1, and the winning/losing information of the third reserved area REA2 is shifted to the execution area AE (step S1504).
The winning/losing information of A3 is moved to the second reserve area REA2, and the winning/losing information of the fourth reserve area REA4 is moved to the third reserve area REA3. When the process of step S1504 is completed, the MPU 41 transitions to the process of step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 is performed when the reserved number M is 0 (step S1501:
17 (step S1406: No). Therefore, when the reservation number M is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1501 if the reservation number M and/or the reservation number N is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. 17 (step S1406: No).
Since it can be determined that this is not the case, the processes in steps S1505 to S1507 are executed.

Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the reserved number M stored in the reserved number storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the winning/losing information from the first reserved area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506).
The winning/losing information in the fourth reserved area REB4 is shifted one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the winning/losing information in the second reserved area REB2 is moved to the first reserved area REB1, the winning/losing information in the third reserved area REB3 is moved to the second reserved area REB2, and the winning/losing information in the fourth reserved area REB4 is moved to the third reserved area REB3.
When the process of step S1507 ends, the PU 41 transfers the process to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 selects the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area R
A shift command indicating that the winning/losing information of EA4 or the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 has been shifted is set in the RAM 412. The shift command set in step S1508 is then sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 41. This changes the number of reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display unit 341, etc. When the process of step S1508 is completed, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process and proceeds to step S1408 in FIG. 17.

[Fluctuation start processing]
Here, FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 in FIG. 17.
The fluctuation start process will be explained.

<Step S1601>
As shown in Fig. 19, in step S1601, the MPU 41 judges whether the game state is in the high probability mode. Whether the game state is in the high probability mode is judged based on whether the high probability mode flag, which is set to ON in the game state transition process in step S1306 in the main process of Fig. 16, is set to ON. If the game state is in the high probability mode (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1602, and if the game state is not in the high probability mode (step S1601: No), i.e., if the game state is in the low probability mode, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 reads the high probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 7(
Based on the result of the calculation, the MPU 41 determines whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the winning/losing information stored in the execution area AE of the reserved storage area 412b corresponds to the winning of the jackpot or not.
Based on the low probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 7A) stored according to the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value change process of FIG. 20 described later, the reserved storage area 41
A win/loss determination is made as to whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1, which is included as numerical information in the win/loss information stored in the execution area AE of 2b, corresponds to a win/loss.

In steps S1602 and S1603, the win/loss determination is performed based on the high probability mode win/loss table or the low probability mode win/loss table stored according to the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value change processing of FIG. 20 described later.
After reading out the game setting value stored in the memory, a win/lose determination may be made by selecting one by one the high probability mode win/lose table or the low probability mode win/lose table corresponding to the game setting value.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the variation display time of the seven-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37 corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation game in the variation display time counter. Specifically, when the result of the win/loss determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a normal big win, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the normal big win variation table (see FIG. 8(A)). In addition, the MPU 41
If the result of the hit/miss judgment in step S1602 or S1603 is a sure-win,
The MPU 41 specifies a fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the probability variable jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 8(B)). Furthermore, when the result of the hit/miss judgment in step S1602 or S1603 is a miss, the MPU 41 specifies a fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the miss fluctuation table (see FIG. 8(C)).

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 transmits a fluctuation pattern command including the lottery result of the big win lottery for the corresponding fluctuation game and the fluctuation pattern specified in step S1604 to the R.
As a result, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 41, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice lamp control device 5 controls the symbol display unit 341 based on the variation pattern command.
It performs functions such as displaying changing patterns.

As described above, when the lottery result is a "normal jackpot," the MPU 41 displays "A01" in which "A" indicating a 5R normal jackpot is added to the variation patterns "01" to "03."
" to "A03" are set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. In addition, when the lottery result is a "5R sure-win", the MPU 41 sets one of the variation patterns "01" to "A04" in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command.
The MPU 41 sets one of "B01" to "B03" in which "B" indicating a 5R jackpot is added to "03" as a variable pattern command in the RAM 412.
If the lottery result is a "16R jackpot," there will be 16 variations in the variation patterns "01" to "03."
The MPU 41 sets, in the RAM 412, one of "C01" to "C03" with "C" added, which indicates that it is an R-type jackpot, as a variation pattern command. If the lottery result is a "miss", the MPU 41 sets, in the RAM 412, one of "D01" to "D08" with "D" added, which indicates that it is a miss, to the variation patterns "01" to "08". If the lottery result is a "miss", the MPU 41 includes, in the variation pattern command, information on whether it is a near miss, a near miss other than near miss, or a complete miss.

<Step S1606>
In step S1606, the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the symbols on the main display unit 37, and ends the variable start process. When the MPU 41 starts the variable display of the symbols on the main display unit 37, the variable display flag is set to ON. This variable display flag is set to ON in the variable display mode as shown in FIG.
In step S1402 in the variable game processing of No. 7, the MPU 41 refers to the main display unit 37 to determine whether the main display unit 37 is displaying a variable pattern.
When the symbol variation display is started, the game information storage area 412 set in the RAM 412
d, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "accumulated number of big win lotteries" stored in ...
The "number of consecutive misses" stored in the game information storage area 412d is incremented by 1, and if the result is a jackpot, the "number of consecutive misses" is cleared to 0.

[Game setting value change process]
Here, Fig. 20 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting value change process executed in step S1308 of the main process in Fig. 16. Hereinafter, the game setting value change process will be described with reference to Fig. 20.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S1701, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a pattern change is being displayed. If a pattern change is being displayed (step S1701: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the game setting value change process. If a pattern change is not being displayed (step S1701: No),
Then, the process proceeds to step S1702. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress is determined based on the variation display in progress flag that is set to ON in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG.

<Step S1702>
If the pattern change display is not in progress (step S1701: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game is in a jackpot game state (step S1702), and if the game is in a jackpot game state (step S1702: Yes), the game setting value change process is terminated, and if the game is not in a jackpot game state (step S1702: No), the process proceeds to step S1703.
For example, whether or not a jackpot game is being played is determined based on a jackpot game state flag that is set to ON in the game state transition process in step S1306 in the main process of FIG.

<Step S1703>
When neither the pattern change display nor the big win game state is in progress (steps S1701 and S1702 are No), the MPU 41 judges whether the power supply of the game setting value display unit 45 has been switched from off to on (step S1703), i.e., whether the operation to turn on the game setting value display unit 45 has been performed on the setting value change operation unit 46. That is, in this embodiment, when the pattern change display is in progress (step S1701: Yes) or when the big win game state is in progress (step S1702: Yes), the game setting value is not displayed and the game setting value cannot be changed. Here, when the power supply of the game setting value display unit 45 has been switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1704, and when the power supply of the game setting value display unit 45 has not been switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1707.

<Steps S1704 to S1706>
When the power supply of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from OFF to ON (step S170
3: Yes), the MPU 41 reads out the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710 described later (step S1704), and displays the number indicating the read game setting value on the game setting value display unit 45 (step S1705). This allows the current game setting value to be confirmed. Then, the MPU 41 sets the setting value display flag, which indicates that the game setting value is displayed on the game setting value display unit 45, to ON (step S1706), and ends the game setting value change process.

<Step S1707>
If the power supply of the game setting value display unit 45 is not switched from off to on (step S
1703: No), the MPU 41 judges whether or not the setting value display flag is set to ON (step S1707). The setting value display flag indicates that the game setting value is displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 as described above, and is set to ON in step S1706. If the setting value display flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1708, and if the setting value display flag is set to OFF (step S1707: No), that is, if the game setting value display unit 45 is turned off and the power is not turned on, the MPU 41 ends the game setting value change process.

<Step S1708>
If the setting value display flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes),
The PU 41 judges whether the setting value change operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S
In other words, the MPU 41 judges whether or not a rotation operation for changing the game setting value has been performed. When the setting value changing operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1
If the result of the determination in step S1708 is Yes, the process proceeds to step S1709. If the setting value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated (step S1708: No), the process proceeds to step S1711.

<Step S1709>
If the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes),
The PU 41 executes a process of changing the display on the game setting value display unit 45 (step S17
For example, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle, the MPU 41 displays a number that is one larger than the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 before the rotation, and conversely, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the left by a predetermined angle, the MPU 41 displays a number that is one smaller than the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 before the rotation.

In addition, when the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 before the rotation is "4", if the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle, the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is changed to "1", and the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 before the rotation is changed to "
When the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated leftward by a predetermined angle when the number is "1", the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is changed to "4". Also, when the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is "4", it may be prevented from rotating further rightward, and when the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is "1", it may be prevented from rotating further leftward.

<Step S1710>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 overwrites the game setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 with the number being displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 as the game setting value, and saves it.
The game setting value change process is terminated. As a result, when the power supply of the setting value change operation unit 46 is switched from on to off, the game setting value stored in the RAM 412 immediately before the power supply is turned off is finally stored in the game information storage area 412 of the RAM 412 as a valid game setting value.
d. Therefore, by changing the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46, the game setting value stored in the RAM 412 is changed. Then, by turning off the power supply of the game setting value display unit 45 while the number corresponding to the target game setting value is displayed on the game setting value display unit 45, the game setting value can be confirmed.

<Step S1711>
If the setting value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated by the predetermined angle (step S1708: No)
The MPU 41 determines whether the power supply of the game setting value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (
Step S1711), that is, whether or not an operation to turn off the power of the game setting value display unit 45 has been performed on the setting value change operation unit 46. If the power of the game setting value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1712, and if the power of the game setting value display unit 45 has not been switched from on to off (step S1711: No), the MPU 41 ends the game setting value change process.
When the power supply of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1711
: Yes), in the game setting value display unit 45, the numbers indicating the game setting value are turned off by cutting off the power to the 7-segment display, and the game setting value is confirmed as described above.

<Steps S1712 and S1713>
When the power supply of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from ON to OFF (step S171
1: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the low probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 7A) according to the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710.
And select the high probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 7B) and save it in the RAM 412 (
Step S1712. Then, the MPU 41 sets the setting value display flag to OFF, and ends the game setting value change process.

Here, in step S1712, a low probability mode win/lose table (see FIG. 7(A)) and a high probability mode win/lose table (see FIG. 7(B)) are selected according to the game setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. In other words, since a win/lose table with the same game setting values is selected for the low probability mode win/lose table and the high probability mode win/lose table, it is easy to change the game setting values. However, the game setting values in the low probability mode and the high probability mode may be individually changeable. In this case, it becomes possible to set game setting values of different stages (numbers) for the low probability mode and the high probability mode, for example, by setting the game setting value for the low probability mode to "1" and the game setting value for the high probability mode to "4".

[Performance information update process]
Here, Fig. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a specific performance information update process executed in the main process of Fig. 16. Fig. 22 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of Fig. 21. The specific performance information update process will be described below with reference to Figs. 21 and 22.

<Steps S1801 to S1803>
As shown in FIG. 21, the MPU 41 reads out the various payout ball numbers stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1801), and further reads out the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1802).
02). Here, the various payout numbers are the numbers of payout balls required to update base information, etc., and correspond to the number of payout balls for the general winning port, the number of payout balls for the first winning port, the number of payout balls for the second winning port, and the number of payout balls for the variable winning port. Then, the MPU 41 calculates the current base BL based on the number of payout balls for the general winning port, the number of payout balls for the first winning port, and the number of out balls that have been read out, and stores the current base BL in the game information storage area 4 of the RAM 412.
The current base BL of the base information stored in 12d is overwritten and updated (step S1803
) (See FIG. 22(A)). The current base BL (%) is calculated as 100 x (number of balls paid out from the general winning slot + number of balls paid out from the first winning slot) / number of out balls.

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
The MPU 41 reads out the cumulative number of big win lotteries (the cumulative number of variable display times) stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1804), and updates the unit number of big win lotteries stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S
1805). The number of unit jackpot lotteries is calculated as the number of times the seven-segment display 372 changes symbols (the number of times a jackpot lottery has been drawn) until the difference in balls becomes minus 250 balls in the normal game state. Specifically, the number of unit jackpot lotteries is calculated as "accumulated number of jackpot lotteries"/(("number of out balls"-"number of balls paid out to the general winning slot"-"number of balls paid out to the first winning slot")/250 balls). In this embodiment, the "number of unit jackpot lotteries" is calculated as the accumulated number of unit jackpot lotteries from the time the gaming machine 10 is installed in the gaming hall to the present.

<Step S1806>
In step S1806, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of out balls read in step S1802 has reached 60,000 balls, and if the number of out balls has reached 60,000 balls (step S1806: Yes), it transitions to step S1807, and if the number of out balls has not reached 60,000 balls (step S1806: No), it terminates the specific performance information update process.

<Steps S1807 to S1810>
If the number of out balls has reached 60,000 (step S1806: Yes), the MPU
The MPU 41 updates the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1807). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22(A) and FIG. 22(B), the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the previous 60,000 ball base (step S1807), shifts the current base BL updated in step S1803 to the previous 60,000 ball base B1 (step S1808), and clears the current base BL to 0 (step S1809). Then, the MPU 41 clears the various payout ball numbers and out ball numbers in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to 0 (step S1810).
), and terminates the specific performance information update process.

[Display control process of performance display monitor]
23 to 26 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1310 of the main process of FIG.
The display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Step S1901>
As shown in Fig. 23, in step S1901, the MPU 41 judges whether or not the BL display flag is set to ON.
This is a flag indicating that the current base BL is being displayed in step S3.
The BL display flag is set to ON in step S1906 or step S1930 in Fig. 26. If the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1908 in Fig. 24, and if the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
If the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No), the MPU
41 judges whether the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S190
2). Here, the B1 display flag is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 when the previous 60,000 ball base B1
The B1 display flag is set to ON in step S1912 of FIG. 24, which will be described later. When the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S
If the B1 display flag is set to OFF (step S1902: No), the process proceeds to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
If the B1 display flag is set to OFF (step S1902: No), the MPU
41 judges whether the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S190
3). Here, the B2 display flag is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 as the 60,000 ball base B
25. If the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1926 in FIG. 26. If the B2 display flag is set to OFF (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1904.
transition to.

<Step S1904>
If the B2 display flag is set to OFF (step S1903: No), the MPU
The display control unit 41 judges whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1905, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from off to on (step S1904: No), the display control process ends.

<Steps S1905 to S1907>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from OFF to ON (step S1904: Y
es), the MPU 41 displays the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1905
For example, the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is shown in FIG.
In the example shown in 2(A), the current base BL is 29%.
Four seven-segment displays 431, each of which includes "L", "2", and "9", constitute the performance display monitor 43.
434, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 22B, the current base BL
The four seven-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43 display "8.", "L", "0", and "0", which indicate that the battery is at 0%, respectively.
The L display flag is set to ON (step S1906), and a BL display time counter is set to display the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S190
7) The display control process ends.

<Steps S1908 and S1909>
If the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), the process shown in FIG.
23 (step S1908), and judges whether the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1909). If the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 returns to step S1904.
If the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S190
9: No), and proceeds to step S1913.

<Steps S1910 to S1913>
If the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes),
The MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to OFF (step S1910) and
The previous 60,000 ball base B1 included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d
On the performance display monitor 43 (step S1911). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 22(A), "8.", "1", "3", and "3" are displayed on the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 33%, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 22(B), "8.", "1", "2", and "9" are displayed on the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 29%. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to ON (step S1912), sets the B1 display time counter for displaying the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1913), and ends the display control process.

<Step S1914>
If the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No),
The PU 41 judges whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (
Step S1914). If the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1915.
If the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S1914: No), the display control process ends.
When the power supply to 434 is cut off, the letters and numbers indicating the current base BL are turned off.

<Steps S1915 and S1916>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1914: Y
es), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to OFF (step S1915), and
The display time counter is cleared to 0 (step S1916), and the display control process ends.

<Steps S1917 and S1918>
If the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1902.
24. As shown in FIG. 24, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter set in step S1913 (step S1917), and judges whether the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1918). If the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 returns to step S1
If the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S191
8: No), and proceeds to step S1923.

<Steps S1919 to S1922>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes),
The MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to OFF (step S1919) and
The base information stored in the game information storage area 412d includes the base B of 60,000 balls from the previous game.
2 is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1920). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 22(A), the following are displayed: "8.", "2", "3", "2", "3", "2", "4", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8", "9", "10", "11", "12", "13", "14", "15", "16", "17", "18", "19", "20", "21", "22", "23", "34", "19", "24", "19", "25", "26", "27", "28", "36", "19", "29", "37", "29", "38", "49", "59", "60 ...
" is displayed on the four seven-segment displays 431-434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 22(B), "8.", "2", "3", and "3", which indicate that the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous time is 33%, are displayed on the four seven-segment displays 431-434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to ON (step S1921), and sets the B2 display time counter corresponding to a certain time for which the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous time is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S
1922), and the display control process ends.

<Step S1923>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No),
The PU 41 judges whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (
Step S1923). If the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1924.
If the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S1923: No), the display control process ends.
When power to ~434 is cut off, the letters and numbers indicating the previous 60,000 ball base B1 are turned off.

<Steps S1924 and S1925>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1923: Y
es), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to OFF (step S1924), and
The display time counter is cleared to 0 (step S1925), and the display control process ends.

<Steps S1926 and S1927>
If the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1903.
25. As shown in FIG. 25, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter set in step S1922 of FIG. 25 (step S1926), and judges whether the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1927). If the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 returns to step S1.
If the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S192
7: No), and proceeds to step S1932.

<Steps S1928 to S1931>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes),
The MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to OFF (step S1928) and
The current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1929). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in Fig. 22(A), "8.", "L", "2", and "9" indicating that the current base BL is 29% are displayed on the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in Fig. 22(B), "8.", "L", "2", and "9" indicating that the current base BL is 0% are displayed on the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43.
The four seven-segment displays 431 each having "L", "0", and "0" constitute the performance display monitor 43.
The MPU 41 then sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1930) and starts the B
The L display time counter is set (step S1931), and the display control process ends.

<Step S1932>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No),
The PU 41 judges whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (
Step S1932). If the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1933.
If the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S1932: No), the display control process ends.
When power to ~434 is cut off, the letters and numbers indicating the previous 60,000 ball base B2 are turned off.

<Steps S1933 and S1934>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1932: Y
es), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to OFF (step S1933),
The display time counter is cleared to 0 (step S1934), and the display control process ends.

[Processing of voice and lamp control device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the voice lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to Figures 27 to 51.

In addition, in another embodiment, a part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 in this embodiment may be executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. In addition, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing of the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, startup processing when starting up the voice lamp control device 5, NMI interrupt processing when a power outage occurs, and the like, but a description of these processes will be omitted.

[Sub timer interrupt processing of voice lamp control device 5]
27 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the sub timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5. The MPU 51 executes the sub timer interrupt process as a periodic process having a cycle of 1 msec, for example.

As shown in FIG. 27, in the sub-timer interrupt processing, the MPU 51 executes an operation detection processing (step S2001), an operation detection pattern determination processing (step S2002), a counter update processing (step S2003), a command determination processing (step S2004), a variable game presentation processing (step S2005), and a jackpot game presentation processing (step S2006).

[Operation detection process]
Here, FIG. 28 shows the operation detection process (step S20) in the sub timer interrupt process in FIG.
01) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure. In the operation detection process, the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three operations is executed. In the gaming machine 10, the operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51, so that the presence or absence of operation of the operation button 20 is determined at predetermined intervals (1 msec intervals in this embodiment) corresponding to the interruption period of the sub timer interruption process.

<Steps S2101 to S2103>
As shown in Fig. 28, in step S2101, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second operation detection flag to the first operation detection flag.
The MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third operation detection flag to the second operation detection flag. Then, in step S2103, the MPU 51 sets (overwrites) the third operation detection flag to the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20 a, and the operation detection process ends.

In this manner, in the operation detection process, the processes of steps S2101 to S2103 are executed, and the most recent three operation states at 1 msec intervals are stored as the first operation detection flag to the third operation detection flag in the RAM 512 as the operation history of the operation button 20. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third operation detection flag, the immediately preceding operation state is stored as the second operation detection flag, and the operation state two states prior thereto is stored as the first operation detection flag.

[Operation detection pattern determination process]
Here, FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process (step S2002) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 27. In the operation detection pattern determination process, an operation pattern flag is set to determine the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. The operation pattern flag is composed of first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of on and off of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, as shown in FIG. 30, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 is continued. When only the second operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has started. When only the third operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has ended. When all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to off, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has not been performed.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 29, in step S2201, the MPU 51 executes the operation of the third previous operation button 2.
If the first operation detection flag is on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of 0 is set to on.
), the process proceeds to step S2202. If the first operation detection flag is off (step S2201: No), the process proceeds to step S2205.

<Step S2202>
In step S2202, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two operations ago is set to ON. If the second operation detection flag is ON (step S2202: Yes), the MPU 51 returns to step S2202.
If the second operation detection flag is off (step S2202: No), the process proceeds to 2203.
Then, processing proceeds to step S2208.

<Step S2203>
In step S2203, the MPU 51 outputs the third
The MPU 51 judges whether the operation detection flag is set to ON.
If the operation detection flag is on (step S2203: Yes), the process returns to step S2
If the third operation detection flag is off (step S2203: No), the process proceeds to 204.
Processing proceeds to step S2210.

<Step S2204>
In step S2204, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, and the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process.
When the operation patterns of "on", "on" and "on" occur, it can be determined that the operation state of the operation button 20 is continuing, so the first operation pattern flag is set to on, and the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 30). The first operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the operation button 20 is continuing or not.

<Step S2205>
When the MPU 51 determines in step S2201 that the first operation detection flag is OFF (step S2201: No), it determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two operations ago is ON (step S2205).
1, if the second operation detection flag is on (step S2205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2206. If the second operation detection flag is off (step S2205:
: No), and proceed to step S2210.

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 51 outputs the third
The MPU 51 determines whether the third operation detection flag is on. If the third operation detection flag is on (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2207. If the third operation detection flag is off (step S2206: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2210.

<Step S2207>
In step S2207, the MPU 51 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, and the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process.
When the operation patterns "ON", "ON" occur, it can be determined that the operation button 20 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (operation has started), so the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 30). The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation button 20 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the operation button 20 has started). In this way, if it is determined whether the operation button 20 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state using the second operation pattern flag, three operation states of the operation button 20 are reflected, so that erroneous detection of the start of operation of the operation button 20 due to noise such as radio waves or static electricity is prevented, and the start of operation of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the performance display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S2208>
When the MPU 51 determines in step S2202 that the second operation detection flag is OFF (step S2202: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not a third operation detection flag indicating the most recent operation state of the operation button 20 is ON (step S2208).
If the third operation detection flag is on (step S2208: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2210. If the second operation detection flag is off (step S2208:
If no, the process proceeds to step S2209.

<Step S2209>
In step S2209, the MPU 51 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, and the first and second operation pattern flags to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process.
When the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur, it can be determined that the operation button 20 has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (the operation has ended), so the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag are set to OFF (
(See FIG. 30.) The third operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation button 20 has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether the operation of the operation button 20 has ended).
By determining whether or not the state has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, the operating states of the operation button 20 three times are reflected, thereby preventing erroneous detection of the start of operation of the operation button 20 caused by noise such as radio waves or static electricity, and preventing the end of operation of the operation button 20 from being reflected in the performance display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S2210>
In step S2210, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF", occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 51 sets all of the first to third operation pattern flags to OFF (see FIG. 30). Note that, when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 is in a non-operated state.

[Counter update process]
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 27, in the counter update process (step S2003), the MPU
The MPU 51 executes updates of the first stop symbol type counter, the performance pattern type counter, the variable display counter, etc. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the first stop symbol type counter and the performance type counter, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values. The first stop symbol type counter updated here is
The first stop symbol type counter is used to determine the type of the main symbol that is stopped first based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. The performance pattern type counter is used to determine the performance type (performance pattern) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the performance type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109.
The PU 51 subtracts 1 from the variable display counter.
The purpose of the variation display counter is to measure the variation display time of 1, and the counter value of the variation display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variation display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variation display counter, it is possible to know the remaining variation display time, whether a variation is occurring, whether the variation display of the pattern display section 341 has ended, etc. Furthermore, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the character type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value. The character type counter updated here is used to determine the character type that indicates the game setting value. For example, the character type counter can be set to a value between 0 and 11.
The character mode type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 4. The MPU 51 also adds 1 to the counter value of the character mode type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The character mode type counter updated here is used to determine the character mode type that indicates the number of times a unit jackpot lottery will be drawn. For example, the character mode type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 119. The MPU
The MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the opening basic performance type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The opening basic performance type counter updated here is used to determine the basic performance type in the opening of the big win game. For example, the opening basic performance type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. The MPU 51 also adds 1 to the counter value of the opening rank suggestive image type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The opening rank suggestive performance type counter updated here is used to determine the rank suggestive image type that suggests the rank of the unit big win lottery number executed together with the basic performance in the opening of the big win game. For example, the opening rank suggestive image type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 104. The MPU 51 also adds 1 to the counter value of the ending basic performance type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The ending basic performance type counter updated here is used to determine the basic performance type in the ending of the big win game. For example, the ending basic performance type counter is 0 to 109.
The MPU 51 also adds 1 to the counter value of the ending rank suggestive image type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The ending rank suggestive performance type counter updated here is used to determine the rank suggestive image type that suggests the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number executed together with the basic performance at the ending of the jackpot game. For example,
The ending rank suggestive image type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 74. The MPU 51 also adds 1 to the counter value in the open/close execution mode presentation scenario type, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The open/close execution mode presentation scenario type updated here is used to determine the presentation scenario type in the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game. For example, the open/close execution mode presentation scenario type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 79. The MPU 51 also adds 1 to the counter value in the round game character type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The round game character type counter updated here is used to determine the character type in the round game of the jackpot game. For example, the round game character type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 49. The MPU 51 also adds 1 to the counter value in the round game rank suggestive image type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The round game rank suggestion effect type counter updated here is used to determine the rank suggestion image type that suggests the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number executed together with the round game effect of the jackpot game. For example, the round game rank suggestion image type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 89.

[Command Judgment Process]
In the command determination process (step S2004), the command received from the main control unit 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. Here, Fig. 31 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of Fig. 27.

<Step S2301>
27, in step S2301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control device 4. If the MPU 51 has received a command (step S2301: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2302.
If no command has been received (step S2301: No), the command determination process is terminated. The command received from the main control device 4 is stored in an unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. If a command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined to have been received in step S2301 and is to be processed, the command is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area and stored, for example, in a processing work storage area.

<Step S2302>
In step S2302, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a variation pattern command. If the command is a variation pattern command (step S2302: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2303. If the command is not a variation pattern command (step S2302: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2307.

<Step S2303>
In step S2303, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (a combination of symbols to be stopped and a type of presentation (presentation pattern)) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (a combination of symbols to be stopped and a type of presentation (presentation pattern)) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4.
The first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 32(A) ), the variation type table (
32(B) and the performance type table (see FIGS. 33(A) to 33(C)), and RA
The variation pattern is determined based on the value of the performance type counter stored in M512.
In addition, when the variation pattern command includes information regarding the big win type, the MPU 51 sets a big win flag corresponding to the big win type to ON.
sets a 5R normal jackpot flag on when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot, sets a 5R variable probability jackpot flag on when the jackpot type is a 5R variable probability jackpot, and sets a 16R variable probability jackpot flag on when the jackpot type is a 16R variable probability jackpot.

The stopping pattern combination of the main symbols consists of a first stopping pattern, a second stopping pattern, and a final stopping pattern. The first stopping pattern is the main symbol that is stopped first in the symbol display section 341, the second stopping pattern is the main symbol that is stopped second, and the final stopping pattern is the symbol that is stopped last. The effect type table includes a normal reach effect pattern table (see FIG. 33(A)) corresponding to a normal reach, a super reach effect pattern table (see FIG. 33(B)) corresponding to a super reach, and a special reach effect pattern table (see FIG. 33(C)) corresponding to a special reach.

FIG. 32(A) is a diagram showing an example of a first stop symbol selection table.
As shown in Fig. 32A, the first stop symbol selection table prescribes the main symbol (first stop symbol) to be first stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Fig. 32A assumes that the main symbols are "1" to "9", that "333" is a symbol combination indicating a probability jackpot (either a 5R probability jackpot or a 16R probability jackpot), that "777" is a symbol combination indicating a 16R probability jackpot, and that any other repeat number than "333" and "777" is a symbol combination indicating a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability jackpot, or a 16R probability jackpot.

When the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot", there is no allocation of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from main symbols other than "3" and "7". In other words, when the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot", the symbol combinations "333" or "777", which indicate a 5R special jackpot or a 16R special jackpot (special jackpot), are not displayed.

In addition, when the lottery result is a "5R jackpot", there is no allocation of "7" as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined from the main symbols other than "7" with a predetermined probability. In other words, when the lottery result is a "5R jackpot", "777" indicating a 16R jackpot is displayed.
The symbol combination will not be displayed. On the other hand, if the lottery result is "5R jackpot"
Even in this case, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination "333" indicating a 5R special jackpot may be displayed.
Even in this case, the main symbol may stop and display a repeat number combination other than the "333" symbol combination that indicates a 5R regular jackpot.
In the case of a "5R certainty jackpot", if a main symbol other than "3" and excluding "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 5R certainty jackpot promotion performance indicating that the jackpot is a 5R certainty jackpot in the jackpot game.

Furthermore, when the lottery result is a "16R jackpot", all the main symbols from "1" to "9" are allocated, and the first stop symbol is determined from the main symbols from "1" to "9" with a predetermined probability. That is, even if the lottery result is a "16R jackpot", a symbol combination other than the symbol combination "777" indicating a 16R jackpot may be stopped and displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is a "16R jackpot", a symbol combination other than the symbol combination "777" indicating a 5R jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot may be stopped and displayed as the main symbol stop display result. And, when the lottery result is a "16R jackpot", if "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 16R promotion effect indicating that the jackpot is a 16R jackpot in the jackpot game.

Then, when the lottery result is a jackpot, the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol.
The second stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined to be the same as the first stop symbol determined earlier. This determines the combination of stop symbols to be displayed on the pay line of the symbol display unit 341 in the corresponding game round.

On the other hand, when the lottery result is "miss", there is a distribution to all main symbols from "1" to "9", and the first stop symbol is determined from the main symbols from "1" to "9" with a predetermined probability. Then, when the lottery result is "miss", the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol based on the miss type selected based on the miss type table (FIG. 7(D)) and the first stop symbol previously determined. For example, when the miss type is a front/rear miss reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. Also, when the miss type is a reach other than a front/rear miss, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be a symbol different from the first stop symbol and the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. In addition, when the type of miss is a complete miss, the second stop symbol is determined to be a symbol different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. The stop symbol combination of the main symbols may be determined by the display control device 6, or only the first stop symbol may be determined by the sound lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol may be determined by the display control device 6.

FIG. 32(B) is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table. As shown in FIG. 32(B), the variation type table specifies the variation display time and the variation type (presentation pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern command. For example, the variation pattern command "A01" corresponding to the lottery result of "normal big win" and the variation pattern of "01" is associated with the variation display time of "30 s" and the variation type of "normal reach presentation pattern".
The variation pattern command "B02" in which the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot" and the variation pattern is "02" is associated with the variation display time "60s" and the variation type "super reach performance pattern".
The variable display time "90s" and the variable type "special reach performance pattern" are associated with the variable pattern command "C03" which is "C03".
The variation pattern command "D04" having a variation pattern of "04" is associated with a variation display time of "7s" and a variation type of "non-reach performance pattern".
The variation pattern command "D05" which is a "miss" and has a variation pattern of "05" is associated with a variation display time of "10 s" and a variation type of "non-reach performance pattern."

33A to 33C are diagrams showing an example of a presentation pattern type table. The presentation pattern type table is set for each variation type (presentation pattern).
Specifically, FIG. 33(A) is a normal reach presentation pattern type table to be referred to when the final individual presentation type in the variable game presentation is a normal reach presentation, and FIG.
) is a super reach presentation pattern table which is referenced when the final individual presentation type in the variable game presentation is a super reach presentation, and FIG. 33 (C) is a special reach presentation pattern table which is referenced when the final individual presentation type in the variable game presentation is a special reach presentation.

In this embodiment, the case where there are five kinds of performance types corresponding to each of the variation types is described as an example, but the number of performance types may be six or more. Also, in FIG. 33, the performance type table when the variation type is not a reach is omitted.

In the normal reach performance pattern type table shown in FIG. 33(A), “performance pattern X1” to “performance pattern X2” are selected as the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R variable probability jackpot, 16R variable probability jackpot, and miss).
"Performance pattern X5" is set. Then, when the MPU 51 judges that the variation type (performance pattern) is a normal reach performance pattern, it selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the normal reach performance pattern type table according to the lottery result. Here, the performance patterns X1 to X3 included in the normal reach performance pattern type table are performances in which, for example, a normal reach performance in which the main symbol is in a reach state is executed after the end of a high-speed variation performance in which the main symbol is rapidly varying, and the final individual performance type is a normal reach performance.

In addition, in the super reach performance pattern table shown in FIG. 33(B), "performance pattern Y1" to "performance pattern Y5" are determined as performance pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a super reach performance pattern, it selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the super reach performance pattern table according to the lottery result. Here, the performance patterns Y1 to Y3 included in the super reach performance pattern table are, for example, performances in which a normal reach performance is executed after the end of a high-speed variation performance, and further develops into a super reach performance that has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the normal reach performance and a longer performance execution time than the normal reach performance as the final individual performance type. Note that the super reach performance pattern table may include a super reach performance pattern performance that develops into a super reach performance after the end of a high-speed variation performance without passing through a normal reach performance.

Furthermore, in the special reach performance pattern table shown in FIG. 33(C), "performance pattern Z1" to "performance pattern Z5" are determined as performance pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a special reach performance pattern, it selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the special reach performance pattern table according to the lottery result. Here, the performance patterns Z1 to Z3 included in the special reach performance pattern table are performances in which, for example, a normal reach performance and a super reach performance are executed after the end of a high-speed variation performance, and further, as the final individual performance type, a special reach performance that has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the normal reach performance or the super reach performance and has a longer performance execution time than the normal reach performance. Note that the special reach performance pattern table may include a special reach performance pattern that develops into a special reach performance after the end of a high-speed variation performance or a normal reach performance, without passing through at least one of the normal reach performance and the super reach performance.

Then, the MPU 51 sets in the RAM 512 a display variation pattern command indicating the stopping pattern combination of the main pattern determined based on the variation pattern command, the variation type table, the performance type table and the performance type counter, and the variation type (performance pattern type).

<Step S2304>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 31, in step S2304, the MPU 51 executes a ball-out performance suggestion image display process to display a ball-out performance suggestion image suggesting ball-out performance on the sub-image display unit 38. In the ball-out performance suggestion image display process, when a specific condition is satisfied, a ball-out performance suggestion image in which a character selected according to a game setting value is selected according to the unit number of big win lotteries is displayed on the sub-image display unit 38. The details of the ball-out performance suggestion process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

<Step S2305>
In step S2305, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern command in the variable display counter. The variable display time is determined according to the variable pattern information included in the variable pattern command. The variable display counter is then decremented by one in the counter update process (step S2003) of FIG. 27, and the MPU 51 can determine whether the pattern variable display is in progress, the remaining time of the variable display time, and the like, based on the variable display counter. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the pattern variable display has ended when the variable display counter reaches 0.

<Step S2306>
In step S2306, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 to specify the stop pattern combination of the main pattern in the pattern display unit 341, the variation type (presentation pattern type), and the contents of the ball-out performance suggestion image, and ends the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop pattern combination of the main pattern, the variation type (presentation pattern type), and the ball-out performance suggestion image determined in step S2303. Meanwhile, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores the variation image and the presentation image of the main pattern corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and the presentation display in the pattern display unit 341 according to the stop pattern combination of the main pattern, the variation type, and the presentation type corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes a variable display of a plurality of main symbols (for example, three) until a preset variable display time has elapsed,
The variation of a plurality of main symbols is stopped and displayed in order. During the variation display of the main symbols, various effects corresponding to the content of the variation type (performance pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, etc. On the other hand, in the sub image display unit 38, a ball output performance suggestion image is displayed when a specific condition is satisfied.

<Step S2307>
In step S2307, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a jackpot game start command. The jackpot game start command is a command that indicates the start of a jackpot game, and is set when the jackpot game execution flag is set to ON by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 at the start of the jackpot game as described above. Here, the MPU 51:
If the received command is a big win game start command (step S2307: Yes
), the process proceeds to step S2308, and if the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S2307: No), the process proceeds to step S2310.

<Step S2308>
When the jackpot game start command is received, the MPU 51 executes a jackpot game presentation determination process (step S2308). The jackpot game presentation determination process is a process for determining a presentation to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 or the like when the game state transitions to the jackpot game state. The details of the jackpot game presentation determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

<Step S2309>
In step S2309, the MPU 51 sets a big win game presentation start flag to ON. The big win game presentation start flag is a flag for starting a big win game presentation (opening presentation), and is referred to when determining whether or not to execute an opening presentation start process in the big win game presentation process of FIG. 51 described later (step S2601).

<Step S2310>
In step S2310, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command is a command indicating that each round game is to be started in the open/close execution mode in the jackpot game and which round the round game is, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of Fig. 16. Here, if the received command is a round game start command (step S2310: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2311, and if the received command is not a round game start command (step S2310: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2313.

<Steps S2311 and S2312>
In step S2311, the MPU 51 sets a round game effect start flag to ON. The round game effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute a round game effect start process in the big win game effect process of FIG. 51 described later (step S26
Then, the MPU 51 stores the number of rounds of the round game to be started in the RAM 512 as round number information based on the round number information included in the round game start command and indicating which round the round game is (step S2312).

<Step S2313>
In step S2313, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is an ending start command. The ending start command is a command that indicates the start of an ending in a big win game, and is set in the big win game control process in the main process of FIG. 16. Here, if the received command is an ending start command (step S2313: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2314, and if the received command is not an ending start command (step S2312: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2315.
o), and proceed to step S2315.
<Step S2314>
In step S2314, the MPU 51 sets the ending start effect flag to ON. The ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the ending effect process in the big win game effect process of FIG. 51 described later (step S2609).
).

<Step S2315>
In step S2315, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a jackpot game end command. The jackpot game end command is a command indicating that the jackpot game is to be ended, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 16. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S2315: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2316, and if the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S2315: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2317.
Transition to 2317.

<Step S2316>
In step S2316, the MPU 51 sets a big win game presentation end flag to ON. The big win game presentation end flag is a flag for ending the big win game presentation (ending presentation), and is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the ending presentation end process in the big win game presentation in the big win game presentation process of FIG. 51 described later (step S
2612).

<Step S2317>
In step S2317, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a game setting value change command. The game setting value change command is a command for notifying the voice and lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and the changed game setting value, and is set in step S1710 in the game setting value change process of Fig. 20. Here, if the received command is a game setting value change command (step S2317: Yes), the MPU 51
The process proceeds to step S2318, and if the received command is not a game setting value change command (step S2317: No), the process proceeds to step S2319.

<Step S2318>
In step S2318, the MPU 51 changes the game setting values stored in the RAM 512 to the changed game setting values included in the game setting value change command and stores the changed game setting values.
The game setting value stored in M512 is read out in step S2404 in the ball output performance suggestion image display process of FIG. 34 described below, and is referenced to select a character type that suggests the game setting value.

<Step S2319>
In step S2319, the MPU 51 judges whether the received command is a unit jackpot lottery count update command. The unit jackpot lottery count update command is a command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the number of times that the symbol variation display of the 7-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37 has been executed (the number of times that a jackpot lottery has been received) triggered by the winning of a certain number of negative difference balls (for example, negative 250 balls) in the first winning slot 314 in a normal game state (a state in which the low probability mode is not a high frequency support mode), and is updated in step S1805 in the specific performance information update process in FIG. 21.
If the received command is a unit jackpot lottery count update command (step S23
If the received command is not a unit jackpot lottery count update command (step S2319: No), the process proceeds to step S2320.
Transition to 21.

<Step S2320>
In step S2320, the MPU 51 updates the unit jackpot lottery count stored in the RAM 512 to the unit jackpot lottery count included in the unit jackpot lottery count update command. The unit jackpot lottery count stored in the RAM 512 is read out in step S2407 in the ball output performance suggestive image display process in Fig. 34 described later, and is referenced to select the type of character mode suggesting the rank of the unit jackpot lottery count.

<Step S2321>
In step S2321, the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main control device 4, and then ends the command determination processing.

[Ball output performance suggestion image display processing]
In the ball-out performance suggestion image display process executed in step S2304 of the command determination process in FIG. 31, when a specific condition is satisfied, a game setting value suggestion character selected according to the game setting value is displayed on the sub-image display unit 38 as a ball-out performance suggestion image in the form of a character selected according to the unit jackpot lottery number. In this embodiment, the specific condition for displaying the ball-out performance display image in the variable game state is that a predetermined number of (e.g., 1000) jackpot lotteries (variable games) are executed. The specific condition may be other conditions, and the details thereof will be described as appropriate. In this embodiment, the ball-out performance suggestion image is displayed according to the game setting value and the unit jackpot lottery number, but instead of one or both of these performance information, the ball-out performance suggestion image may be displayed based on other performance information (base information, continuous role ratio information, role ratio information, etc.). Here, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the ball-out performance suggestion image display process. Hereinafter, an example of the procedure of the ball-out performance suggestion image display process will be described with reference to FIG. 34.

<Steps S2401 and S2402>
As shown in FIG. 34, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the big win lottery counter, which is set to 1000 in step S2403 described later (step S2401), and judges whether the value of the big win lottery counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S2402). That is, in step S2402, it is judged whether the number of big win lotteries has reached 1000.
1: if the value of the jackpot lottery counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2402: Yes)
Then, the process proceeds to step S2403. If the value of the jackpot lottery counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2402: No), the process proceeds to step S2411.

<Steps S2403 to S2405>
If the value of the big win lottery counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2402: Yes),
The PU 51 sets the value of the jackpot lottery counter to 1000. Then, the MPU 51 acquires the game setting value stored in the RAM 512 (step S2404), and selects the character type according to the game setting value (step S2405). In other words, in the variable game state in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is notified, the number of jackpot lotteries (variable game number) is 1.
The specific condition for the ball output performance suggestion image to be displayed is that the number of jackpot draws (number of variable play times) reaches 1000, and the ball output performance suggestion image is displayed. Note that the specific condition for the ball output performance suggestion image to be displayed in variable play is not limited to the number of jackpot draws (number of variable play times) reaching 1000, and may be other conditions. For example, the number of jackpot draws (number of variable play times) reaching a predetermined number other than 1000, the number of jackpot draws reaching a predetermined number, the lottery results in the jackpot draw being misses a predetermined number of times in succession,
It is also possible to set a specific condition for the variable game presentation as being the execution of a specific presentation, or to hold a lottery to decide whether or not to display an image suggesting ball payout performance, and to win the lottery.

Here, Fig. 35 is a diagram showing an example of a game setting value suggesting character type that suggests a game setting value, and Fig. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a game setting value suggesting character selection table for selecting a game setting value suggesting character.

As shown in FIG. 35, the game setting value suggestion character types are a male character (hereinafter referred to as "Sam"), a female character A (hereinafter referred to as "Marine"), and a female character B (hereinafter referred to as "Warin")
), Female character C (hereinafter "Urin"), Marine life character A (hereinafter "Dugong")
and marine life character B (hereinafter "shark"). "Sam" is a character suggesting that the game setting value is 4. "Marine" is a character suggesting that the game setting value is 3. "Warin" is a character suggesting that the game setting value is 2. "Urin" is a character suggesting that the game setting value is 1. "Dugong" is a character suggesting that the game setting value is an even number (2 or 4). "Shark" is a character suggesting that the game setting value is an odd number (1 or 3). In this regard,
This is also clear from the game setting value suggestion character selection table shown in Figure 36.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36, in the game setting value suggestion character selection table, when the game setting value is 4, “Sam” is most likely to be selected, followed by “Dugong.”
Other characters are less likely to be selected than these characters.
When the game setting value is 2, "Warin" is most likely to be selected, followed by "Dugong", and other characters are less likely to be selected compared to these characters. When the game setting value is 1, "Urin" is most likely to be selected, followed by "Shark", and other characters are less likely to be selected compared to these characters.

In this way, "Sam" is likely to be selected when the game setting value is 4, and is a character suggesting that the game setting value is 4; "Marine" is likely to be selected when the game setting value is 3, and is a character suggesting that the game setting value is 3; "Warin" is likely to be selected when the game setting value is 2, and is a character suggesting that the game setting value is 2; and "Urin" is likely to be selected when the game setting value is 1, and is a character suggesting that the game setting value is 1. Furthermore, "Dugong" is more likely to be selected when the game setting value is 2 or 4 than when the game setting value is 1 or 3, and is a character suggesting that the game setting value is 2 or 4 (even numbers). Furthermore, "Shark" is more likely to be selected when the game setting value is 1, and is a character suggesting that the game setting value is 2 or 4 (even numbers).
In the case of the odd number 1 or 3, the character is more likely to be selected than when the game setting value is 2 or 4, and indicates that the game setting value is 1 or 3 (odd numbers).

<Step S2406>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 34, the MPU 51 judges whether the selected game setting value suggestion character is a "dugong" or a "shark" (step S2406). That is, it judges whether the selected game setting value suggestion character is a male character or a female character A to C. If the game setting value suggestion character is a "dugong" or a "shark" (step S2
406: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2409, and the game setting value suggestion character is "
If the character is not "Dugong" or "Shark" (step S2406: No), the process returns to step S2
Go to 407.

<Steps S2407 and S2408>
If the game setting value suggestion character is not a "Dugong" or a "Shark" (step S240
6: No), the MPU 51 acquires the number of unit jackpot draws stored in the RAM 512 (step S2407), and selects the mode type of the game setting value suggesting character according to the number of unit jackpot draws (rank) (step S2408). In other words, when the game setting value suggesting character is other than the "dugong" and the "shark", the number of unit jackpot draws (rank) is suggested by the mode of the game setting value suggesting character. Note that even when the game setting value suggesting character is the "dugong" or the "shark", the number of unit jackpot draws (rank) may be suggested by the mode of the game setting value suggesting character.

37 and 38 are diagrams showing an example of a character mode selection table for selecting the mode of the game setting value suggesting character. The character mode selection table is defined for each rank of the number of unit jackpot lottery draws. In this embodiment, the number of unit jackpot lottery draws is set to 25.
If the number of unit jackpot draws is 20 or more but less than 25, the rank is "Rank S".
If the number of unit jackpot lottery draws is 15 or more but less than 20, it is classified as "Rank A," if the number of unit jackpot lottery draws is 15 or more but less than 20, it is classified as "Rank B," if the number of unit jackpot lottery draws is 10 or more but less than 15, it is classified as "Rank C," or if the number of unit jackpot lottery draws is less than 10, and a character mode selection table is defined for each rank.

In addition, in each character mode selection table, a character mode is specified for each game setting value suggestive character, and the mode suggesting the rank differs depending on the type of game setting value suggestive character. For example, in the case of "Sam," the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number of times is suggested by the body shape. Specifically, a super muscular body type indicates "Rank S," a muscular body type (see FIG. 35) indicates "Rank A," and a slim muscular body type indicates "Rank B."
Being "Rank B" and being "Rank B" due to being skinny.
39(A)) indicates that it is “Rank C”.

In the case of "Marine," the rank of the number of lottery draws per unit is suggested by the costume. Specifically, a kimono costume suggests "Rank S," a Santa costume suggests "Rank A," a happi costume suggests "Rank B," a bikini costume (see FIG. 35) suggests "Rank B," and a tank top costume suggests "Rank C."

In the case of "Warin" and "Urin", the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number is suggested by posture and pose. In the case of "Warin", the rank is suggested in order of wink, whistle, sitting on a triangle (see FIG. 35), standing upright and bowed. In the case of "Urin", the rank is suggested in order of V sign, fist pump, OK sign (see FIG. 35), good sign and bye-bye.

As shown in Figure 37 (A), when the number of unit jackpot draws is "Rank S" (the number of unit jackpot draws is 25 or more), for "Sam," a super muscular body type is most likely to be selected while other body types are least likely to be selected, for "Marine," a kimono costume is most likely to be selected while other costumes are least likely to be selected, for "Warin," a wink is most likely to be selected while other postures and poses are least likely to be selected, and for "Urin," a V sign is most likely to be selected while other poses are least likely to be selected. In other words, the super muscular body type for "Sam," the kimono costume for "Marine," the winking for "Warin," and the V sign for "Urin" suggest that the number of unit jackpot draws is "Rank S."

As shown in Fig. 37(B), when the number of unit jackpot draws is "Rank A" (the number of unit jackpot draws is 20 or more but less than 25), for "Sam", a muscular body type is most likely to be selected while other body types are less likely to be selected, for "Marine", a Santa costume is most likely to be selected while other costumes are less likely to be selected, for "Warin", a whistling motion is most likely to be selected while other postures and poses are less likely to be selected, and for "Ulin", a fist pump is most likely to be selected while other poses are less likely to be selected. In other words, the muscular body type for "Sam", the Santa costume for "Marine", the whistling pose for "Warin", and the fist pump for "Ulin" suggest that the number of unit jackpot draws is "Rank A".

As shown in FIG. 37(C), when the number of unit jackpot lottery draws is "Rank B" (the number of unit jackpot lottery draws is 15 or more but less than 20), for "Sam", a slim muscular body type is most likely to be selected while other body types are less likely to be selected, for "Marine", a happi costume is most likely to be selected while other costumes are less likely to be selected, for "Warin", sitting on a cross-legged position is most likely to be selected while other postures and poses are less likely to be selected, and for "Ulin", the OK sign is most likely to be selected while other poses are less likely to be selected. In other words, for "Sam", the slim muscular body type, for "Marine", the happi costume, for "Warin", sitting on a cross-legged position, and for "Ulin", the OK sign is most likely to be selected while other poses are less likely to be selected.
The K sign pose indicates that the number of jackpot draws per unit is "Rank B."

As shown in Figure 38 (A), when the number of unit jackpot draws is "Rank C" (the number of unit jackpot draws is 10 or more but less than 15), for "Sam", a skinny body type is most likely to be selected while other body types are least likely to be selected, for "Marine", a bikini outfit is most likely to be selected while other outfits are least likely to be selected, for "Warin", an upright posture is most likely to be selected while other postures and poses are least likely to be selected, and for "Ulin", a good sign is most likely to be selected while other poses are least likely to be selected. In other words, for "Sam", a skinny body type, for "Marine", a bikini outfit, for "Warin", an upright posture, and for "Ulin", making a good sign suggest that the number of unit jackpot draws is "Rank C".

As shown in Figure 38 (B), when the number of unit jackpot draws is "Rank D" (the number of unit jackpot draws is less than 10), for "Sam," a skinny body type is most likely to be selected while other body types are least likely to be selected, for "Marine," a tank top outfit is most likely to be selected while other outfits are least likely to be selected, for "Warin," a bowed posture is most likely to be selected while other postures and poses are least likely to be selected, and for "Urin," a bye-bye pose is most likely to be selected while other poses are least likely to be selected. In other words, the skinny body type for "Sam," the tank top outfit for "Marine," the bowed posture for "Warin," and the bye-bye pose for "Urin" suggest that the number of unit jackpot draws is "Rank D."

<Steps S2409 and S2410>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 34, the MPU 51 displays the ball payout performance suggestion image on the sub image display section 38 (step S2409). Specifically, if the game setting value suggestion character selected in step S2405 is other than the "Dugong" or the "Shark" (step S2406:
No), the game setting value suggestion character selected in step S2405 as the ball output performance suggestion image is displayed on the sub-image display unit 38 in the form selected in step S2408.
On the other hand, if the game setting value suggestion character selected in step S2405 is "Dugong" or "
If the image is a shark (step S2406: Yes), the ball output performance suggestion image shown in FIG.
The sub-image display unit 38 displays "Dugong" or "Shark" in the manner shown in FIG.
The PU 51 sets the suggestive image display flag, which indicates that the ball-out performance suggestive image is being displayed in the sub-image display section 38, to ON (step S2410), and ends the ball-out performance suggestive image display process.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of a ball output performance suggestion image in a variable game.
In the ball output performance suggestion image shown in FIG. 39, a skinny "Sam" is displayed, and it is suggested that the game setting value is 4 and the number of lottery draws per unit is "Rank D".
In the ball output performance suggestion image shown in B), the OK sign pose "Urin" is displayed,
It is suggested that the game setting value is 1 and the number of unit jackpot lottery draws is "Rank C."

In this embodiment, a ball-out performance suggestion image that suggests the ball-out performance in a variable game can be displayed, so that the player can concentrate on the game by checking the ball-out performance suggestion image displayed on the sub-image display unit 38, and can enjoy guessing the ball-out performance from the ball-out performance suggestion image displayed on the sub-image display unit 38. This increases the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, the ball output performance suggestion image is displayed as a suggestion of the game setting value and the unit number of jackpot lotteries. Here, the game setting value specifies the probability (jackpot probability) that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. Therefore, by evaluating the ball output performance based on the jackpot probability, it becomes possible to suggest the ball output performance based on an index that more appropriately reflects the ball output performance of the gaming machine. In addition, the unit number of jackpots is the number of times that a transition judgment is made triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning port 314 until the difference in the number of balls reaches a minus of a predetermined number of balls (for example, a minus of 250 balls) or until the number of balls shot (the number of balls out) reaches a specific number of balls. In other words, the unit number of jackpot lotteries is an index that indicates the ease of receiving a jackpot lottery in a normal game state (a state in which the game is in a low probability mode and not in a time-saving mode), and affects the number of game balls (the difference in balls in a normal game state) required until the result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot. Therefore, by evaluating the ball-dispensing performance based on multiple performance information including the number of unit jackpot draws, it becomes possible to make an evaluation that reflects the difference in balls under normal gaming conditions, making it possible to suggest the ball-dispensing performance based on an index that more appropriately reflects the ball-dispensing performance of the gaming machine.

Instead of one or both of the game setting value and the unit number of jackpot lottery draws, the ball output performance may be suggested based on the base, consecutive feature ratio, or feature ratio.

Here, the base is the payout rate (ball payout rate) in the normal game state (low probability mode, not high frequency support mode) as described above, that is, the ratio of the total number of paid balls of the "general winning port payout number" and the "first winning port payout number" to the "out ball number" in the normal game state. Therefore, suggesting the ball payout performance based on the base affects the number of game balls (difference in balls in the normal game state) required until the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the normal game state becomes a jackpot. Therefore, by evaluating the ball payout performance based on multiple performance information including the base, it becomes possible to suggest the ball payout performance based on an index that more appropriately reflects the ball payout performance of the gaming machine 10.

In addition, the continuous feature ratio is the ratio of the number of balls paid out from the variable winning port to the total number of balls paid out from all winning ports (the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, and the variable winning port 316) that pay out prize balls as described above. In other words, the continuous feature ratio is
This is an index showing the frequency with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot (the proportion of players in the jackpot gaming state) and the ease of winning at the variable winning port 316 (the ball payout rate in the jackpot gaming state).
Therefore, by evaluating the ball output performance based on multiple performance information including the continuous role ratio,
Since the ball output performance during a jackpot game state is reflected, it becomes possible to more appropriately indicate the ball output performance.

In addition, the ratio of the prizes is calculated based on the ratio of all winning holes (general winning holes 31) that have prize balls paid out as described above.
3, the ratio of the total number of payout balls from the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, and the variable winning port 316 to the total number of payout balls from the second winning port 314 and the variable winning port 316. In other words, the role ratio is an index that indicates the frequency at which the lottery result in the big win lottery is a big win (stay ratio in the big win game state), the stay ratio in the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), and the ease of winning the variable winning port 316 and the second winning port 315 (payout rate in the big win game state). Therefore, by evaluating the ball-out performance based on multiple performance information including the role ratio, the ball-out performance in the big win game state and the time-saving game state is reflected, making it possible to more appropriately suggest the ball-out performance.

Furthermore, in addition to the aforementioned ball output performance (game setting value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, consecutive feature ratio, or feature ratio), or instead of one of these ball output performances, the expected ball output value may be suggested as the ball output performance. Here, the expected ball output value is, for example, the ratio of the expected number of balls output (number of paid-out game balls) to the total number of game balls fired (total number of balls out) when a certain number of game balls (for example, 60,000 balls) are shot out. The expected ball output value is the ratio of the total number of game balls fired (total number of balls out)
It is 100% when the expected number of balls (number of paid-out game balls) is the same, it is over 100% when the expected number of balls (number of paid-out game balls) is greater, and it is less than 100% when the expected number of balls (number of paid-out game balls) is smaller. In other words, it is advantageous for the player when the expected number of balls exceeds 100%, and the higher the number, the higher the ball-out performance. On the other hand, it is disadvantageous for the player when the expected number of balls is less than 100%, and the lower the number, the lower the ball-out performance.

In addition, the expected number of balls paid out (number of paid-out game balls) is calculated based on the theoretical ratio of the normal game state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode), the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), the probability change game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the jackpot game state.
The theoretical ratio of each game state can be calculated from the theoretical number of balls in each game state.
For example, it is calculated based on the game setting value (jackpot probability in low probability mode and high probability mode (see Fig. 7 (A) and Fig. 7 (B))), the distribution rate of jackpot types (see Fig. 7 (C)), the number of lotteries per unit of jackpot, the ratio of special features, etc. Also, the number of balls expected to be dispensed (number of paid-out game balls) in the normal game state is calculated based on, for example, the number of lotteries per unit of jackpot, the base, etc. The number of balls expected to be dispensed (number of paid-out game balls) in other than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state, and jackpot game state) is calculated based on, for example, the theoretical average number of consecutive wins for the first win, the distribution rate of jackpot types (see Fig. 7 (C)).
) and is calculated based on the theoretical difference in number of balls for each type of jackpot, the ratio of consecutive devices, the ratio of devices, etc.

The expected value of the payout may be evaluated as a fulfillment rate relative to a border line.
The borderline is the unit amount (for example, 1,000 yen) to make the expected value of the balls paid out 100%.
This is the number of jackpot lottery draws required for a winning ball loan, and this borderline is calculated on the assumption that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot according to the jackpot lottery probability.
In other words, the borderline is the number of jackpot draws per unit amount (e.g., 1,000 yen) at which the difference in balls is ±0 when the jackpot is won according to the theoretical probability. Various methods for calculating the borderline have been proposed, but for example, the borderline can be calculated as the number of balls lent for 1,000 yen / (average number of balls paid out in a jackpot game / total probability). Here, 1,000
The number of balls lent per yen is generally 250. The average number of balls dispensed in a jackpot game is the number of balls dispensed per jackpot game when the number of rounds of the jackpot game is distributed according to the theoretical value. The total probability is the average probability of winning a jackpot when distributed according to the theoretical value between the high probability mode and the low probability mode. The fulfillment rate for the borderline is calculated as the ratio between the number of unit jackpot lotteries and the borderline. When the fulfillment rate for this borderline exceeds 100%, the higher the value, the more advantageous it is for the player.
If the value is less than 100%, the smaller the value, the more disadvantageous it is to the player. For example, if the number of lottery draws per unit jackpot is 18 and the borderline is 20, the fulfillment rate for the borderline is 90%, which is disadvantageous to the player.

In this way, by evaluating the ball-out performance based on the expected ball-out value (including the borderline), it is possible to evaluate the ball-out performance taking into account the condition of the nails and the surface properties of the game board 31, making it possible to more appropriately suggest the ball-out performance.

In addition, when suggesting three or more ball-out performances among a plurality of ball-out performances, it is preferable to suggest the ball-out performance by combining indicators of different natures. For example, a game setting value related to the probability of a jackpot, a unit number of jackpot lotteries (or base, consecutive role ratio, role ratio) related to each winning slot 313 to 316, a jackpot probability and an expected value of ball-out related to each winning slot 313 to 316,
It is preferable to suggest the ball-out performance by combining the above. For example, in the case where the game setting value is suggested by the character as in the present embodiment, and the number of big wins is simply suggested by the character's appearance, it is preferable to suggest the ball-out performance for the ball-out expectation value by the character's appearance. In other words, when suggesting three or more ball-out performances, it is preferable to suggest three or more ball-out performances by one character (suggested object) rather than suggesting three or more ball-out performances individually by multiple characters.

<Step S2411>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 34, if the value of the big win lottery counter is not 0 (step S2402
: No), the MPU 51 judges whether or not the suggestive image display flag set to ON in step S2410 is set to ON (step S2411). If the suggestive image display flag is set to ON (step S2411: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2412, and if the suggestive image display flag is set to OFF (step S2411: No), the MPU 51 ends the ball output performance suggestive image display process.

<Steps S2412 and S2413>
If the suggestion image display flag is set to on (step S2411: Yes),
The MPU 51 makes the ball output performance suggestive image displayed on the sub-image display section 38 invisible (step S2412), and sets the suggestive image display flag to OFF (step S2413).
), and the ball output performance suggestion image display process is terminated.

In this embodiment, in the ball-out performance suggestion image display process executed when a variation pattern command is received, the ball-out performance suggestion image is displayed on the sub-image display unit 38 from the start of the variation game every time the number of variation games reaches 1000, and the ball-out performance suggestion image is not displayed when the next variation game starts. That is, the sub-image display unit 38 is used as an image display unit for displaying the ball-out performance suggestion image. Therefore, while the variable game performance that notifies the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is executed on the pattern display unit 341, the ball-out performance suggestion image is displayed on the sub-image display unit 38, so that the player can be prevented from mistaking the ball-out performance suggestion image as a performance that suggests the expectation that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the number of variable play times reaches 1000 times, the sub-image display unit 38 continuously displays the ball-out performance suggestion image at least from the start to the end of the variable play, but it is not necessarily required to continuously display the ball-out performance suggestion image from the start to the end of the variable play. For example, when a super-reach performance pattern or a special-reach performance pattern is selected as the performance pattern, the ball-out performance suggestion image may be displayed on the sub-image display unit 38 only during the execution of the basic performance (non-reach performance) from the start of the variation to the development of the normal-reach performance (from the start of the variation to the end of the basic performance), or during the execution of the basic performance from the start of the variation to the development of the super-reach performance (from the start of the variation to the end of the normal-reach performance). In this case, during the execution of the super-reach performance or the special-reach performance, the sub-image display unit 38 can execute the variable play performance together with the pattern display unit 341. In addition, when a variable game presentation is executed on the sub-image display unit 38 during execution of a super reach presentation or a special reach presentation, an image of the variable game presentation may be displayed as an upper layer of the ball-out performance suggestion image, or the image of the variable game presentation may be displayed after the ball-out performance suggestion image is hidden. In addition, in the variable game in which the ball-out performance suggestion image is displayed on the sub-image display unit 38, if a presentation pattern in which a presentation with a high expectation is executed is selected on the sub-image display unit 38, the display of the ball-out performance suggestion image on the sub-image display unit 38 may be carried over to the next or subsequent variable games of the variable game.

[Big Win Game Presentation Determination Process]
In the big win game presentation determination process executed in step S2308 of the command determination process in Fig. 31, an opening presentation, an ending presentation, and an opening/closing execution mode presentation to be executed in the big win game are determined. Here, Fig. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the big win game presentation determination process.

<Step S2501>
40, in step S2501, the MPU 51 executes an opening effect determination process for determining an opening effect to be executed between the start of a jackpot game and the start of the open/close execution mode. In the opening effect determination process, a rank suggestion image suggesting the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number can be determined together with a basic opening effect indicating that a jackpot game is about to start.

The opening basic effect is determined according to the value of an opening (OP) basic effect type counter, based on an opening basic effect selection table defined for each game setting value.
In the opening basic presentation, game setting value suggesting characters may be displayed in the same way as when a ball output performance suggesting image is displayed in a variable game presentation. The game setting value suggesting character types and the game setting values suggested by each game setting value suggesting character are the same as the game setting value suggesting characters in the variable game presentation. However, in this embodiment, the game setting value suggesting character types do not include "Dugong", which suggests that the game setting value is an even number, or "Shark", which suggests that the game setting value is an odd number, and the game setting value suggesting character types are "Sam", which suggests that the game setting value is 4, and "Marine", which suggests that the game setting value is 3.
, "Warin", which indicates that the game setting value is 2, and "Urin", which indicates that the game setting value is 1.

Here, FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of an opening basic effect selection table referenced in the opening effect determination process.

As shown in FIG. 41, in the opening basic effect selection table, "no suggestion" is the most likely to be selected as the opening basic effect regardless of whether the game setting value is 1 to 4.
Here, "no suggestion" means that a different presentation (a presentation in which no game setting value suggestion characters are displayed) is executed as the opening basic presentation from the presentation in which four types of game setting value suggestion characters that suggest the game setting value are displayed. In other words, in a variable game state, a ball output performance suggestion presentation is executed with the specific condition that the number of unit jackpot lottery draws reaches 1000, but in the opening of a jackpot game, a ball output performance suggestion presentation is executed with the specific condition that the lottery based on the opening basic presentation selection table is won. And, in the opening basic presentation selection table, "no suggestion" is set as the most likely to be selected, which prevents the game setting value from being easily recognized by the player during a jackpot game. This allows the player to quickly find out about the game setting value of another gaming machine 1 in a short period of time when the game setting value is a low setting value that is disadvantageous to the player.
This can prevent the game setting value from moving to 0. The higher the game setting value is (the higher the probability of winning the jackpot), the more likely it is that "no suggestion" will be selected. In other words, the higher the game setting value is, the less likely it is that the game setting value suggestion character will be displayed. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the game setting value is a high setting, and allows the player to continue playing while maintaining their sense of expectation that the game setting value is a high setting.

In addition, as the opening basic performance selection table, a table that does not have a ``no suggestion'' allocation may be used so that the performance information display image is always displayed in the opening performance, or a table in which the probability of ``no suggestion'' being selected is the same for each game setting value may be used.

In addition, when the game setting value is 4, "Sam" is more likely to be selected after "No Suggestion", and other characters are less likely to be selected compared to "Sam". When the game setting value is 3, "Marine" is more likely to be selected after "No Suggestion", and other characters are less likely to be selected compared to "Marine".
When the game setting value is 2, "Warin" is likely to be selected next to "No suggestion", and "Warin"
When the game setting value is 1, "Urin" is the next most likely to be selected after "No suggestion", and other characters are less likely to be selected than "Urin".

In this way, with regard to the game setting value suggestion character, "Sam" is likely to be selected when the game setting value is 4, and is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 4. Also, since "Sam" is not allocated (is not selected) at the game setting value of 1, when "Sam" is displayed in the opening performance, the game setting value of 1 is negated, and the game setting value of 2 or more is confirmed.
In that sense, "Sam" in the opening performance is a character whose game setting value is determined to be 2 or higher.

In addition, "Marine" is a character that is likely to be selected when the game setting value is 3, suggesting that the game setting value is 3; "Warin" is a character that is likely to be selected when the game setting value is 2, suggesting that the game setting value is 2; and "Urin" is a character that is likely to be selected when the game setting value is 1, suggesting that the game setting value is 1.
The higher the game setting value, the lower the probability that a game setting value suggestive character suggesting that game setting value will be selected. Specifically, when the game setting value is 4, the selection rate of "Sam" is 10/100, when the game setting value is 3, the selection rate of "Marine" is 15/100, when the game setting value is 2, the selection rate of "Warin" is 20/100, and when the game setting value is 1, the selection rate of "Urin" is 25/100. In this way, when the game setting value is a high setting value, it is difficult for a character suggesting that the game setting value is a high setting value to be displayed in the opening performance. As a result, in the opening performance,
Even if a character suggesting that the game setting value is a low setting is displayed when the game setting value is a high setting, it is difficult to immediately determine that the game setting value is a low setting. As a result, it is possible to allow the player to proceed with the game while maintaining a sense of expectation that the game setting value is a high setting.

In addition, the opening basic effect selection table may be a table in which the probability of a game setting value suggesting character that suggests the game setting value being selected is the same for each game setting value.

On the other hand, the rank suggestion image is determined according to the value of the rank suggestion image type counter based on a unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table defined for each rank of unit jackpot lottery number. Here, Fig. 42 is a diagram showing an example of the rank suggestion image type, and Fig. 43 is a diagram showing an example of the opening unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table.

As shown in FIG. 42, the rank suggestion image includes images of whales (hereinafter, "whale lucky") in a variety of forms. Specifically, the rank suggestion image includes images of "Longevity Whale Lucky",
GOLD Whale Lucky, GOO Whale Lucky, Normal Whale Lucky, BA
The six types of images include "D Whale Lucky", "BLACK Whale Lucky", and "Long Live Whale Lucky". "Long Live Whale Lucky" is an image clearly indicating that the number of lottery draws per unit of jackpot is "Rank S" (25 or more). "GOLD Whale Lucky" is an image suggesting that the number of lottery draws per unit of jackpot is "Rank S". "GOO Whale Lucky" is an image suggesting that the number of lottery draws per unit of jackpot is "Rank A" (20 or more and less than 25 times). "Normal Whale Lucky" is an image suggesting that the number of lottery draws per unit of jackpot is "Rank B" (15 or more and less than 20 times). "BAD Whale Lucky" is an image suggesting that the number of lottery draws per unit of jackpot is "Rank C" (
This image suggests that the number of times is between 10 and 15.
is an image suggesting that the number of unit jackpot lottery draws is "Rank D" (less than 10 times).

As shown in FIG. 43, in the unit jackpot lottery count suggestion image selection table for opening, rank suggestion images are defined for each rank of unit jackpot lottery count according to the opening rank suggestion image type counter. In this unit jackpot lottery count suggestion image selection table, when the unit jackpot lottery count is "Rank S", "GOLD Whale Lucky" is most likely to be selected, and other types of Whale Lucky are unlikely to be selected.
If the number of unit jackpot draws is "Rank A", "GOO Whale Lucky" is most likely to be selected, and other types of Whale Lucky are unlikely to be selected. If the number of unit jackpot draws is "Rank B", "Normal Whale Lucky" is most likely to be selected, and other types of Whale Lucky are unlikely to be selected. If the number of unit jackpot draws is "Rank C", "BAD Whale Lucky" is most likely to be selected, and other types of Whale Lucky are unlikely to be selected. If the number of unit jackpot draws is "Rank D", "BACK Whale Lucky" is most likely to be selected, and other types of Whale Lucky are unlikely to be selected. Furthermore, "Longevity Whale Lucky" is only allocated when the number of unit jackpot draws is "Rank S".

In this way, the "Kotobuki Whale Lucky" is selected only when the number of unit jackpot lottery draws is "Rank S", and is a rank suggestion image that clearly indicates "Rank S".
"LD Whale Lucky" is likely to be selected when the number of unit jackpot draws is "Rank S", and is a rank suggestive image suggesting "Rank S". "GOO Whale Lucky" is likely to be selected when the number of unit jackpot draws is "Rank A", and is a rank suggestive image suggesting "Rank A". "Normal Whale Lucky" is likely to be selected when the number of unit jackpot draws is "Rank B", and is a rank suggestive image suggesting "Rank B". "BAD Whale Lucky" is likely to be selected when the number of unit jackpot draws is "Rank C", and is a rank suggestive image suggesting "Rank C". "
"BLACK Whale Lucky" is likely to be selected when the number of unit jackpot lottery draws is "Rank D," and is a rank suggestive image that suggests "Rank D."

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of an opening screen in a big win game.
In the opening screen shown in (A), the game setting value suggestion character "Sam" is displayed as the opening basic performance, suggesting that the game setting value is 4, and the number of unit jackpot lottery draws is "Rank S" by displaying "Kotobuki Whale Lucky" as the rank suggestion image.
In the opening screen shown in FIG. 44(B), a game setting value suggestion character "Warin" is displayed as a basic opening effect, suggesting that the game setting value is 2, and a rank suggestion image "BLACK Whale Lucky" is displayed, suggesting that the number of lottery draws per unit of jackpot is "Rank D."

<Step S2502>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 40, in step S2502, the MPU 51 executes an ending effect determination process for determining an ending effect to be executed between the end of the open/close execution mode and the end of the big win game. In the ending effect determination process, a rank suggestion image indicating the rank of the unit big win lottery count is determined together with an ending basic effect indicating that the big win game is ended. The process for determining the rank suggestion image in the ending effect is executed in the same manner as the opening effect determination process in the above-mentioned step S2502.

Here, Figure 45 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an ending basic effect selection table used in the ending effect determination process, and Figure 45 (B) is a diagram showing an example of an image selection table suggesting the number of unit jackpot lottery draws for the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 45(A), in the variable game state, the ball output performance suggestion effect is executed under the specific condition that the unit jackpot lottery number reaches 1000 times, but in the ending effect determination process, the ball output performance suggestion effect is executed under the specific condition that the lottery based on the ending basic effect selection table is won, as in the opening of the jackpot game. And, in the opening basic effect selection table, the game setting value is set to 1 to 1000 times as the ending basic effect.
In any of the four cases, "no suggestion" is the most likely to be selected.
As with the opening basic performance, this means that a performance (in which the game setting value suggesting character is not displayed) other than the performance in which four types of game setting value suggesting characters suggesting the game setting value are displayed is executed. Since "no suggestion" is most likely to be selected in this way, the game setting value is prevented from being easily recognized by the player in the big win game. This makes it possible to prevent the player from moving to another gaming machine 10 in a short time when the game setting value is a low setting value that is disadvantageous to the player. And, the higher the game setting value is that is advantageous to the player (the higher the probability of winning the big win), the more likely it is that "no suggestion" is selected. In other words, the higher the game setting value is, the less likely it is that the game setting value suggesting character is displayed. This makes it difficult to recognize that the game setting value is a high setting value, and allows the player to progress in the game while maintaining the expectation that the game setting value is a high setting value.

In addition, as the ending basic performance selection table, a table that does not have a ``no suggestion'' allocation may be adopted so that the performance information display image is always displayed in the ending performance, or a table in which the probability of ``no suggestion'' being selected is the same for each game setting value may be adopted.

In addition, when the game setting value is 4, "Sam" is more likely to be selected after "No Suggestion", and other characters are less likely to be selected compared to "Sam". When the game setting value is 3, "Marine" is more likely to be selected after "No Suggestion", and other characters are less likely to be selected compared to "Marine".
When the game setting value is 2, "Warin" is likely to be selected next to "No suggestion", and "Warin"
When the game setting value is 1, "Urin" is the second most likely character to be selected after "No suggestion", and other characters are less likely to be selected than "Urin". Also, only when the game setting value is 4, there is an allocation of "All" characters. When "All" is selected, all of the game setting value suggestion characters are displayed on the ending screen.

In this way, with regard to the game setting value suggestion character, "Sam" is likely to be selected when the game setting value is 4, and is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 4. Also, since "Sam" is not allocated (is not selected) at the game setting value of 1, when "Sam" is displayed in the ending performance, the game setting value of 1 is negated, and the game setting value of 2 or more is confirmed.
In that sense, "Sam" in the ending performance is a character whose game setting value is determined to be 2 or more.

In addition, "Marine" is a character that is likely to be selected when the game setting value is 3, suggesting that the game setting value is 3; "Warin" is a character that is likely to be selected when the game setting value is 2, suggesting that the game setting value is 2; and "Urin" is a character that is likely to be selected when the game setting value is 1, suggesting that the game setting value is 1.
The higher the game setting value, the lower the probability that a game setting value suggestive character suggesting that game setting value will be selected. Specifically, when the game setting value is 4, the selection rate of "Sam" is 15/110, when the game setting value is 3, the selection rate of "Marine" is 20/110, when the game setting value is 2, the selection rate of "Warin" is 25/110, and when the game setting value is 1, the selection rate of "Urin" is 30/110. In this way, when the game setting value is a high setting value, it is difficult for a character suggesting that the game setting value is a high setting value to be displayed in the ending presentation. As a result, in the ending presentation,
Even if a character suggesting that the game setting value is a low setting is displayed when the game setting value is a high setting, it is difficult to immediately determine that the game setting value is a low setting. As a result, it is possible to allow the player to proceed with the game while maintaining a sense of expectation that the game setting value is a high setting.

In addition, as the ending basic effect selection table, a table in which the probability that a game setting value suggesting character that suggests the game setting value in question will be selected may be the same for each game setting value.

As shown in FIG. 45B, in the unit jackpot lottery count suggestion image selection table for ending performance, rank suggestion images are defined according to the ending rank suggestion image type counter for each rank of the unit jackpot lottery count. In this unit jackpot lottery count suggestion image selection table, when the unit jackpot lottery count is "Rank S", "GOLD Whale Lucky" is most likely to be selected, and when the unit jackpot lottery count is "Rank A", "GO
"O Whale Lucky" is most likely to be selected, and the number of unit jackpot draws is "Rank B.""Normal Whale Lucky" is most likely to be selected, and the number of unit jackpot draws is "Rank C."
"BAD Whale Lucky" is most likely to be selected when the number of unit jackpot lottery draws is "Rank D", and "BACK jackpot Lucky" is most likely to be selected when the number of unit jackpot lottery draws is "Rank D". In addition, "Longevity Whale Lucky" is only allocated when the number of unit jackpot lottery draws is "Rank S".

In this way, in the ending performance unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table, similar to the opening performance unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table, "Ju Whale Lucky" clearly indicates that the unit jackpot lottery number is "Rank S", "GOLD Whale Lucky" suggests that the unit jackpot lottery number is "Rank S", "GOO Whale Lucky" suggests that the unit jackpot lottery number is "Rank A", "Normal Whale Lucky" suggests that the unit jackpot lottery number is "Rank B", and "BAD Whale Lucky"
indicates that the number of jackpot draws per unit is "Rank C," and "BLACK Whale Lucky" is a rank suggestion image indicating that the number of jackpot draws per unit is "Rank D."

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of an ending screen in a big win game.
In the ending screen shown in (A), "Everyone" is displayed as the game setting value suggestion character as the basic ending effect, thereby clearly indicating that the game setting value is 4, and "Normal Whale Lucky" is displayed as the rank suggestion image, thereby indicating that the number of lottery draws per unit of jackpot is "Rank B." In the ending screen shown in Fig. 46 (B), "Marine" is displayed as the game setting value suggestion character as the basic ending effect, thereby indicating that the game setting value is 3, and "GOO Whale Lucky" is displayed as the rank suggestion image, thereby indicating that the number of lottery draws per unit of jackpot is "Rank A."

<Step S2503>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 40, in step S2503, the MPU 51 determines an open/close execution mode presentation scenario to be executed in the open/close execution mode. The open/close execution mode presentation scenario specifies a combination of round game presentations to be executed in each round game in the open/close execution mode. In this embodiment, the presentation scenario is stored in the open/close execution mode presentation scenario table (
See Figures 47 and 48). The opening and closing execution mode presentation scenario includes a presentation scenario in which a performance information display image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in a predetermined round game. When a presentation scenario in which a ball output performance suggestion image is displayed is determined as the opening and closing execution mode presentation scenario, a ball output performance suggestion image to be displayed in the corresponding round is determined based on a round game character selection table (see Figure 49 (A)) and a round game unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table (see Figure 49 (B)) described later according to the game setting value and the unit jackpot lottery number.

Here, Fig. 47 and Fig. 48 are diagrams showing an example of an opening and closing execution mode presentation scenario selection table used in the opening and closing execution mode presentation determination process. Specifically, Fig. 47(A) is a 5R normal jackpot opening and closing execution mode presentation scenario selection table used in the opening and closing execution mode presentation determination process when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R normal jackpot, and Fig. 47(B) is a 5R variable probability jackpot opening and closing execution mode presentation scenario selection table used in the opening and closing execution mode presentation determination process when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R variable probability jackpot. Fig. 48 is a 16R variable probability jackpot opening and closing execution mode presentation scenario selection table used in the opening and closing execution mode presentation determination process when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R variable probability jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 47(A), the 5R normal jackpot open/close execution mode presentation scenario selection table prescribes the presentation scenario to be executed in the open/close execution mode in jackpot play when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R normal jackpot. In this 5R normal jackpot open/close execution mode presentation scenario selection table, the presentation scenario is determined according to the value of the presentation scenario type counter. Here, "○" in the 5R normal jackpot open/close execution mode presentation scenario selection table indicates a round game in which a ball output performance suggestion image is displayed. Specifically, when the presentation scenario type counter value is 0 to 4, a presentation scenario in which a ball output performance suggestion image is displayed in one round is determined, when the presentation scenario type counter value is 5 to 9, a presentation scenario in which a ball output performance suggestion image is displayed in two rounds is determined, and when the presentation scenario type counter value is 10 to 1
In the case of 4, a presentation scenario in which the ball-out performance suggestion image is displayed in 3 rounds is determined, in the case of a presentation scenario type counter value of 15 to 19, a presentation scenario in which the ball-out performance suggestion image is displayed in 4 rounds is determined, and in the case of a presentation scenario type counter value of 20 to 24, a presentation scenario in which the ball-out performance suggestion image is displayed in 5 rounds is determined. In addition, in the case of a presentation scenario type counter value of 25 to 79, a presentation scenario in which the ball-out performance suggestion image is not displayed is determined. In other words, in the opening and closing execution mode of the 5R normal jackpot game, if the presentation scenario selected by lottery has a round game in which the ball-out performance suggestion image is displayed, the ball-out performance suggestion image is displayed in the round game. In other words, in the opening and closing execution mode of the 5R normal jackpot game, whether or not the ball-out performance suggestion image is displayed is determined by lottery.

As shown in FIG. 47(B), the 5R certain variable jackpot open/close execution mode presentation scenario selection table prescribes the presentation scenario to be executed in the open/close execution mode in jackpot play when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R certain variable jackpot. In this 5R certain variable jackpot open/close execution mode presentation scenario selection table, the presentation scenario is determined according to the value of the presentation scenario type counter. Here, "○" in the 5R certain variable jackpot open/close execution mode presentation scenario selection table indicates a round game in which a ball output performance suggestion image is displayed. Specifically, when the presentation scenario type counter value is 0-4 or 25-29, a presentation scenario in which a ball output performance suggestion image is displayed in one round is determined, and when the presentation scenario type counter value is 5-9 or 30-35, a presentation scenario in which a ball output performance suggestion image is displayed is determined.
In the case of 4, the presentation scenario in which the ball output performance suggestion image is displayed in the second round is determined, and in the case of the presentation scenario type counter value of 10 to 14 or 35 to 39, the presentation scenario in which the ball output performance suggestion image is displayed in the third round is determined, and in the case of the presentation scenario type counter value of 15 to 19 or 40
In the case of 40 to 44, the presentation scenario in which the ball output performance suggestion image is displayed in 4 rounds is determined, and in the case of 20 to 24 or 45 to 49, the presentation scenario in which the ball output performance suggestion image is displayed in 5 rounds is determined.
In the case of 79, a presentation scenario in which the ball-out performance suggestion image is not displayed is determined. In other words, in the open/close execution mode of the 5R probability variable jackpot game, if the presentation scenario selected by lottery has a round game in which the ball-out performance suggestion image is displayed, the ball-out performance suggestion image is displayed in the round game. In other words, in the open/close execution mode of the 5R probability variable jackpot game, whether or not the ball-out performance suggestion image is displayed is determined by lottery.

As can be seen by comparing FIG. 47(A) and FIG. 47(B), in the case of a 5R special jackpot, the probability that the ball output performance suggestion image is displayed is higher than in the case of a 5R normal jackpot.
In the case of an R probability variable jackpot, it is possible to make a player who does not pay attention to the round game presentation pay attention to the round game presentation because of the sense of relief that it is a probability variable jackpot. In the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot, the probability of displaying the ball output performance suggestion image may be lower than that of a 5R probability variable jackpot, or may be the same as that of a 5R normal jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 48, the 16R certain variable jackpot open/close execution mode presentation scenario selection table prescribes the presentation scenario to be executed in the open/close execution mode in the jackpot game when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R certain variable jackpot. In this 16R certain variable jackpot open/close execution mode presentation scenario selection table, the presentation scenario is determined according to the value of the presentation scenario type counter. Here, "○" in the 16R certain variable jackpot open/close execution mode presentation scenario selection table indicates a round game in which a ball output performance suggestion image is displayed. Specifically, when the presentation scenario type counter has a value of 0 to 4, a presentation scenario in which a ball output performance suggestion image is displayed in one round is determined, when the presentation scenario type counter has a value of 5 to 9, a presentation scenario in which a ball output performance suggestion image is displayed in two rounds is determined, and when the presentation scenario type counter has a value of 10 to 20, a presentation scenario in which a ball output performance suggestion image is displayed in two rounds is determined.
When the value of the presentation scenario type counter is 14, a presentation scenario in which a ball output performance suggestion image is displayed in 3 rounds is determined, when the value of the presentation scenario type counter is 15 to 19, a presentation scenario in which a ball output performance suggestion image is displayed in 4 rounds is determined, when the value of the presentation scenario type counter is 20 to 24, a presentation scenario in which a ball output performance suggestion image is displayed in 5 rounds is determined, and when the value of the presentation scenario type counter is 2
When the value of the presentation scenario type counter is between 5 and 29, a presentation scenario in which a ball output performance suggestion image is displayed in the 6th round is determined, when the value of the presentation scenario type counter is between 30 and 34, a presentation scenario in which a ball output performance suggestion image is displayed in the 7th round is determined, when the value of the presentation scenario type counter is between 35 and 39, a presentation scenario in which a ball output performance suggestion image is displayed in the 8th round is determined, and when the value of the presentation scenario type counter is between 40 and 44, a presentation scenario in which a ball output performance suggestion image is displayed in the 9th round is determined.
When the presentation scenario type counter value is 45 to 49, a presentation scenario in which a ball output performance suggestion image is displayed in the 10th round is determined, when the presentation scenario type counter value is 50 to 54, a presentation scenario in which a ball output performance suggestion image is displayed in the 11th round is determined, when the presentation scenario type counter value is 55 to 59, a presentation scenario in which a ball output performance suggestion image is displayed in the 12th round is determined, when the presentation scenario type counter value is 60 to 64, a presentation scenario in which a ball output performance suggestion image is displayed in the 13th round is determined, and when the presentation scenario type counter value is 65 to 69,
In this case, a presentation scenario in which an image suggesting ball output performance is displayed in the 14th round is determined, when the presentation scenario type counter value is between 70 and 74, a presentation scenario in which an image suggesting ball output performance is displayed in the 15th round is determined, and when the presentation scenario type counter value is between 75 and 79, a presentation scenario in which an image suggesting ball output performance is displayed in the 16th round is determined.

In the 16R probability variable jackpot opening/closing execution mode presentation scenario selection table, a ball output performance suggestion image is always displayed in any of the 1R to 16R round games. This makes it possible to make a player who does not pay attention to the round game presentation due to the relief of the probability variable jackpot pay attention to the round game presentation. In the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot, a presentation scenario in which a ball output performance suggestion image is not displayed may be determined, as in the case of a 5R normal jackpot and a 5R probability variable jackpot.

Here, Figure 49 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a round game character selection table used when a presentation scenario in which an image suggesting ball payout performance is displayed is selected in the opening and closing execution mode presentation determination process, and Figure 49 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a unit jackpot lottery number of times selection table for round game presentation used when a presentation scenario in which an image suggesting ball payout performance is displayed is selected in the opening and closing execution mode presentation determination process.

49(A), in the round game character selection table, "Sam" is most likely to be selected when the game setting value is 4, "Marine" is most likely to be selected when the game setting value is 3, "Warin" is most likely to be selected when the game setting value is 2, and "Urin" is most likely to be selected when the game setting value is 1. In this way, in the round game presentation, as in the opening presentation and the ending presentation, "Sam" is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 4, "Marine" suggests that the game setting value is 3, "Warin" suggests that the game setting value is 2, and "Urin" suggests that the game setting value is 1.

As shown in FIG. 49B, in the round game performance unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table, rank suggestion images are defined according to the round game rank suggestion image type counter for each rank of the unit jackpot lottery number. In this unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table, when the unit jackpot lottery number is "Rank S", "GOLD Whale Lucky" is most likely to be selected, and when the unit jackpot lottery number is "Rank A", "GO
"O Whale Lucky" is most likely to be selected, and the number of unit jackpot draws is "Rank B.""Normal Whale Lucky" is most likely to be selected, and the number of unit jackpot draws is "Rank C."
In this case, "BAD Whale Lucky" is most likely to be selected, and "BLACK Whale Lucky"
is the most likely choice. In addition, the number of times a unit jackpot is drawn is "Rank S"
" There is allocation only if

In this way, in the unit jackpot draw count suggestion image selection table for round game presentation, similarly to the unit jackpot draw count suggestion image selection table for opening presentation and the unit jackpot draw count suggestion image selection table for ending presentation, the rank suggestion images are: "Ju Whale Lucky" clearly indicates that the number of unit jackpot draws is "Rank S", "GOLD Whale Lucky" suggests that the number of unit jackpot draws is "Rank S", "GOO Whale Lucky" suggests that the number of unit jackpot draws is "Rank A", "Normal Whale Lucky" suggests that the number of unit jackpot draws is "Rank B", "BAD Whale Lucky" suggests that the number of unit jackpot draws is "Rank C", and "BLACK Whale Lucky" suggests that the number of unit jackpot draws is "Rank D".

FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example of a round game screen in a big win game.
In the round game screen shown in (A), a scenario in which a ball output performance suggestion image is displayed in the fifth round of round play is selected as the opening/closing execution mode presentation scenario, "Marine" is displayed as the game setting value suggestion character, suggesting that the game setting value is 3, and "GOLD Whale Lucky" is displayed as the rank suggestion image, suggesting that the number of unit jackpot lottery draws is "Rank S." Also, in the round game screen shown in FIG. 46(B), a scenario in which a ball output performance suggestion image is displayed in the second round of round play is selected as the opening/closing execution mode presentation scenario, "Sam" is displayed as the game setting value suggestion character, suggesting that the game setting value is 4, and "Longevity Whale Lucky" is displayed as the rank suggestion image, clearly indicating that the number of unit jackpot lottery draws is "Rank S."

<Step S2504>
Returning to the description of FIG. 40, in step S2504, the MPU 51 executes steps S2501 to S2505.
The big win game presentation determined in S2503 is stored in the RAM 512.
The PU 51 determines the opening basic performance type determined in step S2501,
The ending basic performance type determined in step S2502 and the opening/closing execution mode performance scenario type determined in step S2503 are stored in the RAM 512, and the opening, closing, and closing execution mode performance scenario types are stored in the RAM 512 as necessary.
The type of ball-out performance suggestive image to be displayed on the sub-image display unit 38 in the opening/closing execution mode or the ending is stored. As a result, in a big win game, the speaker 26 executes a sound output effect, and the illumination unit 27 executes a lamp effect.

<Step S2505>
In step S2505, the MPU 51 transmits a big win game presentation command indicating the content of the big win game presentation determined in steps S2501 to S2503 to the display control device 6. Specifically, the MPU 51 transmits the opening basic presentation type determined in step S2501, the content of the ball output performance suggestion image executed in the opening presentation as necessary, and the content of the ball output performance suggestion image executed in the opening presentation as necessary.
The ending basic performance type determined in step S2502, the contents of the ball-out performance suggestive image executed in the opening performance as necessary and the number of execution rounds, and the opening/closing execution mode performance scenario type determined in step S2503, the contents of the ball-out performance suggestive image executed in the opening performance as necessary are transmitted to the display control device 6. As a result, in a big win game, the image performance including the ball-out performance suggestive image is executed by the symbol display unit 341.

In this embodiment, a ball-out performance suggestion image that suggests the ball-out performance during a big win game can be displayed, so that the player can concentrate on the big win game by checking the ball-out performance suggestion image displayed on the sub-image display unit 38, and can also enjoy guessing the ball-out performance from the ball-out performance suggestion image displayed on the sub-image display unit 38.
The interest in the game is improved.

In addition, in the jackpot game, the ball output performance suggestion image can be displayed on the sub image display section 38 in any of the opening, open/close execution modes, and ending. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the jackpot game presentation from the start to the end of the jackpot game. In this way, by drawing the player's attention to the jackpot game presentation, it is possible to convey to the player the merits of the jackpot game presentation, which is easily overlooked by players.

In addition, during a jackpot game, the ball output performance suggestion image may be displayed on the sub-image display unit 38 in any of the opening, open/close execution mode, and ending, but it may also be configured so that the ball output performance suggestion image is displayed on the sub-image display unit 38 only in any of the opening, open/close execution mode, and ending.

In addition, when suggesting ball output performance in a jackpot game, as in the case of a variable game, instead of one or both of the game setting value and the unit number of jackpot lotteries, the ball output performance may be suggested based on the base, consecutive feature ratio, feature ratio, expected ball output value, and borderline fulfillment rate. In other words, the ball output performance suggested in a jackpot game is not limited to the combination of the game setting value and the unit number of jackpot lotteries.

[Variable game performance processing]
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 27, the variable game presentation process of the sub timer interrupt process (step S2005)
In a variable game in which the result of a jackpot lottery is announced, when a variable pattern command is received, a variable game presentation in accordance with the presentation pattern determined in step S2303 of the command determination process in Figure 31 is executed in the pattern display unit 341, speaker 26, illumination unit 27, etc., and an image indicating the ball output performance determined in step S2304 is executed in the sub-image display unit 38.

[Big Win Game Presentation Processing]
In the big win game presentation process, the opening presentation, the ending presentation, and the opening/closing execution mode presentation determined in the big win game presentation determination process of FIG. 40 are executed.
1 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing a big win game presentation.

<Step S2601>
As shown in FIG. 51, in step S2601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game presentation start flag, which is set to on in step S2309 in the command determination process of FIG. 31, is set to on. If the jackpot game presentation start flag is on (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 transfers processing to step S2602. If the jackpot game presentation start flag is off (step S2601: No), the MPU 51 transfers processing to step S2604.

<Steps S2602 and S2603>
When the big win game performance start flag is on (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 5
1 sets the big win game presentation start flag to OFF (step S2602), executes the opening presentation start process (step S2603), and ends the big win game presentation process. In the opening presentation start process, the MPU 51 executes the opening presentation determined in step S2501 of the big win game presentation determination process in FIG. 40 in the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, and transmits an opening presentation start command to the display control device 6 to cause the pattern display unit 341 to start an image presentation as an opening presentation. As a result, the pattern display unit 341 displays an image corresponding to the opening basic presentation, and if it is determined that a ball-out performance suggestion image is to be displayed, the ball-out performance suggestion image is displayed on the pattern display unit 341.

<Step S2604>
In step S2604, the MPU 51 executes step S2
It is determined whether the round game effect start flag set in 311 is set to ON. If the round game effect start flag is set to ON (step S2604: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2605. If the opening/closing execution mode start flag is set to OFF (step S2605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2606.
2604: No), and proceeds to step S2607.

<Steps S2605 and S2606>
When the round game performance start flag is on (step S2604: Yes), the MPU 5
1 sets the round game presentation start flag to OFF (step S2605), executes the round game presentation start process (step S2606), and ends the big win game presentation process. In the round game presentation start process, the MPU 51 executes the round game presentation in the corresponding round in the opening/closing execution mode presentation scenario determined in step S2503 in the big win game presentation determination process of FIG. 40 in the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, and transmits a round game start command to the display control device 6 to start an image presentation as the round game presentation in the corresponding round on the pattern display unit 341. This round game start command includes round number information indicating the number of rounds. As a result, the pattern display unit 341 displays an image corresponding to the opening basic presentation, and if it is determined that a ball-out performance suggestion image is to be displayed, the ball-out performance suggestion image is displayed on the pattern display unit 341.

<Step S2607>
In step S2607, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending start flag that is set to ON in step S2314 in the command determination process of FIG. 31 is set to ON. If the ending start flag is ON (step S2607: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2608. If the ending start flag is OFF (step S260
7: No), and proceed to step S2610.

<Steps S2608 and S2609>
When the ending start flag is on (step S2607: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending start flag to off (step S2608), executes the ending performance start process (step S2609), and ends the big win game performance process. In the ending performance start process, the MPU 51 executes the opening performance determined in step S2502 of the big win game performance determination process in FIG. 40 in the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, and transmits an ending performance start command to the display control device 6 to cause the pattern display unit 341 to start an image performance as an ending performance. As a result, the pattern display unit 341 displays an image corresponding to the ending basic performance, and if it is determined that a ball output performance suggestion image is to be displayed, the ball output performance suggestion image is displayed on the pattern display unit 341.

<Step S2610>
In step S2610, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the big win game presentation end flag, which is set to ON in step S2316 in the command determination process of FIG. 31, is set to ON. If the big win game presentation end flag is ON (step S2610: Yes),
Then, the process proceeds to step S2611, and if the jackpot game presentation end flag is off (step S2610: No), the jackpot game presentation process is ended.

<Steps S2611 and S2612>
If the big win game performance end flag is on (step S2610: Yes), the MPU 5
The step S2611 sets the big win game presentation end flag to OFF (step S2611), executes the ending presentation end process (step S2612), and ends the big win game presentation process.

By the way, players select a gaming machine based on their own reasons and play on that gaming machine. One of the criteria for players to select a gaming machine is the ball-out performance of the gaming machine. This ball-out performance is influenced by the ease of winning the first start winning hole or the general winning hole, that is, the frequency of winning the big win lottery and the ball-out rate. On the other hand, the ease of winning the first start winning hole or the general winning hole is influenced by the physical state of the gaming machine, for example, the state of the nails driven into the gaming board and the surface properties of the gaming board. Here, the nails driven into the gaming board have individual differences between gaming machines at the shipping stage. In addition, the state of the nails changes over time, and there are individual differences between gaming machines in the degree of this change over time. In addition, there are individual differences between gaming machines in the shipping stage and the change over time in the surface properties of the gaming board. Therefore, even between gaming machines of the same type manufactured at the same time and installed at the same time in the same hall, the ease of winning into the first start winning port or the general winning port will differ. Since the physical state of such gaming machines can be confirmed from the outside, a player can check the ball-out performance by checking the physical state of the gaming machine, and can select a gaming machine that is assumed to have high ball-out performance to play.

On the other hand, there are gaming machines in which the gaming hall can set the jackpot probability from multiple stages of jackpot probability (game setting value). In such gaming machines, even if the ball output performance based on the ease of winning the first start winning hole or the general winning hole is low, if the jackpot probability is set high, the total ball output performance may be high because many balls are output from the jackpot game. Conversely, even if the ball output performance based on the ease of winning the first start winning hole or the general winning hole is high, if the jackpot probability is set low, the total ball output performance may be low because few balls are output from the jackpot game. In addition, the gaming hall may adjust the nails so that it is difficult for game balls to win the first start winning hole or the general winning hole while raising the game setting value. Therefore, in a gaming machine where the gaming parlor can set the jackpot probability from multiple stages (game setting values), simply checking the physical state of the gaming machine from the outside cannot determine whether the gaming machine has ball-dispensing performance that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, the probability of winning a jackpot (game setting value) is difficult to converge with a small number of trials, and while there are cases where a jackpot is won with a higher probability than the actual jackpot probability, there are also cases where a jackpot is won with a lower probability than the actual jackpot probability. In addition, the ease of winning a game ball into the first winning slot, etc., is also difficult to converge with a short period of play, and variations occur. As a result, even if the ball output performance is high, players may give up on the game in a short period of time and move to another game machine, and conversely, even if the ball output performance is low, players may continue playing for a long time.

In contrast, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, in variable play and big win play,
A ball-discharge performance suggestion image that suggests the ball-discharge performance may be displayed on the sub-image display section 38. Here, the ball-discharge performance suggestion image is selected based on a number of indicators including the probability of a big win and the physical state of the gaming machine 10. Therefore, by checking the ball-discharge performance suggestion image displayed on the sub-image display section 38, the player can guess the ball-discharge performance of the gaming machine 10 based on a number of indicators including the probability of a big win and the physical state of the gaming machine 10, and can also judge the ball-discharge performance for each of the multiple indicators. This allows the player to enjoy guessing the ball-discharge performance of the gaming machine 10, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, for players who select a gaming machine 10 based on ball-out performance, this can prevent them from giving up on a gaming machine with high ball-out performance in a short time and moving on to another gaming machine, or from continuing to play for a long time despite a machine with low ball-out performance.

In this embodiment, the display of the ball output performance suggestion image in the variable game is performed on the sub image display unit 3.
The display of the ball output performance suggestion image in the variable game is executed in the symbol display unit 3.
In this case, it is preferable to display the ball output performance suggestion image in a corner of the pattern display section 341, such as the lower right corner (see FIG. 52) of the pattern display section 341, so as not to obstruct the visibility of the variable game presentation. Also, the ball output performance suggestion image is not limited to those that suggest performance information based on the character type and character mode type. For example, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 52, performance information may be suggested by a combination of the character state and the lines. In the example shown in FIG. 52, the first setting value of the game, etc. may be suggested by the lines.
Performance information is suggested, and the first ranking such as the number of unit jackpot draws is displayed according to the character state.
The second performance information different from the performance information is suggested. In addition to or instead of displaying the lines on the symbol display portion 341, the ball output performance may be suggested by a voice effect by the speaker 26.

In this embodiment, the ball-out performance suggestion image simultaneously suggests ball-out performance based on multiple ball-out information (game setting value and unit jackpot lottery number), but the ball-out performance suggestion image may include multiple images corresponding to each performance information (ball-out performance). In this case, multiple ball-out performance suggestion images may be displayed on the pattern display unit 341, multiple ball-out performance suggestion images may be displayed on the sub-image display unit 38, or ball-out performance suggestion images may be displayed on both the pattern display unit 341 and the sub-image display unit 38 as shown in FIG. 53. In this way, ball-out performance is suggested by multiple images corresponding to performance information (ball-out performance), making it easy to individually guess multiple ball-out performances. Therefore, it becomes easy for a player to decide whether to continue or stop playing depending on the ball-out performance that is important when selecting a gaming machine.

In the example shown in FIG. 53, a first ball-out performance suggestion image suggesting a first ball-out performance such as a game setting value is displayed on the sub-image display section 38, and a second ball-out performance suggestion image suggesting a second ball-out performance, which is the first performance information such as the rank of the number of unit jackpot lotteries, is displayed at the lower right corner of the pattern display section 341 at an overlapping timing. By displaying the first ball-out performance suggestion image on the sub-image display section 38 and the second ball-out performance suggestion image on the pattern display section 341,
and the sub-image display section 38. This provides an opportunity for players who are not very interested in game presentations to pay attention to the game presentations, and conveys the fun of the game presentations to the players. In addition, by displaying the first ball-out performance suggestive image and the second ball-out performance suggestive image at the same time, the player can check the first ball-out performance suggestive image and the second ball-out performance suggestive image at the same time, and therefore can easily judge the ball-out performance based on the two types of ball-out performance.

In addition, in the round game presentation, the game setting value is suggested by the human character, and the rank of the number of lottery draws per unit of the jackpot is suggested by the state of a particular character, but as shown in Fig. 54, a character introduction image may be displayed in the round game presentation, and first performance information such as the game setting value may be suggested by the type of character introduced, and second performance information different from the first performance information such as the rank of the number of lottery draws per unit of the jackpot may be suggested by the frame color of the character introduction image, etc. Also, the second performance information may be suggested by the frame pattern, background color, etc. of the character introduction image.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ball output performance suggestion image can be displayed in both variable play and big win play, but the ball output performance suggestion image may be displayed in either one of the variable play and big win play, or the ball output performance suggestion image may be displayed in a customer waiting state (a state in which there is no pending variable display and no game balls are shot) in addition to or instead of one or both of the variable play and big win play. For example, in the customer waiting state, it is possible to make the ball output performance suggestion image be displayed on the condition that a predetermined operation (long press operation or rapid tap operation) is performed on the operation button 20 or a command is input to the cross key (not shown).

In addition, in variable play, the ball output performance suggestion image is displayed when a specific condition is met as described above, and the specific condition in this case can be, for example, that the number of released game balls reaches a certain number, that the operation button 20 is operated immediately after the start of the variable play or immediately before the end, that a specific effect is executed, etc. In this case, it is preferable that the specific effect is an effect that the player does not mistake for an effect suggesting the lottery result in the big win lottery, and can be, for example, an effect that requests the player to hit left or right.
The specific effect may be an effect that requests an operation of the operation button 20. When a specific condition is satisfied, the ball output performance suggestion effect is executed, so that the player can
It becomes possible to predict the timing when the ball-out performance suggestion effect will be executed. This allows the player to predict the timing when the ball-out performance suggestion effect will be executed and to proceed with the game while looking forward to the timing, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in a jackpot game, it is sufficient to display an image suggesting ball output performance in at least one of the opening, open/close execution mode, and ending, and in the open/close execution mode, an image suggesting ball output performance may be displayed in the interval between rounds of play in addition to or instead of the rounds of play.

Also, in addition to or instead of the image presentation, the ball-out performance may be suggested by a sound output presentation by the speaker 26 or a lamp presentation by the illumination unit 27. For example, the ball-out performance may be suggested by the type of music (BGM) output during a big win game.
Also, the ball-out performance may be suggested by changing the music (BGM) during a big win game. When the ball-out performance is suggested by changing the music (BGM), the player can guess the ball-out performance based on the music (BGM) output from the speaker 26 even when the player is not checking the pattern display unit 341 or the sub-image display unit 38. Also, by using a music change effect as the ball-out performance suggestion effect, even a player who is not interested in music (BGM) can focus on the music (BGM) output from the speaker 26 to guess the ball-out performance, and can learn the music (BGM) from the music (BGM).
It will be possible to entertain the GM.

In addition, when the ball-out performance is suggested by a change in music (BGM), the ball-out performance may be suggested by a combination of the music before and after the change. For example, it is possible to suggest ball-out performance such as game setting values by the type of music before the change, and other ball-out information such as the number of unit jackpot draws by the type of music after the change. When the ball-out performance is suggested by a combination of the music before and after the change, the player can guess the ball-out performance based not only on whether or not a music change occurs, but also on the combination of the music before and after the change. This makes it possible to draw the attention of players who are not interested in music to the music output from the speaker 26.

In addition, when the ball-out performance is suggested by a change in music (BGM), the ball-out performance may be suggested by the timing at which the music is changed (for example, the round of the open/close execution mode). Specifically, the BGM may be changed with a higher probability in a round game corresponding to the game setting value (for example, 4 rounds when the game setting value is 4) than in other round games. In addition, when the game setting value is an odd number (1 or 3), the BGM may be changed with a higher probability in an odd round than in an even round, and when the game setting value is an even number (2 or 4), the BGM may be changed with a higher probability in an even round than in an odd round. In the case of suggesting the ball-out performance by a change in music (BGM), the ball-out performance can be guessed depending on which round the round game in which the music change occurred is. Therefore, the player can guess the ball-out performance not only by whether or not a music change occurs output from the speaker 26, but also by the number of rounds in which the music change occurs. This allows even players who are not interested in music to pay attention to the music output from the speaker 26, and also makes it possible to draw attention to the display units such as the symbol display unit 341 in order to confirm which round of play in which the music change occurred. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an opportunity to visually recognize the round play presentation, and to convey to the player the fun of the round play presentation.

In addition, when suggesting ball-output performance by a change in music (BGM), it is also possible to suggest ball-output performance by both the combination of the music before and after the change, and the timing at which the music changes.

[Other embodiments]
Other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described below. In the following other embodiments, the same configurations as those of the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment and the same steps as those in the processing procedure will not be described. It is also possible to select and combine the configurations and processing functions of the first embodiment and the following other embodiments in any desired combination.

Second Embodiment
In the first embodiment described above, a case was described in which the presentation scenario in the open/close execution mode is determined based on an open/close execution mode presentation scenario selection table including an open/close execution mode presentation scenario in which a ball output performance suggestion image is displayed in the open/close execution mode of the big win game. In other words, a case was described in which whether or not a ball output performance suggestion image is displayed in a round game in the open/close execution mode depends on the presentation scenario selected.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when a game ball exceeds the upper limit number ("9" in this embodiment) in a round game, the game ball enters the variable winning port 316 (when a so-called over-winning occurs),
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a ball output performance suggestion image is displayed in a round game in the open/close execution mode. In addition, this embodiment also differs from the first embodiment in that the performance scenario in the open/close execution mode is determined based on the open/close execution mode performance scenario selection table that does not include the open/close execution mode performance scenario in which the ball output performance suggestion image is displayed in the open/close execution mode performance determination process (see step S2503 in FIG. 40) of the jackpot game performance determination process.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 55 to 59, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment.

[Command Judgment Process]
55 and 56 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. As shown in Fig. 55 and 56, in the command determination process of this embodiment, a process of determining whether or not a round game end command and a variable prize winning port winning command have been received is added to the command determination process in the first embodiment described above.

<Steps S2701 and S2702>
As shown in FIG. 55, when the received command is neither a variation pattern command, a big win game start command nor a round game end command (step S
If all of S2302, S2307 and S2310 are No, it is determined whether or not a round game end command has been received (step S2701).
For example, in the jackpot game control processing of step S1305 in the main processing of FIG. 16, it is set when ending a round of play, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1301 in the main processing of FIG.

When the MPU 51 receives a round game end command (step S2701: Y
es), and sets the round game effect end flag to ON (step S2702). The round game effect end flag is referred to in step S2803 of the big win game effect processing in FIG. 57 described later. Also, if the round game end command has not been received (step S2701: No), the process proceeds to step S2312 in FIG. 56.

<Steps S2703 and S2704>
When the MPU 51 has not received the round game end command (step S270
1: Yes), as shown in FIG. 56, if the received command is not an ending start command, a big win game end command, a game setting value change command, or a unit big win lottery count update command (steps S2313, S2315, S2317, and S2319),
(No in either case), and determine whether or not a variable winning port winning command has been received (step S2
703). The variable winning port winning command is executed, for example, in step S in the main process of FIG.
In step S1303, when a winning ball has been won in the variable winning port 316, the winning ball command is set in the RAM 412 together with the winning ball command when the winning ball command is set.
This is a flag that is sent to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process 301.

When the MPU 51 receives the variable winning port winning command (step S2703: Yes
The variable prize winning port winning flag is set to ON (step S2704), and the command determination process is terminated. The variable prize winning port winning flag is referred to in step S3001 of the ball output performance suggestion image display process in FIG. 59 described later.

[Big Win Game Presentation Processing]
In the jackpot game presentation processing of this embodiment, the content of the round game presentation start processing is different from that of the first embodiment. Accordingly, in the jackpot game presentation processing of this embodiment, a ball performance suggestion image display processing is added, and processing (steps) required for executing the round game presentation start processing and the ball performance suggestion image display processing are added. Here, FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game presentation processing executed by the sound lamp control device 5.

<Steps S2801 and S2802>
As shown in Fig. 57, in the big win game presentation process of this embodiment, on the condition that the round game presentation start flag is set to ON (step S2604: Yes), the round game presentation start process is executed (step S2801), and the round game execution flag is set to ON (step S2802). Details of the round game presentation start process will be described later with reference to Fig. 58. The round game execution flag is a flag indicating that the round game is being executed, and is referred to in step S2803 to determine whether or not to execute the ball output performance suggestion image display process.

<Steps S2803 and S2804>
In step S2803, the MPU 51 judges whether the round game execution flag set to ON in step S2802 is set to ON. When the round game execution flag is set to ON (step S2803: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the ball output performance suggestion image display process (step S2804) and performs the big win game presentation process. In the ball output performance suggestion image display process, when it is judged that the ball output performance suggestion image is to be displayed on the sub-image display unit 38, a process for displaying the ball output performance suggestion image on the sub-image display unit 38 is executed. That is, in this embodiment, it is judged whether to display the ball output performance suggestion image during the execution of the round game, and the ball output performance suggestion image is displayed on the sub-image display unit 38 in the round game. The details of the ball output performance suggestion image display process will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

<Steps S2805 to S2807>
In step S2805, the MPU 51 executes step S27 of the command determination process in FIG.
The MPU 51 judges whether the round game presentation end flag, which is set to ON in step S2802, is set to ON. If the round game presentation end flag is set to ON (step S2805: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game in progress flag, which indicates that a round game is being played, to OFF (step S2806), sets the round game presentation end flag to OFF (step S2807), and ends the big win game presentation process.
When the round game end flag is set to OFF (step S280
5: No), and proceeds to 2607.

[Round game performance start processing]
In the round game effect start process executed in step S2801 in the big win game effect process of Fig. 57, a process for starting the round game effect is executed. Here, Fig. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the round game effect start process executed in the big win game effect process of Fig. 57.

<Step S2901>
As shown in FIG. 58, in step S2901, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the suggestive image display flag is set to ON. The suggestive image display flag is a flag for displaying a ball performance suggestive image on the symbol display section 341 during a round game.
It is set to ON in step S3008 of the ball output performance suggestion image display process of 9.
51 is a case where the suggestive image display flag is set to ON (step S2901: Yes
If the ball output performance suggestion image display flag is set to off (step S2901: No), the process proceeds to step S2904.

<Steps S2802 and S2803>
When the suggestive image display flag is set to ON (step S290
1: Yes), in step S3007 of the ball output performance suggestion image display process of FIG. 59 described later,
The contents of the ball output performance suggestion image stored in the RAM 512 are read out (step S2902).
The contents of the ball output performance suggestion image are erased from 512 (step S2903).

<Step S2804>
In step S2804, the MPU 51 transmits a round game start command to the display control device 6
The round game start command is a command that causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the image presentation of the round game presentation. Also, when the suggestive image display flag is set to ON (step S2901: Yes), the round game start command includes information regarding the ball output performance suggestive image type. As a result, the ball output performance suggestive image is displayed in the round game.

[Ball performance suggestion image display processing]
In the ball-out performance suggestion image display process executed in step S2804 in the big win game performance process of Fig. 57, the presence or absence of the ball-out performance suggestion image display and the image type in the open/close execution mode are determined. Here, Fig. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the ball-out performance suggestion image display process executed in the big win game performance process of Fig. 57.

<Step S3001>
As shown in Fig. 59, in step S3001, the MPU 51 judges whether or not the variable winning port winning flag, which is set to ON in step S2704 in the command judgment process in Fig. 56, is set to ON. If the variable winning port winning flag is set to ON (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3002, and if the variable winning port winning flag is set to OFF (step S3001: No), the MPU 51 ends the ball output performance suggestion image display process.

<Steps S3002 and S3003>
If the variable prize winning port flag is set to ON (step S3001: Yes),
The MPU 51 adds 1 to the winning counter value (step S3002), and sets the variable winning port winning flag to OFF (step S3003). That is, the MPU 51 counts the number of game balls that have won in the variable winning port 316.

<Step S3004>
In step S3004, the MPU 51 judges whether the value of the winning counter (the number of winning balls into the variable winning opening 316) exceeds the upper limit number. The "upper limit number" is set to the same number as the number of winning game balls that close the variable winning opening 316 before a predetermined time (maximum opening time) has elapsed, and in this embodiment, the "upper limit number" is, for example, "9". That is, the MPU 51 judges whether the value of the winning counter (the number of winning balls into the variable winning opening 316) exceeds the upper limit number.
Here, if the value of the winning counter exceeds the upper limit (step S3004:
If the answer is Yes), the process proceeds to step S3005. If the value of the winning counter does not exceed the upper limit (step S3004: No), the ball output performance suggestion image display process is terminated.

<Step S3005>
If the value of the winning counter exceeds the upper limit (step S3004: Yes), the MPU
The MPU 51 judges whether the round game is the final round in the open/close execution mode (step S3005). If the round game is the final round (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the ball-out performance suggestion image display process. In other words, if an over-winning occurs in the final round in the open/close execution mode, the ball-out performance suggestion image is not displayed. On the other hand, if the round game is not the final round (step S3005: No), the MPU 51 determines the ball-out performance suggestion image (step S3006),
The contents of the ball output performance suggestion image are stored in the RAM 512 (step S3007).
The MPU 51 sets the ball output performance suggestion image display flag to ON (step S3008).
The ball output performance suggestion image display process is terminated. That is, when an over-winning occurs in a round game (excluding the final round) in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 51 sets the ball output performance suggestion image display flag to ON, thereby displaying the ball output performance suggestion image in the round game next to the round game in which the over-winning occurs.

Incidentally, in order to save the number of balls shot during the interval between rounds in a jackpot game, there is a technique called stop shot, in which the shooting of balls is stopped during the interval. When performing such stop shot, the player repeatedly shoots and stops shooting balls while counting the number of balls that will enter the variable winning hole 316 during the round game. Therefore, the player will focus on the variable winning hole 316 during the round game without checking the pattern display section 341 or the sub-image display section 38.

In contrast, in this embodiment, if an over-winning occurs during a round game (excluding the final round) in the open/close execution mode, a ball output performance suggestion image is displayed during the round game following the round game in which the over-winning occurred. This makes it possible for a player who performs stop shots to shoot out extra game balls to cause an over-winning, and also makes it possible for them to focus on the symbol display section 341 during round games. In particular, since players who perform stop shots tend to place importance on ball output performance as a criterion for selecting a gaming machine 10,
In order to draw attention to the pattern display section 341 and the sub-image display section 38, it is of great significance to display an image suggesting ball payout performance in the case of an over-winning ball on the sub-image display section 38 (or on the pattern display section 341, or on both the sub-image display section 38 and the pattern display section 341).

In addition, when the ball output performance suggestion effect is executed in a round game following a round game in which an over-winning has occurred in the variable winning port 316, the performance suggestion effect is executed in a short time after the over-winning. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the timing when the performance suggestion effect is executed, and can prevent forgetting to check the performance suggestion effect.

In this embodiment, if there is an over-winning in the final round of the open/close execution mode, the ball output performance suggestion image is not displayed, but if there is an over-winning in the final round, the ball output performance suggestion image may be displayed at the ending. In this case, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of not executing the ball output performance suggestion effect when there is an over-winning in the final round game.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first embodiment described above are possible within an applicable range.

[Third embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, in a variable game, a character of a ball output performance suggestion image is selected based on a game setting value suggestion character selection table (see FIG. 36) selected according to a game setting value (see steps S2404 and S2405 in FIG. 34), and a character mode is determined based on a character mode selection table (see FIGS. 37 and 38) selected according to the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number (see step S2405 in FIG. 34).
(See S2407 and S2408).

On the other hand, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that, in variable play, the game setting value and the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number are converted into points, and the ball output performance suggestion image is determined based on a table selected according to the total points obtained by adding up these points, and the ball output performance suggestion image is displayed on the sub-image display section 38. In the following, including in the reference drawings, the "total points" may be written as "total Pt".

The gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described below with reference to Figures 60 to 62, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment.

[Ball performance suggestion image display processing]
Here, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the ball-out performance suggestion image display processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine according to this embodiment.

<Step S3101>
As shown in FIG. 60, in the ball output performance suggestion image display process, when a variation pattern command is received and the value of the big win lottery counter is “0” (step S2402: Yes),
That is, when the number of jackpot lotteries reaches 1000, the MPU 51 acquires the game setting value and the number of unit jackpot lotteries stored in the RAM 512 (steps S2404 and S2406) and calculates the total points (total Pt) (step S3101). Specifically, the MPU 51 calculates the total points by adding up the additional points set according to the game setting value and the additional points set according to the unit number of jackpot lotteries.

Here, Figures 61 (A) and 61 (B) are diagrams showing an example of a point table used in the ball output performance suggestion image display process.

As shown in Fig. 61 (A), the set point table specifies the added points according to the game set value. In the set point table, when the game set value is 4, the added points are 4 points, when the game set value is 3, the added points are 3 points, when the game set value is 2, the added points are 2 points, and when the game set value is 1, the added points are 1 point. In other words, the higher the game set value, the higher the added points of the game set value are set, and the higher the points, the higher the ball output performance.

As shown in Fig. 61 (B), the lottery count point table specifies the additional points according to the number of unit jackpot lotteries (rank). In the lottery count point table, when the unit jackpot lottery count is 25 or more (rank S), the additional points are 5 points, when the unit jackpot lottery count is 20 or more but less than 25 (rank A), the additional points are 4 points, when the unit jackpot lottery count is 15 or more but less than 20 (rank B), the additional points are 3 points, and when the unit jackpot lottery count is 10 or more but less than 15 (rank C), the additional points are 2 points.
When the number of unit jackpot lottery draws is less than 10 (rank D), the added point is 1 point. In other words, the added point for the number of unit jackpot lottery draws (rank) is set higher the more the number of unit jackpot lottery draws (the higher the rank), and the higher the point, the higher the ball output performance.

As described above, in the setting point table shown in FIG. 61(A), the higher the game setting value, the higher the added points are set, and in the lottery count point table shown in FIG. 61(B), the more the number of lottery draws per unit of jackpot (the higher the rank), the higher the added points are set. Therefore, the higher the combined points, which are indexes of the game setting value and the number of lottery draws per unit of jackpot, the higher the ball output performance. In other words, the combined points are an index that has a correlation with the ball output performance of the gaming machine 10. For example, if the game setting value is 1 and the number of lottery draws per unit of jackpot is 13,
The game setting value has an additional point of 1 point, and the unit jackpot lottery number has an additional point of 2 points, so the total points are 3 points (1 point + 2 points).
This shows that the ball output performance is low. Also, the game setting value is 3 and the number of unit jackpot draws is 27.
If the number of times is 1, the total points will be 8 points (3 points + 5 points), indicating high ball-out performance.

In this embodiment, when the fluctuation start command is received, the number of big win lotteries is set to 100.
The total points are calculated when it is determined that the number of times has reached 0, but the timing for calculating the total points may be other timing. For example, the total points may be calculated every time a fluctuation start command is received.

<Step S3102>
In step S3102, the MPU 51 selects a character image (total point suggesting character image) as a ball output performance suggesting image suggesting the total points calculated in step S3101, and displays the selected character image on the sub-image display unit 38 (step S2408). In this embodiment, the ball output performance suggesting image is displayed when it is determined that the number of jackpot lotteries has reached 1000, but this ball output performance suggesting image may be displayed only in a variable game in which the number of jackpot lotteries has reached 1000, or may be displayed across multiple variable games, or may be displayed continuously even in a jackpot game.

Here, FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of a total point suggestion character selection table referenced in the ball output performance suggestion image display process.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the total point suggestion character selection table, the total points (
When the combined points (combined points) is "8" or "9", "Sam" is most likely to be selected, and other characters are least likely to be selected. When the combined points (combined points) is "6" or "7", "Marine" is most likely to be selected, and other characters are least likely to be selected. When the combined points (combined points) is "4" or "5", "Warin" is most likely to be selected, and other characters are least likely to be selected. When the combined points (combined points) is "2" or "3", "Urin" is most likely to be selected, and other characters are least likely to be selected.

In this way, "Sam" is likely to be selected when the combined points (combined Pt) is "8" or "9", suggesting that the combined points (combined Pt) is high (high ball output performance). "Marine" is likely to be selected when the combined points (combined Pt) is "6" or "7", suggesting that the combined points (combined Pt) is relatively high (relatively high ball output performance). "Warin" is likely to be selected when the combined points (combined Pt) is "
It is likely to be selected in the case of "4" or "5", and the total points (total Pt) are relatively low (
The character "Urin" is likely to be selected when the total points (total Pt) is "2" or "3", and the total points (total Pt
) is low (poor ball-out performance).

Incidentally, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, the ball output performance suggestion image is determined using tables prepared for each of the two pieces of performance information, namely, the game setting value and the unit number of big win lotteries.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the game setting value and the number of unit big win lotteries are converted into points and the ball output performance is evaluated as a total point, so the ball output performance suggestion image is determined by one table. Therefore, in this embodiment, the storage capacity of the ROM 511 required to store the table is reduced compared to the first embodiment, and the calculation processing procedure can be simplified.

In this embodiment, a ball output performance suggestion image was displayed based on the total points (ball output performance) during variable play, but it is also possible to display a ball output performance suggestion image based on the total points (ball output performance) during jackpot play.

In addition, in this embodiment, the total points of the additional points based on the game setting value and the additional points based on the number of unit jackpot draws are used as an index showing the ball-out performance, but it is also possible to set an index correlated to the ball-out performance based on a combination of two or more performance information other than the combination of the game setting value and the number of unit jackpot draws, and to suggest the ball-out performance based on that index.

In addition, instead of adding up the points based on the game setting value and the points based on the number of unit jackpot lotteries, an index is set that is correlated with the ball output performance by subtracting, multiplying, or dividing these points, or an index is set that is correlated with the ball output performance based on a predetermined formula,
It is also possible to suggest ball-dispensing performance based on the obtained indicators.

It is also possible to convert one of the first performance information, such as a game setting value, and the second performance information other than the first performance information into points, and suggest ball-output performance based on an index obtained by adding the points to a numerical value indicating the other performance information.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first embodiment described above are possible within an applicable range.

In addition, when determining a ball-output performance suggestive image in the second embodiment described above, a selection method for a ball-output performance suggestive image (character image) in the ball-output performance suggestive image display process in this embodiment can also be adopted.

[Fourth embodiment]
In the above-mentioned third embodiment, a case was described in which the game setting value and the rank of the number of unit jackpot lottery draws are each converted into points, and the ball-out performance suggestion image is determined based on a table selected according to the combined points (ball-out performance) obtained by adding up these points (see steps S3101 and S3102 in Figure 60).

On the other hand, this embodiment differs from the aforementioned third embodiment in that the ball output performance of the gaming machine 10 is calculated as a ball output expectation value, and performance information is suggested based on the ball output expectation value.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described below with reference to Figures 63 and 64, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above.

[Ball performance suggestion image display processing]
Here, FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the ball-out performance suggestion image display processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine according to this embodiment.

<Step S3201>
As shown in FIG. 63, in the ball output performance suggestion image display process, when a variation pattern command is received and the value of the big win lottery counter is “0” (step S2402: Yes),
That is, when the number of big win lotteries reaches 1000, the expected number of balls to be dispensed is calculated (step S3201).

As described above, the expected value of ball output is the ratio of the expected number of balls output (number of paid game balls) to the total number of balls shot (total number of balls out) when a certain number of balls (for example, 60,000 balls) are shot. The expected value of ball output is 100% when the total number of balls shot (total number of balls out) and the expected number of balls output (number of balls out) are the same, and is over 100% when the expected number of balls output (number of balls out) is greater, and is less than 100% when the expected number of balls output (number of balls out) is smaller. In other words, when the expected value of ball output exceeds 100%, it is advantageous for the player, and the higher the value, the higher the ball output performance. On the other hand, when the expected value of ball output is less than 100%, it is disadvantageous for the player, and the lower the value, the lower the ball output performance.

In addition, the expected number of balls paid out (number of paid-out game balls) is calculated based on the theoretical ratio of the normal game state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode), the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), the probability change game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the jackpot game state.
The theoretical ratio of each game state can be calculated from the theoretical number of balls in each game state.
For example, it is calculated based on the game setting value (jackpot probability in low probability mode and high probability mode (see Fig. 7 (A) and Fig. 7 (B))), the distribution rate of jackpot types (see Fig. 7 (C)), the number of lotteries per unit of jackpot, the ratio of special features, etc. Also, the number of balls expected to be dispensed (number of paid-out game balls) in the normal game state is calculated based on, for example, the number of lotteries per unit of jackpot, the base, etc. The number of balls expected to be dispensed (number of paid-out game balls) in other than the normal game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state, and jackpot game state) is calculated based on, for example, the theoretical average number of consecutive wins for the first win, the distribution rate of jackpot types (see Fig. 7 (C)).
) and is calculated based on the theoretical difference in number of balls for each type of jackpot, the ratio of consecutive devices, the ratio of devices, etc.

The expected value of the payout may be evaluated as a fulfillment rate relative to a border line.
The borderline is the unit amount (for example, 1,000 yen) to make the expected value of the balls paid out 100%.
This is the number of jackpot lottery draws required for a winning ball loan, and this borderline is calculated on the assumption that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot according to the jackpot lottery probability.
In other words, the borderline is the number of jackpot draws per unit amount (e.g., 1,000 yen) at which the difference in balls is ±0 when the jackpot is won according to the theoretical probability. Various methods for calculating the borderline have been proposed, but for example, the borderline can be calculated as the number of balls lent for 1,000 yen / (average number of balls paid out in a jackpot game / total probability). Here, 1,000
The number of balls lent per yen is generally 250. The average number of balls dispensed in a jackpot game is the number of balls dispensed per jackpot game when the number of rounds of the jackpot game is distributed according to the theoretical value. The total probability is the average probability of winning a jackpot when distributed according to the theoretical value between the high probability mode and the low probability mode. The fulfillment rate for the borderline is calculated as the ratio between the number of unit jackpot lotteries and the borderline. When the fulfillment rate for this borderline exceeds 100%, the higher the value, the more advantageous it is for the player.
If the value is less than 100%, the smaller the value, the more disadvantageous it is to the player. For example, if the number of lottery draws per unit jackpot is 18 and the borderline is 20, the fulfillment rate for the borderline is 90%, which is disadvantageous to the player.

<Step S3202>
In step S3202, the MPU 51 displays a character image (ball-out expected value suggesting character image) as a ball-out performance suggesting image suggesting the ball-out expected value calculated in step S3201.
and display the selected character image in the sub-image display section 38 (step S2
408).

Here, Figure 64 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a ball output expected value suggestion character selection table referenced in the ball output performance suggestion image display process, and Figure 64 (B) is a diagram showing an example of an expected value rank correspondence table indicating the tank of ball output expected value.
It is.

As shown in FIG. 64(A), in the ball-out expectation value suggesting character selection table, the ball-out expectation value suggesting character type is stipulated for each ball-out expectation value rank according to the expectation value suggesting performance selection table. Here, the ball-out expectation value rank is an index showing the magnitude of the ball-out expectation value, and
As shown in FIG. 4(B), when the expected value of the ball output is 115% or more, it is “Rank S”, when the expected value of the ball output is 105% or more but less than 115%, it is “Rank A”, and when the expected value of the ball output is 95% or more but less than 105%, it is “Rank B”.
If the expected value of the payout is less than 5%, it is "Rank B", and if the expected value of the payout is between 85% and 95%, it is "
A rank C is set as a 100% or lower expected value of ball payout, and a rank D is set as a 100% or lower expected value of ball payout.
In other words, in terms of ball output expectation value rank, the order of "Rank S,""RankA,""RankB,""RankC," and "Rank D" is the order of the ball output expectation value (higher ball output performance), and the earlier the rank, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 64(A), in the ball payout expectation value suggestion character selection table, when the ball payout expectation value rank is "Rank S", "GOLD Whale Lucky" is most likely to be selected, and other types of Whale Lucky are unlikely to be selected.
"OO Whale Lucky" is most likely to be selected, and other types of Whale Lucky are unlikely to be selected. When the ball output expectation value rank is "Rank B", "Normal Whale Lucky" is most likely to be selected, and other types of Whale Lucky are unlikely to be selected. When the ball output expectation value rank is "Rank C", "BAD Whale Lucky" is most likely to be selected, and other types of Whale Lucky are unlikely to be selected. When the ball output expectation value rank is "Rank D", "BACK Whale Lucky" is most likely to be selected, and other types of Whale Lucky are unlikely to be selected. Furthermore, "Longevity Whale Lucky" is only allocated when the ball output expectation value rank is "Rank S".

In this way, the "Kotobuki Whale Lucky" is selected only when the ball payout expectation rank is "Rank S", and is an image indicating the ball payout expectation rank that clearly indicates the "Rank S".
"LD Whale Lucky" is likely to be selected when the expected ball output rank is "Rank S", and is an expected ball output suggestive image suggesting "Rank S". "GOO Whale Lucky" is likely to be selected when the expected ball output rank is "Rank A", and is an expected ball output suggestive image suggesting "Rank A". "Normal Whale Lucky" is likely to be selected when the expected ball output rank is "Rank B", and is an expected ball output suggestive image suggesting "Rank B". "BAD Whale Lucky" is likely to be selected when the expected ball output rank is "Rank C", and is an expected ball output suggestive image suggesting "Rank C". "
"BLACK Whale Lucky" is likely to be selected when the expected ball output rank is "Rank D",
This is an image suggesting the expected payout value, suggesting that the game is "Rank D."

In the third embodiment, the ball output performance suggestion image is displayed based on two pieces of performance information, the game setting value and the number of unit jackpot lottery draws. Therefore, the third embodiment has the advantage that the calculation process is simple. On the other hand, the game setting value is an index that reflects the jackpot probability and has no correlation with the distribution of jackpot types. Also, the number of unit jackpot lottery draws is,
It is related to the number of big win lotteries in the normal game state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode), and there is no correlation with the ball output in game states other than the normal game state. Therefore, in the above-mentioned third embodiment, the number of balls output (difference in number of balls) in the big win game state, the average number of consecutive wins for the first win, the number of balls output (difference in number of balls) in the time-saving game state and the probability change game state are not taken into consideration, and although it has the advantage of being a simple method, it does not appropriately reflect the ball output performance of the gaming machine 10.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the ball-out performance is evaluated based on the total ball-out expectation value including game states other than the normal game state, and the ball-out performance is suggested. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to suggest the ball-out performance to the player based on the performance information that appropriately reflects the ball-out performance of the gaming machine 10.

In this embodiment, a ball-out performance suggestion image was displayed based on the expected ball-out value (ball-out performance) during variable play, but a ball-out performance suggestion image may also be displayed based on the expected ball-out value during jackpot play.

In addition, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first embodiment described above are possible within an applicable range.

In addition, when determining a ball-output performance suggestive image in the second embodiment described above, a selection method for a ball-output performance suggestive image (character image) in the ball-output performance suggestive image display process in this embodiment can also be adopted.

[Fifth embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the ball output performance is suggested in the sub-image display portion 38 has been described.

On the other hand, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that the game setting value is displayed on the special main display unit, and the game setting value can be seen by the downward movement of the retention box located on the front side of the special main display unit.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described below with reference to Figures 65 to 78, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment.

Here, FIG. 65 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 66 is an enlarged front view showing a main part of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 65 and FIG. 66, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, a crane device 36 (an example of a distribution device) and a retention box 39 (
A visibility limiting means), an outlet 319, and a special main display section 37a (performance information display means) are provided.

FIG. 67 is a perspective view showing an example of the crane device 36, and FIG. 68(A) is a perspective view showing an example of the crane device 36 shown in FIG.
68(A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X1 cutting line, and FIG. 68(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X2-X2 cutting line in FIG. 67.

As shown in Figures 67 and 68, the Krun device 36 distributes game balls shot into the right area of the game board 31 to either a normal ball entrance 367 or a special ball exit 363, which will be described later. The Krun device 36 is dish-shaped and has a bottom wall 361 and an annular peripheral wall 362 that surrounds the bottom wall 361. The bottom wall 361 is circular in plan view, and has a high bottom portion 361a.
, a low bottom portion 361b, and a left downward inclined portion 361c provided between the high bottom portion 361a and the low bottom portion 361b.

The high bottom portion 361a constitutes the right side portion of the bottom wall 361 and is inclined downward to the right. The high bottom portion 361a is provided with a special outlet ball passage 36 having a special outlet ball port 363 (special discharge port).
The special out ball passage 364 is adjacent to the right edge of the inclined portion 361c.
The special out ball passage 364 is provided at the center of the front-rear direction D1 of the high bottom 361a so as to extend in the up-down direction D2. The special out ball passage 364 is for guiding the game ball 99 that entered through the special out ball port 363 to the retention box 39 as described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99. The game ball 99 that entered the special out ball port 363 does not enter the various winning ports 313 to 316, and does not pass through the through gate 317. Therefore, the game ball 99 that entered the special out ball port 363 is treated as an out ball when it is no longer expected to enter the various winning ports 313 to 316 or pass through the through gate 317, for example, when it passes through the special out ball port 363 or when it is introduced into the special out ball passage 364.

The special out ball port 363 is an upper opening of the special out ball passage 364, and the high bottom portion 361
The special out ball opening 363 is surrounded by an obstruction wall 365 (obstruction means) protruding upward from the high bottom 361a. The obstruction wall 365 obstructs the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball opening 363, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the special out ball opening 363.
It includes a large obstruction wall 365a and a small obstruction wall 365b.

The large obstruction wall 365a is provided in the right half of the periphery of the special out ball opening 363. In other words, the large obstruction wall 365a is provided in a portion close to the peripheral wall 362 and far from the inclined portion 361c, and obstructs the game ball 99 from entering from the right half side of the special out ball opening 363. In addition, the height dimension of the large obstruction wall 365a is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball 99. Therefore, the game ball 99 cannot be expected to enter the special out ball opening 363 from the side of the large obstruction wall 365a.

On the other hand, the small blocking wall 365b is provided in the left half of the periphery of the special out ball opening 363. In other words, the small blocking wall 365b is provided in a far part of the peripheral wall 362, close to the inclined part 361c, and blocks the game ball 99 from entering from the left half side of the special out ball opening 363. Also, the height dimension of the small blocking wall 365b is set to be smaller than the radius of the game ball 99. Therefore,
For the special out ball port 363, it is expected that the game ball 99 will enter from the small obstruction wall 365b side (the left half side of the special out ball port 363) compared to the game ball 99 from the large obstruction wall 365a side (the right half side of the special out ball port 363).

The low bottom portion 361b constitutes the left side portion of the bottom wall 361, and is inclined so as to be lower toward the center. A normal passage 368 having a normal ball entrance 367 is provided in the low bottom portion 361b. This normal passage 368 is provided adjacent to the left edge of the inclined portion 361c, and extends in the up-down direction D2, except for the portion along the peripheral wall 362 of the low bottom portion 361b. This normal passage 368 is used to guide the game ball 99 that enters through the normal ball entrance 367.
To the lower right of the game board 31, the normal passage 368 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape with a larger opening area than the special out ball port 363. In addition, a guide member 369 is connected to the lower end of the normal passage 368, which releases the game ball 99 passing through the normal passage 368 from a fixed position.
The cross-sectional area of the lower portion of this guide member 369 is smaller than that of the upper portion, and the lower portion of the guide member 369 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball 99 .

In such a Kroon device 36, the game ball 99 shot out to the right area of the game board 31 moves on the bottom wall 361 along the peripheral wall 362. This delays the flow of the game ball 99 down the Kroon device 36. Most of the game ball 99 moving on the bottom wall 361
For example, the game ball 99 enters the normal ball entrance 367 due to a decrease in kinetic energy, or due to collision with the peripheral wall 362 or the obstruction wall 365 of the Kluen device 36, or with other game balls 99. The game ball 99 that entered the normal ball entrance 367 moves through the normal passage 368 and the guide member 369 and is released from a fixed position. The game ball 99 released from the fixed position can enter the second winning opening 315 and the variable winning opening 316, and can also pass through the through gate 317.

On the other hand, some of the game balls 99 (for example, 0.01% to 1%) moving on the bottom wall 361 have their direction of movement changed by the periphery of the normal ball entrance 367, and move toward the small obstruction wall 365b of the special out ball entrance 363 due to collisions with other game balls 99, and climb over the small obstruction wall 365b to enter the special out ball entrance 363. The game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball entrance 363 move through the special out ball passage 364 and are released toward the retention box 39.

In this embodiment, the special out ball opening 363 is provided at the high bottom 361a of the bottom wall 361, the normal ball entrance 367 has a larger opening area than the special out ball opening 363, and the special out ball opening 363 is surrounded by the obstructing wall 365, so that the special out ball opening 363 is significantly more difficult for the game ball 99 to enter than the normal ball entrance 367. However, instead of or in addition to all or part of these, it is also possible to make it more difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special out ball opening 363 by other means. For example, it is possible to generate a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force that repels the game ball 99 around the special out ball opening 363, to form an air curtain by ejecting air around the special out ball opening 363, or to place an obstacle (having a shape different from the obstructing wall 365) that obstructs the entry of the ball into the special out ball opening 363.

Here, FIG. 69(A) is a front view showing the retention box 39 and its surroundings when the retention box 39 is in the upper limit position, FIG. 69(B) is a vertical sectional view of FIG. 69(A), and FIG. 69(C) is a vertical sectional view of FIG.
70(A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X3-X3 of FIG.
FIG. 70(B) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69(B) showing the retention box 39 and its surroundings when the retention box 39 is in the lower limit position, FIG. 70(C) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69(C) showing the retention box 39 and its surroundings when the retention box 39 is in the lower limit position, and FIG.
FIG. 70(D) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69(C) showing the retention box 39 and its surroundings when the retention box 39 is in the intermediate position between the upper limit position and the lower limit position.

As shown in Figures 69 and 70, the retention box 39 receives the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball port 363 of the Kluen device 36, and retains the game ball 99 inside until a predetermined condition is met. In this embodiment, the predetermined condition is that a certain time has elapsed since the retention box 39 has been lowered to a lower limit position (see Figures 70(A) and 70(B)) described below. The retention box 39 has an upper opening 391 that allows the reception of the game ball 99. The retention box 39 has a front wall 392a, a rear wall 392b, a left side wall 392c, a right side wall 392d, and a bottom wall 392e, and a retention space 393 that retains a certain number of game balls 99 is defined by these walls 392a to 392e. Moreover, the retention box 39 is entirely opaque (e.g., black or white), which makes the rear side of the retention box 39 invisible or difficult to see.

The retention box 39 has an upper limit position (see FIG. 69) which covers the entire front of the special main display section 37a, and a lower limit position (see FIG. 70) which is entirely located below the special main display section 37a.
70(A) and 70(B) . As shown in FIG. 71 , the retention box 39 is driven by a motor 39 connected to the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5.
Specifically, the retention box 39 is moved downward by, for example, rotating the motor 39a in the forward direction by the MPU 51, and moved upward by, for example, rotating the motor 39a in the reverse direction by the MPU 51. The motor 39a is, for example, a stepping motor, and the retention box 39 can be placed at a predetermined position by controlling the number of drive pulses input to the motor 39a.

As shown in Figures 70(C) and 70(D), the retention box 39 can be stopped at a plurality of intermediate positions set between the upper limit position and the lower limit position. When the retention box 39 is located at a plurality of intermediate positions, a part of the special main display portion 37a is visible, and the retention box 39 can be stopped at a plurality of intermediate positions.
The opening 394 of the retention box 39 does not communicate with the discharge port 319 of the game board 31.
When the retention box 39 is in the intermediate position, the game ball 99 in the retention box 39 is retained in the retention box 39 without being discharged to the outside.
9 can be stopped at three intermediate positions (see FIG. 73 and FIG. 74) corresponding to the downward movement levels 1 to 3. At the intermediate position of the downward movement level 1, it is possible to judge whether the segment A of the special main display unit 37a is on or off, at the intermediate position of the downward movement level 2, it is possible to judge whether the segments B and F of the special main display unit 37a are on or off, and at the intermediate position of the downward movement level 3, it is possible to judge whether the segment G of the special main display unit 37a is on or off. In addition to the positions corresponding to the downward movement levels 1 to 3, or instead of at least one of the positions corresponding to the downward movement levels 1 to 3, the intermediate positions may be set to, for example, a position where it is possible to judge whether the segments C and E of the special main display unit 37a are on or off, or a position where it is possible to judge whether the segment D of the special main display unit 37a is on or off. The range in which the special main display unit 37a can be seen differs at each intermediate position, and as the retention box 39 approaches the lower limit position, the special main display unit 37a
The position of the retention box 39 is determined according to the number of game balls retained inside (retained game ball count), and the greater the number of retained game balls, the lower the retention box 39 is located (see FIG. 74(C)). This point will be described later with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74.

The retention box 39 does not necessarily need to be entirely opaque, but rather it is sufficient that at least one of the front wall 392a or the rear wall 392b is opaque. The retention box 39 is permitted to be transparent to the extent that the special main display section 37a is invisible or difficult to see when the retention box 39 is in the upper limit position.

Further, an opening 394 is formed in the lower part of the rear wall 392 b of the retention box 39 .
70(C) and 70(D), the opening 394 communicates with the discharge port 319 penetrating the game board 31 when the retention box 39 is at the lower limit position. As a result, when the retention box 39 is lowered to the lower limit position, the game ball 99 in the retention box 39 is discharged through the opening 39
4 and the discharge port 319 to the rear side of the game board 31.
The bottom wall 392e is inclined so that the upper surface thereof becomes lower toward the rear side. This promotes the discharge of the game balls 99 in the retention box 39 to the rear side of the game board 31 through the opening 394 and the discharge port 319 when the opening 394 and the discharge port 319 are connected.

In addition, a special out ball sensor 35a is provided near the upper opening 391 on the left side wall 392c of the retention box 39. This special out ball sensor 35a detects that a game ball 99 has entered the retention box 39, and is, for example, a reflection type optical sensor. Of course, other types of known sensors such as a transmission type optical sensor or an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor can also be used as the special out ball sensor 35a. In addition, the special out ball sensor 35a may be provided in the special out ball passage 364 of the crane device 36.

As shown in FIG. 71, the special out ball sensor 35a is connected to the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, and the MPU 41 monitors the output from the special out ball sensor 35a, so that the MPU 41 judges whether or not a game ball 99 has entered the retention box 39. When a game ball 99 has entered the retention box 39, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command, and transmits this special out ball detection command to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. 16. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 5 receives the special out ball detection command, the MPU 51 controls the motor 39a to execute retention box lowering process to lower the retention box 39 (see FIG. 76 and FIG. 77). When the retention box 39 is moved to the lower limit position, the MPU 51 returns the retention box 39 to the upper limit position after a certain time has elapsed. Details of this point will be described later in the retention box return process of FIG. 78.

In addition, the special out ball sensor 35 a may be connected to the voice lamp control device 5.
In this case, the special out ball detection command is not set in the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.
The voice lamp control device 5 operates the retention box based on the output from the special out ball sensor 35a.

Here, FIG. 72(A) is a front view showing an example of the special main display section 37a, and FIG. 72(B) is a diagram showing an example of the display of the special main display section 37a.

As shown in FIG. 72(A), the special main display section 37a is configured by a so-called 7-segment display, and is made up of seven segments A to G and a dot point DP. Each of the segments A to G and the dot point DP can be turned on and off individually.
), the special main display section 37a displays game setting values stored in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4. In the initialization process or start-up process executed when the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the special main display section 37a displays the RA
The game setting value stored in M412 is read out, and a numerical value corresponding to the game setting value is displayed. Specifically, in the special main display section 37a, when the game setting value is 1, the segments B and C are lit to display the number 1, when the game setting value is 2, the segments A, B, D, E, and G are lit to display the number 2, when the game setting value is 3, the segments A to D and G are lit to display the number 3, when the game setting value is 4, the segments B, C, F, and G are lit to display the number 4, when the game setting value is 5, the segments A, C, D, F, and G are lit to display the number 5, and when the game setting value is 6, the segments A, C to G are lit to display the number 6.

In addition, after the game setting value is displayed in the initialization process or startup process, the special main display section 37a continues to display the game setting value until the main power is turned off. Also, if there is a change in the game setting value, the special main display section 37a displays the changed game setting value. For example, when the changed game setting value is displayed on the game setting value display section 45 in step S1709 of the game setting value change process in FIG. 20, it is possible to display the changed game setting value on the special main display section 37a. Also, the special main display section 37a is configured to display at least one
Any display device other than a seven-segment display, such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, or an organic EL display, may be used as long as it can display the numbers from 1 to 6.

73(A) to 73(C), 74(A) and 74(B) are schematic diagrams showing the visibility of the special main display section 37a at each downward movement level. Note that in these diagrams, only the portion of the retention box 39 located in front of the special main display section 37a is shown.

As shown in FIG. 73 and FIG. 74, the downward movement level of the retention box 39 is 0 to 4.
Furthermore, the higher the downward movement level of the stay box 39 (the larger the downward movement level number), the lower the stay box 39 is positioned, and the larger the area in which the special main display portion 37a can be viewed becomes.

73A, at the downward movement level 0, the retention box 39 is at the upper limit position, the entire front side of the special main display portion 37a is covered by the retention box 39, and the entire special main display portion 37a cannot be seen. In other words, at the downward movement level 0, the game setting value cannot be determined at all.

As shown in Fig. 73 (B), at the downward movement level 1, a part (upper half) of the segment A of the special main display section 37a is visible. That is, at the downward movement level 1, it is possible to confirm whether the segment A is on or off. At the downward movement level 1, when the segment A is on, it can be determined that the game setting value is either 2, 3, 5, or 6, and when the segment A is off, it can be determined that the game setting value is either 1 or 4. In other words, at the downward movement level 1, it can be determined that the game setting value is either 1 or 4, or whether the game setting value is either 2, 3, 5, or 6, depending on whether the segment A is on or off.

As shown in Figure 73 (C), at downward movement level 2, all of segment A of the special main display section 37a is visible, and portions (upper halves) of segments B and F are visible. In other words, at downward movement level 2, in addition to segment A being lit and unlit, it is possible to confirm that segments B and F are lit and unlit. At downward movement level 2, if segment B is lit and segments A and F are unlit, it can be determined that the game setting value is 1, and if segments B and F are lit and segment A is unlit, it can be determined that the game setting value is 4. Also, if segments A and B are lit and segment F is unlit, the game setting value is 2 or 3.
When segments A and F are lit and segment B is off, it can be determined that the game setting value is 5 or 6. In other words, at the lowering level 2, depending on the combination of lighting and off of segments A, B and F, it can be determined that the game setting value is 1, the game setting value is 4, the game setting value is 2 or 3, or the game setting value is 5 or 6.
and 6.

As shown in FIG. 74(A), at the downward movement level 3, all of the segments A, B, and F of the special main display section 37a are visible, and a part (upper half) of the segment G is visible. That is, at the downward movement level 3, in addition to the lighting and extinguishing of the segments A, B, and F, the lighting and extinguishing of the segment G can be confirmed. At the downward movement level 3, it can be determined that the game setting value is 1 when the segment B is lit and the segments A, F, and G are extinguished, and it can be determined that the game setting value is 4 when the segments B, F, and G are lit and the segment A is extinguished. Also, it can be determined that the game setting value is either 2 or 3 when the segments A, B, and G are lit and the segment F is extinguished, and it can be determined that the game setting value is 5 or 6 when the segments A, F, and G are lit and the segment B is extinguished. In other words, at downward movement level 3, the combination of the lighting and extinguishing of segments A, B, F and G can determine whether the game setting value is 1, the game setting value is 4, the game setting values are 2 and 3, or the game setting values are 5 and 6.

As shown in FIG. 74(B), at the lowering level 5, the retention box 39 is at the lower limit position.
All of the seven segments A to G of the special main display portion 37a are visible. That is, at the downward movement level 0, the game setting value can be clearly confirmed.

Here, Figure 74 (C) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of game balls retained in the retention box 39 and the downward movement level of the retention box 39. As shown in Figure 74 (C), the downward movement level of the retention box 39 is determined according to the number of game balls retained in the retention box 39 (number of retained game balls). Specifically, the downward movement level of the retention box 39 is 0 when the number of retained game balls is 0 and the retention box 39 is at the upper limit position, 1 when the number of retained game balls is 1, 2 when the number of retained game balls is 2, 3 when the number of retained game balls is 3, and 4 when the number of retained game balls is 4 and the retention box 39 is at the lower limit position. As described above, the downward movement level of the retention box 39
When the retention box 39 is at the lower limit position, the game balls retained in the retention box 39 are discharged to the outside, so that the number of game balls retained in the retention box 39 becomes 0, but in this case, the retention box 39 is moved to the upper limit position a certain time later after the retention box 39 is moved to the lower limit position.

Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 when the retention box 39 moves downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position and returns from the lower limit position to the upper limit position will be described with reference to Figures 75 to 78.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing]
Here, Fig. 75 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the sub timer interrupt process executed in the gaming machine according to this embodiment. In the sub timer interrupt process of this embodiment, similarly to the sub timer interrupt process of the first embodiment described above (see Fig. 27), an operation detection process (step S2001)
, operation detection pattern determination process (step S2002), counter update process (step S2
003), command determination process (step S3301), variable game performance process (step S2
In the second embodiment, a command determination process (step S3305) and a big win game presentation process (step S2006) are executed. However, the command determination process (step S3301) of this embodiment differs in some steps from the command determination process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 31). Also, in the sub timer interrupt process of this embodiment, unlike the sub timer interrupt process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 27), a retention box return process is executed (step S3302).

[Command Judgment Process]
FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

As shown in Fig. 76, in the command judgment process of this embodiment, when the MPU 51 receives a command (step S2301: Yes), if the received command is not a variation pattern command, a big win game start command, or a round game start command (step S2302, S2307, and S2310 are all No), it is judged whether the received command is a special out ball detection command (step S3401). The special out ball detection command is a command that is set when the special out ball sensor 35a detects that the game ball 99 has entered the retention box 39 as described above, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of Fig. 16.

If the received command is a special out-ball detection command (step S
3401: Yes), and executes the retention box lowering process (step S3402).

[Stuck box lowering process]
In the retention box lowering process, a process is executed in which the retention box 39 is lowered to a position corresponding to a lowering level (see FIG. 74(C)) according to the number of game balls retained in the retention box 39. Here, FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the retention box lowering process executed in the command determination process of FIG.

<Step S3501>
77, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the downward movement level counter, which is incremented in step S3505 described later, is 0. If the value of the downward movement level counter is 0 (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3502, and if the value of the downward movement level counter is not 0 (step S3501: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3504.

<Step S3502>
If the value of the downward movement level counter is 0 (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 51
sets the retention box return counter to a predetermined value. Here, the retention box return counter is a counter for determining the timing of returning the retention box 39 to the upper limit position corresponding to the downward movement level 0 when the retention box 39 is moved downward, and is referred to in step S3603 in the retention box return process in FIG. 78 described later. The value of the retention box return counter is set to a value corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, 1 second to 60 seconds) from when the downward movement of the retention box 39 starts to when the retention box 39 is returned to the upper limit position (downward movement level 0).

<Step S3503>
In step S3503, the MPU 51 sets a retention box return standby flag to ON. The retention box return standby flag is a flag indicating that the retention box 39 is waiting to return to the upper limit position (downward movement level 0) when it is moved downward, and is referred to in step S3601 in the retention box return process in FIG. 78 described later.

<Step S3504>
In step S3504, the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the downward movement level counter is 4. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the retention box 39 has been moved downward to the lowest position, and determines whether to further move the retention box 39 downward. If the value of the downward movement level counter is 4 (step S3504: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the retention box downward movement process, and if the value of the downward movement level counter is not 4 (step S3504: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3505.

<Steps S3505 and S3506>
If the value of the downward movement level counter is not 4 (step S3504: No), or if the retention box return waiting flag is turned on (step S3503), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the downward movement level counter indicating the position of the retention box 39 (step S3505), and moves the retention box 39 downward to a position according to the downward movement level corresponding to the value of the downward movement level counter after the increment (step S3506).
By controlling the drive pulse input to the special out ball detection command, the retention box 39 is moved downward to a position corresponding to a downward movement level one level higher than the downward movement level before receiving the special out ball detection command. For example, when the downward movement level is changed from 0 to 1, the retention box 39 is moved downward from the upper limit position (see FIG. 73(A)) that covers the entire front of the special main display section 37a to a position (see FIG. 73(B)) where the upper half of the segment A of the special main display section 37a is exposed. Also, when the downward movement level is changed from 1 to 2, the retention box 39 is moved downward from the position shown in FIG. 73(B) to the intermediate position shown in FIG. 73(C), when the downward movement level is changed from 2 to 3, the retention box 39 is moved downward from the intermediate position shown in FIG. 73(C) to the position shown in FIG. 74(A), and when the downward movement level is changed from 3 to 4, the retention box 39 is moved downward from the intermediate position shown in FIG. 74(A) to the lower limit position shown in FIG. 74(B). When the downward movement level is changed from 0 to 1, the retention box 39 is moved downward from the upper limit position (see FIG. 73(A)) that covers the entire front of the special main display section 37a to a position where the upper half of the segment A of the special main display section 37a is exposed.
When segment A of 37a is on, the game setting value can be guessed to be one of 2, 3, 5, and 6, and when segment A is off, the game setting value can be guessed to be one of 1 and 4. When the down movement level is changed from 1 to 3, the number of guessed game setting values is gradually reduced by lighting or extinguishing the segments that become visible according to the down movement level, and the game setting values can be gradually narrowed down. At down movement level 4, all of the seven segments A to G of the special main display section 37a are visible, so the game setting value can be recognized. This allows the player to guess the game setting value in stages according to the number of special out balls (the number of visible segments of the special main display section 37a), and the more the number of special out balls, the more the accuracy of guessing can be improved step by step, so that the player can enjoy the process of guessing the game setting value.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, a state in which some or all of the game setting values displayed on the special main display section 37a are visible can be achieved by the simple method of moving the retention box 39 downward.

In addition, the retention box 39 is gradually lowered each time a game ball enters the special out ball port 363, so that the visible area of the game setting value displayed on the special main display section 37a is gradually enlarged. As a result, the game setting value displayed on the special main display section 37a gradually becomes clear, so that the player can enjoy guessing the game setting value until the game setting value can be grasped. This increases the player's motivation to continue playing until the game setting value can be grasped, and increases the interest of the game.

[Stuck box recovery process]
In the retention box return process, a process is executed to return the retention box 39 to the upper limit position (downward movement level 0) after a certain time has elapsed since the retention box 39 was moved down to the lower limit position (downward movement level 4). Here, Fig. 78 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the retention box return process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of Fig. 75.

<Step S3601>
As shown in Fig. 78, in step S3601, the MPU 51 determines whether the retention box return wait flag, which is set to ON in step S3505 in the retention box lowering process in Fig. 77, is set to ON. If the retention box return wait flag is set to ON (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3602, and if the retention box return wait flag is set to OFF (step S3601:
If the answer is No, the retention box recovery process is terminated.

<Steps S3602 and S3603>
If the retention box recovery waiting flag is set to ON (step S3601: Yes),
The MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the retention box return counter set in step S3504 in the retention box descent process of Fig. 77 (step S3602), and determines whether the value of the retention box return counter after the subtraction is 0 or not (step S3603).
The MPU 51 judges whether a certain time has passed since the retention box 39 was lowered to the lower limit position. If the retention box return counter value after subtraction is 0 (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3604, and if the retention box return counter value after subtraction is not 0 (step S3603: No), the MPU 51 ends the retention box return process.

<Steps S3604 to S3606>
If the value of the retention box return counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S3603: Yes),
), the MPU 51 controls the drive pulse input to the motor 39a to return the retention box 39 from the lower limit position to the upper limit position (step S3604). This limits the time that the entire special main display section 37a is displayed to a certain time, preventing the game setting value from being left visible for a long period of time. This prevents players who are not playing from knowing the game setting value. The MPU 51 then sets the value of the downward movement level counter to 0 (step S3605), sets the retention box return standby flag to OFF (step S3606), and ends the retention box return process.

In the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above, the game setting values are suggested or clearly indicated by the symbol display unit 341 and the sub-image display unit 38. However, in the first embodiment described above, the game setting values are suggested or clearly indicated as part of the presentation, which results in poor gameplay. In particular,
In the jackpot game, the jackpot game presentation is executed on the symbol display unit 341 and the like, but for players who are not interested in the jackpot game presentation, the jackpot game involves playing a number of rounds according to the type of jackpot, and therefore lacks gameplay.

In contrast, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, when hitting from the right during a jackpot game or the like, the retention box 39 moves down in stages as the game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 363 of the Kluen device 36, which is difficult to enter, and the game setting value displayed on the special main display section 37a can be gradually confirmed. Therefore, when hitting from the right during a jackpot game or the like, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether the game ball 99 from the Kluen device 36 will enter the special out ball port 363. Also, when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 363, the special main display section 37
Since the game setting values displayed in a are gradually revealed, the player can enjoy guessing the game setting values in the process. This increases the player's motivation to continue playing until the game setting values are confirmed, and increases the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, the retention box 39 moves gradually downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 363 of the crane device 36 (detection of the game ball 99 in the retention box 39). However, the retention box 39 may also be configured to move suddenly downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 363.
In this way, when a game ball enters the special out ball opening 363, the retention box 39 is moved from the upper limit position where the game setting values are not visible or are difficult to see, to the lower limit position where the game setting values are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when a game ball enters the special out ball opening 363, the game setting values are immediately visible, which increases the interest in the game.

In addition, the retention box 39 moves down every time one game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 363, but the retention box 39 moves down every time multiple game balls 99 enter the special out ball port 363.
The retention box 39 may be moved downward in a stepwise manner or all at once. The visual recognition area may be expanded by moving it downward, but the visual recognition area may also be expanded by moving it upward, or the visual recognition area may be expanded by moving it leftward, rightward, diagonally, or the like.

The retention box 39 may be moved downward by the weight of the game balls 99 retained in the retention box 39. In this case, it is possible to urge the retention box 39 upward by a urging means (visibility control means) such as a coil spring. In this way, the retention box 39 is gradually lowered according to the number of game balls retained inside, and the retention box 39
The retention box 39 can be moved upward by discharging the game balls.

In this embodiment, the game setting value displayed on the special main display unit 37a is made visible by moving the retention box 39 downward when the game ball 99 shot into the right area of the game board 31 enters the special out ball port 363, but the game setting value displayed on the special main display unit 37a may be made visible by moving the retention box 39 when the game ball 99 shot into the left area of the game board 31 enters the special out ball port 363. In this case, the special main display unit 37a, the crane device 36, the retention box 39, etc. are arranged in the left area or the center area of the game board 31.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game balls 99 are distributed to the normal ball entrance 367 or the special ball exit 363 by the crane device 36, but a distribution device of another configuration can also be applied.

In this embodiment, the game setting values displayed on the special main display section 37a become visible when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 363, but the game setting values displayed on the special main display section 37a may be made visible when other specific conditions are satisfied. Examples of other specific conditions include the number of jackpot lottery draws reaching a predetermined number,
These include the result of the jackpot lottery being a miss a predetermined number of times in a row, the result of the jackpot lottery being a jackpot a predetermined number of times, the total number of game balls fired being equal to or greater than a certain number, the difference in balls being positive by a predetermined number or more, or the difference in balls being negative by a predetermined number or more.
When the specific conditions are satisfied, at least a part of the game setting values displayed on the special main display section 37a becomes visible, so that the player can predict the timing when at least a part of the game setting values becomes visible. This allows the player to predict the timing when the game setting values will be displayed and to proceed with the game while looking forward to the arrival of that timing, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, when other conditions are satisfied to make the game setting value displayed on the special main display section 37a visible, an opaque plate-like member is provided in place of the retention box 39 in the special main display section 37a.
By moving the display unit 37 downward between the front position of a and a lower or upper position of the special main display unit 37a, the game setting value displayed on the special main display unit 37a may be changed between an invisible or difficult to see state and a visible state.

In addition, the special main display section 37a may be configured to clearly indicate ball-out performance other than the game setting value. For example, the ball-out performance based on at least one winning port, such as the number of unit big win lotteries, the base, the continuous role ratio, and the role ratio, may be clearly indicated by the display color of the numerical value corresponding to the game setting value on the special main display section 37a, the blinking pattern of the numerical value, etc. In this case, it is possible to classify the other ball-out performance into a plurality of ranks (see, for example, Figures 37 and 38), and clearly indicate the rank. In this way, by displaying ball-out performance other than the game setting value in addition to the game setting value on the special main display section 37a as an index indicating the ball-out performance, when a specific condition such as the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball port 363 is satisfied, it becomes possible to guess or grasp the other ball-out performance in addition to the game setting value. This improves the playability and motivates the player to continue playing the game.

In this embodiment, the special main display unit 37 controlled by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4
In the above description, the game setting value is displayed on the display unit a. However, the game setting value may be displayed on a display unit by the voice and lamp control device 5. In this case, the display unit may be a liquid crystal display,
An organic EL display, a dot matrix display, etc. may be used. It is also conceivable that the game setting value is displayed in a stepwise manner or all at once on the display device where a specific condition is satisfied.

In this embodiment, instead of or in addition to the game setting value, other performance information, for example, a part or all of the performance information showing the ball-out performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316, may be displayed on the special main display section 37a. By displaying the performance information showing the ball-out performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316 on the special main display section 37a, the player can guess or recognize the ball-out performance reflecting the variation in the winning performance for the winning openings 313 to 316 between gaming machines due to, for example, individual differences at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine 10 and changes over time. This allows the player to enjoy guessing the ball-out performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316, and when the ball-out performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316 can be grasped, the player is given an opportunity to decide whether to continue playing with the gaming machine 10 that is currently being played based on the performance information.

Here, the performance information showing the ball output performance based on the winning ports 313 to 316 includes information on the number of lottery draws per unit of the big win, base information, consecutive role ratio information, role ratio information, and the like.

Since the number of unit jackpot draws is an index showing the likelihood of winning a jackpot draw in a normal gaming state (a state in which the game is played in low probability mode and not in high frequency support mode), by displaying part or all of the unit jackpot draw number information on the special main display section 37a, the player can know the likelihood of winning a jackpot draw. This allows the player to enjoy guessing the number of unit jackpot draws, and when the number of unit jackpot draws is known, the player is given an opportunity to decide whether to continue playing on the gaming machine in question based on the number of unit jackpot draws.

Since the base information is an index showing the ease of winning at the first winning port 314 and the general winning port 313, by displaying a part or all of the base information on the special main display section 37a, it becomes possible to know the ease of winning at the first winning port 314 and the general winning port 313. This allows the player to enjoy guessing the base, and when the base is grasped, the player is given an opportunity to decide whether or not to continue playing on the gaming machine in question based on the base.

The continuous feature ratio information is information on the frequency with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery transitions to the jackpot gaming state (stay ratio in the jackpot gaming state) and the ease of winning the variable winning port 316 (
The continuous feature ratio is an index showing the payout rate in a special game state. Therefore, since the player can guess or recognize the continuous feature ratio by displaying a part or all of the information on the continuous feature ratio, it becomes possible to know the frequency with which the lottery result in the big win lottery will transition to the big win game state and the ease of winning in the variable winning port 316. This allows the player to enjoy guessing the continuous feature ratio, and when the continuous feature ratio is grasped, the player is given an opportunity to decide whether to continue playing on the gaming machine in question based on the continuous feature ratio.

The bonus feature ratio information is an index showing the frequency with which the result of the bonus feature lottery will transition to the bonus feature state (the bonus feature state stay ratio), the stay ratio in the high frequency support mode in which the player receives support from the electric bonus feature 315b, and the ease of winning in the variable winning slot 316 and the second winning slot 315 (the payout rate in the bonus feature state). Therefore, since the player can guess or recognize the bonus feature ratio by seeing some or all of the information on the bonus feature ratio displayed,
The frequency with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery transitions to the jackpot game state, the electric device 3
It is possible to know the ratio of stay in the high frequency support mode in which the player receives the support of 15b, and the ease of winning in the variable winning port 316 and the second winning port 315. This allows the player to enjoy guessing the ratio of the features, and when the ratio of the features is known, the player is given an opportunity to decide whether to continue playing on the gaming machine in question based on the ratio of the features.

Sixth embodiment
In the above-mentioned fifth embodiment, the game setting value is displayed on the special main display section 37a,
A case has been described where the game setting value is made visible by the downward movement of the retention box 39 arranged on the front side of the special main display portion 37a.

On the other hand, this embodiment differs from the aforementioned fifth embodiment in that a translucent monitor is placed on the front side of the special main display unit on which the game setting values are displayed, and the visibility of the game setting values is changed by changing the overall visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described below with reference to Figures 79 to 85, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment described above.

Here, Figure 79 is a front view showing an example of the crown device and its surroundings of the gaming machine of this embodiment, Figure 80 is a cross-sectional view along the X4-X4 cutting line of Figure 79, and Figure 81 (A) is an oblique view showing an example of the special main display unit 37a and the translucent monitor 39A.

79 and 80, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, as in the above-mentioned fifth embodiment, the crane device 36, the discharge port 319, and the special main display section 37a are provided on the right side of the symbol display section 341 on the gaming board 31. However, in this embodiment, the retention box 39 in the above-mentioned fifth embodiment is not provided, and instead of this retention box 39, a translucent monitor 39A (translucent display device) is provided.

The crane device 36 has a similar configuration to the crane device 36 of the fifth embodiment described above, but a guide member 370 is connected to the special out ball passage 364. The guide member 370 is
It guides the game ball 99 introduced into the special out ball passage 364 to the back side of the game board 31, and is also connected to the discharge port 319.

The translucent monitor 39A can change the visible light transmittance between a low transmittance state (light-shielding state) where the visible light transmittance of the entire monitor is low and the back side is not visible or difficult to see, and a high transmittance state (transparent state) where the visible light transmittance of the entire monitor is high and the back side is visible. The translucent monitor 39A is set to the light-shielding state by displaying a single color such as black or white. The translucent monitor 39A can also realize a translucent state, which is a plurality of intermediate visible light transmittances between the light-shielding state and the transparent state. The translucent monitor 39A is a transparent flat display such as an organic EL display or a liquid crystal display that can realize a transparent state, and the visible light transmittance of the entire monitor can be changed by adjusting the voltage applied to the monitor electrode and the presence or absence of voltage application to each dot. As shown in FIG. 81 (
As shown in FIG. 1A, the translucent monitor 39A is fixedly disposed in front of the special main display section 37a. Therefore, by selecting the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A, it is possible to select a state in which the display contents of the special main display section 37a are invisible or difficult to see, or a visible state, and further to adjust the degree of visibility (visibility level) in the visible state.

81B is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A and the visibility state of the special main display section 37a. The visibility level is an index showing the visibility behind the translucent monitor 39A, and correlates with the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A.

As shown in FIG. 81B, the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A is divided into five levels, from 0 to 4. The higher the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A (the larger the visibility level number), the higher the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A and the higher the visibility of the special main display section 37a. At visibility level 0, the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is low and the back of the translucent monitor 39A is not visible, so the display content on the special main display section 37a cannot be confirmed at all. On the other hand, at visibility level 4, the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is high and the back of the translucent monitor 39A is completely visible, so the display content on the special main display section 37a cannot be confirmed at all.
You can check the displayed content without any problems.

Here, Fig. 81(C) is a diagram showing the relationship between the special out ball count number and the visibility level of the translucent monitor. The special out ball count number is the count number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 363 of the Kluen device 36. This special out ball count number is
The count is based on the detection result of the special out ball sensor 35a, and when the count number reaches 4, it is cleared to 0.

As shown in Fig. 81(C), the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A is determined according to the special out ball count number counted based on the detection result of the special out ball sensor 35a. Specifically, the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A is 0, which means that the back of the translucent monitor 39A is not visible or is difficult to see when the special out ball count number is 0, 1, which means that the special out ball count number is 1, 2, which means that the special out ball count number is 2, 3, which means that the back of the translucent monitor 39A is completely visible when the special out ball count number is 4.

In addition, when the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A becomes 4, meaning that the area behind the translucent monitor 39A is completely visible, the visibility level is changed to 0, meaning that the area behind the translucent monitor 39A is not visible or is difficult to see, after a certain period of time after the visibility level becomes 4, without waiting for the next game ball 99 to enter the special out ball port 363.

Next, the process executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 when changing the visibility level (visible light transmittance) of the translucent monitor 39A will be described with reference to Figures 82 to 85.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing]
Here, Fig. 82 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the sub timer interrupt process executed in the gaming machine according to this embodiment. In the sub timer interrupt process of this embodiment, similarly to the sub timer interrupt process of the above-mentioned fifth embodiment (see Fig. 75), an operation detection process (step S2001)
, operation detection pattern determination process (step S2002), counter update process (step S2
003), command determination process (step S3701), variable game performance process (step S2
75) in the fifth embodiment, a light blocking control process is executed (step S3702).

[Command Judgment Process]
FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG.

83, in the command judgment process of this embodiment, when the MPU 51 receives a command (step S2301: Yes), if the received command is not a variation pattern command, a big win game start command, or a round game start command (steps S2302, S2307, and S2310 are all No), it is judged whether the received command is a special out ball detection command (step S3801).
This is a command that is set when it is detected that a ball has been scored, and is sent to the voice and lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1301 in the main processing of Figure 16.

If the received command is a special out-ball detection command (step S
3801: Yes), and executes visibility control processing (step S3802).

[Visibility control process]
In the visibility control process, the visibility level according to the special out ball count number (see FIG. 81(C))
A process is executed to control the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A so that
FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a visibility control process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 83.

<Steps S3901 and S3902>
84, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the special out ball counter (step S3901), and controls the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A in accordance with the visibility level corresponding to the special out ball counter value after the increment (step S3902). That is, the MPU 51 adjusts the visible light transmittance to a visibility level one level higher than the visibility level before receiving the special out ball detection command by controlling the voltage value applied to the translucent monitor 39A, etc. (see FIG. 81(B)).

<Step S3903>
In step S3903, the MPU 51 judges whether the value of the special out ball counter is 4. That is, the MPU 51 judges whether the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is equal to or greater than the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39B.
If the visibility level counter value is 4 (step S3903: Yes), the MPU 51 returns to step S3903 and determines whether the visibility level is the maximum transparency at which the back of the object 9A can be completely seen.
The process proceeds to 3904. If the value of the visibility level counter is not 4 (step S3903: No
), and the visual recognition control process is terminated.

<Step S3904>
If the value of the visibility level counter is 4 (step S3903: Yes), the MPU 51
sets a light blocking start counter to a predetermined value (step S3904). The light blocking start counter is a counter for determining the timing to change the visible light transmittance from a visibility level 4 (transparent state) in which the back of the translucent monitor 39A is completely visible to a visibility level 0 (light blocking state) in which the back of the translucent monitor 39A is completely invisible or difficult to see, and is referred to in step S4003 in the light blocking control process in FIG. 85 described later. The value of the light blocking start counter is set to a value corresponding to a certain time (e.g., 1 to 60 seconds) from when the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A is set to 4 until it is returned to the visibility level 0.

<Step S3905>
In step S3905, the MPU 51 sets the light shielding start waiting flag to ON and ends the visibility control process. The light shielding start waiting flag is a flag indicating that the visibility level of the light-transmitting monitor 39A is waiting to be changed to 0, and is referred to in step S4001 in the light shielding process in FIG. 85 described later.

[Light blocking control process]
In the light blocking control process, a process is executed to set the visibility level of the light-transmitting monitor 39A to 0 after a certain time has elapsed since the visibility level was set to 4. Here, Fig. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the light blocking control process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of Fig. 82.

<Step S4001>
As shown in Fig. 85, in step S4001, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a light blocking start waiting flag, which is set to ON in step S3905 in the visibility control process in Fig. 84 described later, is set to ON. If the light blocking start waiting flag is set to ON (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4002, and if the light blocking start waiting flag is set to OFF (step S4001: No), the MPU 51 ends the retention box recovery process.

<Steps S4002 and S4003>
If the light blocking start waiting flag is set to ON (step S4001: Yes),
The PU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the light blocking start counter set in step S3904 in the visibility control process of FIG. 84 (step S4002), and determines whether the value of the light blocking start counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4003).
If the subtracted value of the light blocking start counter is 0 (step S4003: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4004. If the subtracted value of the light blocking start counter is not 0 (step S4005:
4003: No), and ends the light blocking control process.

<Steps S4004 to S4006>
If the value of the light blocking start counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4003: Yes), the MP
U51 controls the level of the voltage value applied to the light-transmitting monitor 39A to set the light-transmitting monitor 39A to a visible light transmittance corresponding to the visibility level 0, which is a light-shielding state (step S4
004). This restricts the time during which the entire special main display section 37a is completely visible to a certain time, so that it is possible to prevent the game setting value from being left visible for a long period of time. Then, the MPU 51 sets the value of the special out ball counter to 0 (step S
The light blocking start waiting flag is set to OFF (step S4005), and the retention box recovery process is terminated.

Incidentally, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment described above, when hitting from the right side during a jackpot game or the like, the retention box 39 gradually moves down as the gaming ball 99 enters the special out ball port 363 of the crown device 36, which is difficult to enter, and the gaming setting value displayed on the special main display section 37a can be gradually confirmed.

In contrast, in the gaming machine 10 according to the embodiment, instead of the retention box 39 in the fifth embodiment, a translucent monitor 39 is provided in front of the special main display section on which the game setting value is displayed.
A is arranged, and the visibility of the game setting value is changed by changing the visible light transmittance of the entire translucent monitor 39A. Also, the visible light transmittance of the entire translucent monitor 39A is changed stepwise by the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball hole 363 of the Kluen device 36, which is difficult to enter, during right-hand hitting such as a jackpot game. Therefore, as in the above-mentioned fifth embodiment, the game can be enjoyed by paying attention to whether the game ball 99 in the Kluen device 36 enters the special out ball hole 363 during right-hand hitting such as a jackpot game. Also, when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball hole 363, the game setting value displayed on the special main display unit 37a gradually becomes clear, so that the game setting value can be guessed and enjoyed in the process. This can improve the motivation to continue playing until the game setting value can be confirmed, and the interest of the game is improved.

In this embodiment, the visibility level is adjusted by adjusting the overall visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A, but it is also possible to adjust the visibility level by adjusting the overall display color of the translucent monitor 39A in accordance with the display color of each segment in the special main display section 37a.

It is also possible to adjust the visibility level in stages between the light-shielding state and the transparent state by partially changing the visible light transmittance of the light-transmitting monitor 39A.
As shown in Figures 86A) to 86D, the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A as a whole is low (light-shielding state), and the transparent region with high visible light transmittance is gradually increased until the entire translucent monitor 39A finally becomes transparent.

The example of Fig. 86(A) is a pattern in which the transparent region increases stepwise from the upper side to the lower side of the translucent monitor 39A, and the example of Fig. 86(B) is a pattern in which the transparent region increases stepwise from the lower side to the upper side of the translucent monitor 39A, which is the opposite of the pattern of Fig. 86(A). Also, the example of Fig. 86(C) is a pattern in which the transparent region increases stepwise from the right side to the left side of the translucent monitor 39A, and although not shown, a pattern in which the transparent region increases stepwise from the left side to the right side of the translucent monitor 39A is also conceivable.
The example of (D) is a pattern in which the transparent area increases gradually from the upper left corner of the translucent monitor 39A to the diagonally lower right corner. Although not shown, a pattern in which the transparent area increases gradually from another corner of the translucent monitor 39A to the diagonally opposite corner is also conceivable.
In this way, even when the transparent area is gradually increased as the game ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 363, the game setting value displayed on the special main display section 37a gradually becomes clear, so that the player can enjoy guessing the game setting value in the process. This increases the player's motivation to continue playing until the game setting value is understood, and increases the interest of the game.

It is also possible to change the visibility level between the light-shielding state and the transparent state by increasing the overall visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A while providing a gradation in the visible light transmittance.

In this embodiment, it is also possible to set a plurality of preset regions as transparent regions in a predetermined order each time a specific condition is satisfied while the light-transmitting monitor 39A is changed from the light-shielding state to the transparent state. The plurality of regions may be set in the portions corresponding to the segments A to G in the special main display section 37a, for example, as shown in FIG. 87(A).
Specifically, the central portion of each of the segments A to G can be made a transparent area.
It is also conceivable to set the light intensity of each segment to 100% and make one of the regions A to G a transparent region each time a specific condition is satisfied, thereby making it possible to determine whether each segment is lit or not. Here, Fig. 87(B) shows an example in which the regions A to G are changed to transparent regions in this order each time a specific condition is satisfied. In this way, by making the regions A to G transparent regions while the light-transmitting monitor 39A is changed from a light-blocking state to a transparent state, it becomes possible to estimate the game setting value in stages.

The order in which the regions A to G are made transparent is not limited to the order shown in FIG. 87(B), and may be set appropriately. For example, it may be determined according to the game setting value, or it may be determined according to other elements other than the game setting value (for example, ball output performance such as a base other than the game setting value), or it may be determined by lottery. In addition, when a specific condition is satisfied, not only one region among the regions A to G, but two or more regions may be made transparent. In addition, it is not necessary to make all of the regions A to G transparent while the light-transmitting monitor 39A is changed from the light-shielding state to the transparent state, and it is also possible to make some regions transparent in order. In this case, the order in which the some regions are made transparent may also be determined appropriately according to the game setting value, etc., as in the case described above. In addition, the plurality of regions may be each of the segments A to G in the special main display section 37a.
The transparent area may be set not only to the areas A to G corresponding to the segments A to G, but also to the front side of the area other than the segments A to G. In this case, the number of stages required to grasp the game setting value can be increased, and it is fun to see which of the areas A to G or the other areas will be made transparent when a specific condition is satisfied.

In addition, in this embodiment, the light-transmitting monitor 39A is changed stepwise from the light-blocking state to the transparent state, but it may be changed from the light-blocking state to the transparent state in one go.

Also in this embodiment, the ball-out performance based on at least one winning slot, such as the number of unit jackpot draws, base, consecutive feature ratio, feature ratio, etc., may be clearly indicated by the display color of the numerical values corresponding to the game setting values on the special main display unit 37a, the blinking pattern of the numerical values, etc.

[Seventh embodiment]
In the above-mentioned fifth embodiment, the game setting value is displayed on the special main display section 37a,
A case has been described in which the game setting values are made invisible or difficult to view when the retention box 39 arranged on the front side of the special main display unit 37a is at the upper limit position, and the retention box 39 is gradually lowered from the upper limit position to the lower limit position, thereby making some or all of the game setting values visible. Also, in the above-mentioned fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the retention box 39 returns to the upper limit position after a predetermined time has elapsed since the downward movement of the retention box 39 started.

On the other hand, this embodiment differs from the aforementioned fifth embodiment in that when the operation check of the retention box is performed after the main power is turned on and when the retention box is driven during a jackpot game, it is determined whether or not a drive abnormality has occurred in the retention box located in front of the special main display unit, and if a drive abnormality has occurred, abnormality processing is executed.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 88 to 96, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment described above.

FIG. 88 is an enlarged front view of the main part of the gaming machine according to this embodiment, and FIG.
90 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X5-X5 of FIG. 8 when the forced ejection member is in the operating position.
FIG. 91 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 9, showing a cross-sectional view of an area including a retention box and a special main display section in a gaming machine.

As shown in Figures 88 to 91, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment has the same basic configuration as the fifth embodiment described above, but the gaming ball 99 (special out ball) that enters the special out ball port 363 of the crane device 36 and is discharged from the special out ball passage 364 can be discharged to the back side of the gaming board 31 without being retained in the retention box 39.
In a situation where it is undesirable for game balls 99 to be retained in retention box 39, for example, in a situation where there is a possibility that retention box 39 will not be lowered to lowering level 4 due to a failure of motor 39a for driving retention box 39 or a failure of a drive mechanism that transmits the drive force of motor 39a to retention box 39, it is possible to prevent game balls 99 from being retained in retention box 39. This makes it possible to prevent game balls 99 from overflowing from retention box 39 or game balls 99 from being retained in special out ball passage 364.

The gaming machine 10 includes a forced discharge member 319B, an upper limit position detection sensor 40A, a lower limit position detection sensor 40B, and a translucent monitor 39A. A notch 319A is provided on the rear side of the lower end of the special out ball passage 364 of the Kluen device 36, and a forced discharge port 319C is provided above the special main display section 37a on the gaming board 31. The notch 319A and the forced discharge port 319C define a space for discharging the special out ball passage 364 of the Kluen device 36 to the gaming board 31. A discharge path 319D is provided on the rear side of the gaming board 31 to guide the gaming ball 99 that has passed through the forced discharge port 319C to a position where it can be detected by the out ball sensor 35.

The forced discharge member 319B can move in the front-rear direction D1 between a standby position (see FIG. 89) and an operating position (see FIG. 90) by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid. As shown in FIG. 89, in the standby position, the forced discharge member 319B is not present between the special out ball passage 364 and the retention box 39, and the game ball 99 (special out ball) that enters the special out ball port 363 of the crane device 36 and is discharged from the special out ball passage 364 can enter the retention box 39. Normally, the forced discharge member 319B is in the standby position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 89, in the operating position, the forced discharge member 319B is present between the special out ball passage 364 and the retention box 39, and the game ball 99 (special out ball) that is discharged from the special out ball passage 364 can be discharged to the back side of the game board 31, and the special out ball is restricted from entering the retention box 39. The forced discharge member 319B is moved to the operating position when there is a drive abnormality in the retention box 39. The game ball 99 restricted from entering the retention box 39 by the forced discharge member 319B is discharged to the game board 31 through the notch 319A and the forced discharge port 319C.
The image will be forcibly ejected to the rear side of the device.

The forcing discharge member 319B is not limited to a configuration that allows it to move in the front-rear direction D1, and other configurations may be adopted. For example, the forcing discharge member 319B may be configured to be movable between a closed position that closes the forcing discharge port 319C and a closed position that opens the forcing discharge port 319C, and may be configured to be present between the special out ball passage 364 and the retention box 39 when the forcing discharge member 319B is in the open position.

The upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B are used to detect the position of the retention box 39. The upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B are optical sensors such as a reflective sensor or an illuminance sensor, and are connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5. Therefore, the outputs of the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B can be monitored by the MPU 51. The upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B may be connected to the input/output I/F 42 of the main control device 4. In this case, a command corresponding to the outputs from the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B is sent from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5.
By transmitting the signal to the voice lamp control device 5, the position of the retention box 39 is grasped.

As shown in Figures 91(A) to 91(C), the upper limit position detection sensor 40A is provided above the special main display section 37a, and can detect the presence of the retention box 39 when the retention box 39 is at downward movement level 0, but cannot detect the presence of the retention box 39 when the retention box 39 is at downward movement level 1 to 4. On the other hand, the lower limit position detection sensor 40B is provided below the discharge outlet 319, and can detect the presence of the retention box 39 when the retention box 39 is at downward movement level 4, but cannot detect the presence of the retention box 39 when the retention box 39 is at downward movement level 0 to 3. Specifically, as shown in Figure 92(A), the upper limit position detection sensor 40A:
When the lower limit position detection sensor 40B is operating normally, it outputs a high level signal (H) when the lower movement level is 0, and outputs a low level signal (L) when the lower movement level is 1 to 4. Also, when the lower limit position detection sensor 40B is operating normally, it outputs a high level signal (H) when the lower movement level is 4.
) while outputting a low level signal (L) when the lower movement level is 0 to 3. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 92(B), the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40
When B is operating normally, the combination of output levels of the signals output from these detection sensors 40A, 40B is HL at downward movement level 0, LL at downward movement levels 1 to 3, and LH at downward movement level 4.

As shown in Figs. 88 to 91, the translucent monitor 39A is disposed on the front side of the special main display section 37a and controls the visibility of the numbers corresponding to the game setting values displayed on the special main display section 37a. The translucent monitor 39A is similar to the translucent monitor 39A of the sixth embodiment described above, and is controlled by the MPU 51 to change the visible light transmittance. This controls the visibility of the special main display section 37a between a state in which the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is high and the display contents are visible, and a state in which the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is low and the display contents are not visible or difficult to see. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 92(C), the translucent monitor 39A controls the visibility of the special main display section 37a between a state in which the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is high and the display contents are visible, and a state in which the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is low and the display contents are not visible or difficult to see.
The display content on the special main display section 37a is in a normal state where it can be seen, and if a drive abnormality occurs in the retention box 39, the display content on the special main display section 37a is in a restricted visibility state where it is difficult or impossible to see.

Here, the case where the retention box 39 is not driven normally means that the downward movement level grasped by the value of the downward movement level counter and the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B are not properly driven.
This means that there is a difference between the downward movement level grasped by the motor 39a and the downward movement level grasped by the sensor 40B. For example, when the retention box 39 is not moved up and down due to a malfunction of the motor 39a or the drive mechanism, or when the retention box 39 is moved up and down but the value of the downward movement level counter and the detection sensors 40A, 40B are different, this corresponds to a case where the retention box 39 is not driven normally. In this embodiment, as described below, the operation check of the retention box is performed by the voice lamp control device 5 during the start-up process and the jackpot game, which are performed when the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. In addition, the operation check of the retention box 39 may be performed at a timing where the player does not feel uncomfortable even if the retention box 39 is moved, such as when a demo performance is performed in the pattern display unit 341 or the like after a certain time has elapsed since the shooting of the game ball 99 in the gaming machine 10 has been stopped, or when an RTC (real-time clock) performance is performed in the pattern display diagram 341 or the like at a predetermined time.

It is also possible to make the numbers corresponding to the game setting values displayed on the special main display section 37a invisible or difficult to see by using other means instead of the translucent monitor 39A. For example,
The special main display section 37a may be hidden by a movable member other than the retention box 39.
The special main display section 37a is configured to be movable, and the special main display section 37a is arranged to be in the retention box 3.
9, etc., to make the special main display section 37a invisible or difficult to see. It is also possible to make it impossible to know the game setting value by turning off the power to the special main display section 37a. In addition, instead of the translucent monitor 39A, it is also possible to make the special main display section 37a invisible or difficult to see by using optical effects. For example, an optical member such as a light guide member or a diffusion member may be disposed on the front side of the special main display section 37a, and light from a light source may be introduced into this optical member, thereby making it possible to make the special main display section 37a invisible or difficult to see.
Conversely, it is also possible to make the special main display portion 37a visible by turning on the light source and illuminating the optical member with light from the light source, while making the special main display portion 37a invisible or difficult to view by turning off the light source.

[Processing of voice and lamp control device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the voice lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to Figures 93 to 96. The processing in the voice lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is basically the same as that in the first embodiment described above, but in this embodiment, a process is executed to check the drive state of the retention box 39. Specifically, for example, a retention box operation check process is executed in a start-up process executed when the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and an operation check is executed to check whether there is any abnormality in the drive state of the retention box 39 when the retention box 39 is moved down in a retention box lowering process and when the retention box 39 is moved up in a retention box return process.

[Stuck Box Operation Check Process]
In the retention box operation check process, on the condition that the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B are operating normally, the retention box 39 is checked to see if it is operating normally using the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B. That is, the retention box operation check process is executed after checking whether the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B are abnormal. The operation check of the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B is performed, for example, by blinking the light source for operation check arranged near the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B, or by moving the movable body, based on the output level of the detection sensors 40A and 40B at that time. Here, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the retention box operation check process executed in the startup process of the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment.

<Steps S4101 to S4105>
As shown in FIG. 93, the MPU 51 moves the retention box 39 to the lowering level 4 (lower limit position) (step S4101), and after a predetermined time has elapsed (step S4102: Yes),
), and return the retention box 39 to the upper limit position (step S4103). Here, the reason why the retention box 39 is returned to the upper limit position after a predetermined time from the lower limit position is that there is a possibility that the game ball 99 remains in the retention box 39 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. That is, for example, when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off during a big win game, there is a possibility that the retention box 39 stops at the lowering level 0 to 3 with the game ball 99 still retained in the retention box 39. Therefore, by returning the retention box 39 to the upper limit position after a predetermined time from the lower limit position, it is possible to achieve a state in which the game ball 99 does not exist inside the retention box 39, and to make the retention box 39 wait at the upper limit position which is the lowering level 0. In addition, the predetermined time for stopping the retention box 39 at the lower limit position which is the lowering level 4 is set to the time required to discharge the game ball 99 retained in the retention box 39, and is, for example, about 2 to 10 seconds.

Then, when the MPU 51 returns the retention box 39 to downward movement level 0 (step S4103), it sets the value of the downward movement level counter to 0 (step S4104), acquires the output levels of the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B, and stores the combination of the output levels of these detection sensors 40A, 40B as corresponding to downward movement level 0 (step S4105).

<Steps S4106 to S4109>
Next, the MPU 51 moves the retention box 39 stepwise from the lowering level 1 to the lowering level 4 (step S4106) until the retention box 39 is lowered to the lowering level 4 (step S4109: Yes), and increments the value of the lowering level counter by 1 each time the retention box 39 is lowered.
(step S4107), and the detection sensors 40A, 4
The combination of output levels 0 and B is stored (step S4108).

<Steps S4110 to S4116>
The MPU 51 judges whether the value of the downward movement level counter is all 0 to 4 and the combination of output levels corresponds to the combination when the retention box 39 is operating normally (see FIG. 92B) (steps S4110 to 4114). If the value of the downward movement level counter is all 0 to 4 and corresponds to the combination of output levels when the retention box 39 is operating normally (Yes in all steps S4110 to 4114), it can be determined that the retention box 39 is operating normally, so the retention box 39 is returned to the upper limit position, which is the downward movement level 0 (step S4115), the value of the downward movement level counter is set to 0 (step S4116), and the retention box operation check process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the down-shift level counter does not correspond to any of the combinations of output levels from 0 to 4 that are normally operating (step S41
If the answer is No in any of steps S4110 to S4114, it can be determined that there is an abnormality in the drive state of the retention box 39, so error processing is executed (step S4117) and the retention box operation check process is terminated. Here, if there is an abnormality in the drive state of the retention box 39, the cause may be, for example, an abnormality in the motor 39a or drive system for moving the retention box 39 up and down. If the motor 39a or drive system is normal, the value of the downward movement level counter and the detection sensors 40A, 4
This may be due to a mismatch with the downward movement level detected at 0 B. Error processing will be described in detail below with reference to FIG.

[Error Handling]
In the error processing, an abnormality process is executed according to an abnormal mode of the driving state of the retention box 39. Here, Fig. 94 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of the error processing executed in the retention box operation check process of Fig. 93.

<Step S4201>
As shown in FIG. 94, the MPU 51 judges whether the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is LH for all values of the downward movement level counter from 0 to 4 (step S4
201). That is, the MPU 51 detects the detection sensor 40A regardless of the value of the lowering level counter.
The MPU 51 judges whether the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A, 40B is always LH or not when the value of the lowering level counter is 0 to 4.
If it is H (step S4201: Yes), it is determined that the combination of outputs from the detection sensors 40A, 40B is always LH regardless of the value of the downward movement level counter, and a drive abnormality has occurred in which the retention box 39 is fixed at the lower limit position, which is downward movement level 4, and does not move, so the process proceeds to first drive abnormality processing in step S4202. On the other hand, if the combination of outputs from the detection sensors 40A, 40B when the downward movement level counter has a value of 0 to 4 is not LH (step S4201: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4203.

<Step S4202>
The MPU 51 detects the detection sensors 40A, 40B when the down movement level counter has a value of 0 to 4.
If the combination of outputs from the two is LH (step S4201: Yes), a first drive abnormality process is executed (step S4202), and the error process is terminated. Here, if a drive abnormality occurs in which the retention box 39 is fixed at the lower limit position, which is the downward movement level 4, and does not move, the display content of the special main display unit 37a is always visible. Therefore, in the first drive abnormality process, the MPU 51 switches the translucent monitor 39A arranged in front of the special main display unit 37a from a normal state in which the display content on the special main display unit 37a is visible to a visibility restricted state in which the display content on the special main display unit 37a is not visible or is difficult to view (FIG. 9
2(C)). As a result, even if the retention box 39 does not move from the lower limit position, which is the lowering level 4, the display contents (game setting values) on the special main display unit 37a are made impossible or difficult to see. Therefore, when the retention box 39 stops moving at the lower limit position, which is the lowering level 4, the display contents on the special main display unit 37a are always visible even if the game ball 99 has not entered the special out ball port 363 of the crane device 36, and it is possible to prevent the game setting values from being recognized by the player.

Furthermore, in the first drive abnormality processing, the MPU 51 may notify that the retention box 39 will not move. In this case, for example, it is conceivable to notify that a drive abnormality has occurred in the retention box 39 by displaying an image indicating that a drive abnormality has occurred in the retention box 39 on the symbol display unit 341 and outputting a sound indicating that a drive abnormality has occurred in the retention box 39 from the speaker 26. This allows the gaming hall to know that a drive abnormality has occurred in the retention box 39.

Also, it is conceivable that the game hall side can select whether to shift the machine to a customer waiting state where the player can play or to disable the player from playing, provided that there is no abnormality in other elements other than the retention box 39. For example, it is conceivable that, in addition to an image indicating that a drive abnormality has occurred in the retention box 39, an image for selecting whether to shift the machine to a customer waiting state or not can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341, and the game hall side can select whether to shift the machine to a customer waiting state or not using the operation button 20 or a cross key (not shown) provided on the upper tray 23 or the like. This makes it possible to leave the decision of whether to allow the player to use the gaming machine 10 to the game hall side, when there is no abnormality other than the drive abnormality of the retention box 39 and there is no problem in executing the game.

When the game hall side selects the customer waiting state, the technology of the sixth embodiment is applied, and the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball port 363 of the crane device 36 (the number of special out balls)
By selecting the visible light transmittance of the light-transmitting monitor 39A according to the
The visibility of the display contents of the special main display section 37a may be changed. For example, a sensor for detecting the game ball 99, such as a proximity sensor, may be provided near the forced discharge port 319C, and the visibility of the special main display section 37a may be changed by changing the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A based on the output of the sensor. In this case, even if the retention box 39 stops moving at the lower limit position, which is the lowering level 4, the gaming machine 10 can be given a gameplay in which the game setting value can be estimated or recognized. Also, in the case where the numbers corresponding to the game setting values displayed on the special main display section 37a are made invisible or difficult to recognize by other means instead of the translucent monitor 39A, the visibility of the special main display section 37a may be changed by the other means.

<Step S4203>
If the combination of outputs from the detection sensors 40A, 40B when the downward movement level counter has a value of 0 to 4 is not LH (step S4201: No), the MPU 51 judges whether the combination of outputs from the detection sensors 40A, 40B when the downward movement level counter has a value of all from 0 to 4 is HL (step S4203). In other words, the MPU 51 judges whether the combination of outputs from the detection sensors 40A, 40B is always HL regardless of the value of the downward movement level counter.
If the output combination of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is HL (step S4203: Yes), the output combination of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is always H regardless of the value of the lowering level counter.
Since it is determined that a drive abnormality has occurred in which the retention box 39 is fixed at the upper limit position, which is the lowering level 0, and does not move, the process proceeds to a second drive abnormality process in step S4204. On the other hand, if the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B when the lowering level counter value is any of 0 to 4 is not HL (step S4203: No),
Then, processing proceeds to step S4205.

<Step S4204>
When the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is HL when the value of the downward movement level counter is all 0 to 4 (step S4203: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the second drive abnormality process (step S4204) and ends the error process. Here, if a drive abnormality occurs in which the retention box 39 is fixed at the upper limit position, which is the downward movement level 0, and does not move, the game ball 99 in the retention box 39 cannot be discharged when the game ball 99 is introduced into the retention box 39. Therefore, in the second drive abnormality process, the MPU 51 moves the forced discharge member 319B from the standby position (see FIG. 89) to the operating position (see FIG. 90). As a result, the forced discharge member 319B is present between the special out ball passage 364 and the retention box 39. Therefore, the game ball 99 (special out ball) that enters the special out ball port 363 of the Kluen device 36 and is discharged from the discharge path 319D during a big win game is forced to be discharged by the forced discharge member 319B.
The balls 99 restricted from entering the retention box 39 by the forced discharge member 319B are forced to be discharged to the rear side of the game board 31 via the forced discharge member 319B, the forced discharge port 319C, and the discharge path 319D. As a result, the game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 363 are prevented from entering the retention box 39. This prevents the retention box 39 from receiving more game balls 99 than its capacity, prevents the game balls 99 from overflowing from the retention box 39, and prevents ball clogging in the special out ball passage 364 of the crane device 36. Therefore, even if a drive abnormality occurs in which the retention box 39 is fixed at the upper limit position, which is the lowering level 0, and does not move, it is possible to play the game as usual in the gaming machine 10.

In the second drive abnormality process, similar to the first drive process, a notification may be given that the retention box 39 is not moving. In this case, similar to the first drive process,
The game hall may be allowed to choose whether to transition to a customer waiting state.

<Step S4205>
When the value of the lowering level counter is any of 0 to 4 and the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is neither LH nor HL (No in both steps S4201 and S4203)
Then, the MPU 51 judges whether the combination of outputs from the detection sensors 40A, 40B at all of the downward movement levels 0 to 4 is LL (step S4205). That is, the MPU 51 judges whether the combination of outputs from the detection sensors 40A, 40B is always LL regardless of the downward movement levels 0 to 4. If the combination of outputs from the detection sensors 40A, 40B at all of the downward movement levels 0 to 4 is LL (step S4205: Yes), the MPU 51 determines that the combination of outputs from the detection sensors 40A, 40B is always LL regardless of the downward movement levels 0 to 4, and that the retention box 39
Since it is determined that a drive abnormality has occurred in which the detection sensor 40A is fixed at a position corresponding to any one of downward movement levels 1 to 3 and does not move, the process proceeds to a third drive abnormality process in step S4206. On the other hand, if the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A, 40B is not LL at any one of downward movement levels 0 to 4 (step S4205: No), the MPU 51 determines that a link abnormality has occurred in which the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter is different from the downward movement level based on the detection sensors 40A, 40B, and proceeds to a link abnormality process in step S4207.

<Step S4206>
If the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A, 40B when the value of the downward movement level counter is any one of 0 to 4 is LL (step S4205: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a third drive abnormality process (step S4206) and ends the error process. Here, if a drive abnormality occurs in which the retention box 39 is fixed at a position corresponding to any one of the downward movement levels 1 to 3 and does not move, a part of the display content of the special main display unit 37a is always visible, and when a game ball 99 is introduced into the retention box 39,
Therefore, in the third drive abnormality processing, the MPU 51
In addition to the first drive abnormality process, the MPU 51 executes the second drive abnormality process. Specifically, the MPU 51 switches the light-transmitting monitor 39A disposed in front of the special main display unit 37a from a normal state in which the display contents on the special main display unit 37a are visible to a visibility restricted state in which the display contents on the special main display unit 37a are invisible or difficult to view (see FIG. 9 ).
2(C)), and the forcing ejection member 319B is moved from the standby position (see FIG. 89) to the operating position (see FIG. 90).
As a result, even if the retention box 39 does not move to any of the lowering levels 1 to 3, the display contents (game setting values) on the special main display section 37a are made impossible or difficult to see. Also, in a big win game, the game ball 99 (special out ball) that enters the special out ball port 363 of the crane device 36 and is discharged from the discharge path 319D is moved to the game board 3
The game balls are forcibly discharged to the rear side of the retaining box 39, thereby preventing the game balls from being retained in the retaining box 39.

<Step S4207>
When the value of the lowering level counter is any of 0 to 4 and the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is neither LH nor HL nor LL (steps S4201, S4203 and S4204),
205), the MPU 51 executes link abnormality processing (step S4207).
Then, the error process is terminated. Here, the down movement level based on the value of the down movement level counter and
When a link abnormality occurs that is different from the downward movement level based on the detection sensors 40A and 40B (except when the retention box 39 does not move), the retention box 39 cannot be operated normally.
For example, when the output level combination from the detection sensors 40A and 40B is HL, the retention box 39 is moved to a lower level position based on the detection result at the detection sensor 40B.
9 to the upper limit position of the downward movement level 0. In addition, when the process of matching the link between the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter and the downward movement level based on the detection result of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is executed, it is preferable to execute the retention box operation check process again to check whether the link is matched. Then, if it is determined that the link is not matched even by the retention box operation check process again, since there is a possibility that the retention box 39 cannot be moved to the position of some of the downward movement levels, it may be possible to notify that the link abnormality is not resolved. In this case, the game hall may also be allowed to select whether to transition to a customer waiting state. In addition, if the link abnormality is not resolved, a third drive abnormality process may be executed.

Incidentally, when the visibility of the special main display section 37a is changed by the up and down movement of the retention box 39, it is assumed that a drive abnormality of the retention box 39 will occur due to, for example, an abnormality in the motor 39a or drive system connected to the retention box 39. In this case, if the movement of the retention box 39 is stopped at downward movement level 0, the game balls inside the retention box 39 cannot be discharged. If the movement of the retention box 39 is stopped at downward movement level 4, the entire special main display section 37a remains visible, allowing the game setting value to be ascertained. If the movement of the retention box 39 is stopped at downward movement levels 1 to 3, the special main display section 37a
Not only does a portion of a remain visible, but the game balls inside the retention box 39 cannot be discharged.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, an operation check process is executed to check whether or not a drive abnormality has occurred in the retention box 39. If a drive abnormality has occurred in the retention box 39, abnormality processing is executed according to the position (downward movement level) at which the drive of the retention box 39 has stopped. Specifically, when the movement of the retention box 39 has stopped at the downward movement level 0, the forced discharge member 319B is operated to forcibly discharge the special out ball to the back side of the gaming board 31, thereby preventing the game balls 9 from being discharged into the retention box 39.
In addition, when the movement of the retention box 39 is stopped at the lowering level 4, the visible light transmittance of the light-transmitting monitor 39A is lowered to prevent the special main display unit 37 from entering.
a is made invisible or difficult to see. When the movement of the retention box 39 is stopped at the lowering levels 1 to 3, the forced ejection member 319B is operated and the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is lowered. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a malfunction in which the game balls inside the retention box 39 cannot be ejected, and also to prevent all or part of the special main display section 37a from remaining visible. As a result, even if a drive abnormality occurs in the retention box 39, it becomes possible to execute a game on the gaming machine 10.

[Stuck box lowering process]
In the retention box lowering process of this embodiment, as in the above-mentioned fifth embodiment, a process is executed in which the retention box 39 is lowered to a position corresponding to a lowering level (see FIG. 74(C)) according to the number of game balls retained in the retention box 39.
Before the lowering of the lowering level counter, the lowering level is detected based on the value of the lowering level counter.
40B, and if there is no consistency, a third drive abnormality process is executed. Here, Fig. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the retention box lowering process executed in the command determination process of Fig. 76.

<Steps S4301 to S4304>
95, in the retention box lowering process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first obtains the combination of the output levels of the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B (step S4301). If the value of the lowering level counter is 0 (step S3501: Yes) and the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A, 40B is not HL (step S4302: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the third drive abnormality process executed in the error process described above (step S4303). Also, if the value of the lowering level counter is not 4 (step S3504: No), i.e., if the value of the lowering level counter is 1 to 3, the MPU 51 executes the third drive abnormality process executed in the error process described above (step S4304: No).
If it is not L (step S4304: Yes), the third drive abnormality process is executed (step S4303). That is, when the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter and the downward movement level based on the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B are not consistent, the MPU 51 executes the third drive abnormality process. That is, it is not possible to determine whether the reason for the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter and the downward movement level based on the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B not being consistent is that the retention box does not move or is simply not consistent, and also, when the retention box 39 does not move, it is not possible to determine at which downward movement level the retention box 39 is stopped, so the third drive abnormality process is executed so as to be able to respond to any drive abnormality.

In addition, the determination as to whether the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter and the downward movement level based on the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B are consistent is performed by the retention box 3.
The above-mentioned step may be performed not only before the retention box 39 is moved downward, but also after the retention box 39 is moved downward, or may be performed both before and after the retention box 39 is moved downward.

[Stuck box recovery process]
In the retention box return process of this embodiment, the retention box 39 is in the lower limit position (lowering level 4
After a certain time has elapsed since the retention box 39 was lowered to the upper limit position (lowering level 0), a process is executed to return the retention box 39 to the upper limit position (lowering level 0). In this embodiment, the lowering level based on the value of the lowering level counter before and after the retention box 39 is returned is calculated based on the detection sensors 40A and 40B.
The consistency with the downward movement level based on B is confirmed, and if the consistency is not achieved, a third drive abnormality process is executed. Here, Fig. 96 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the retention box return process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of Fig. 75.

<Steps S4401 to S4404>
As shown in FIG. 96, in the retention box recovery process of the present embodiment, when it is time to recover the retention box 39 (Yes in steps S3601 and S3603), the MPU 51
The MPU 51 obtains the combination of the output levels of the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B (step S4401). Then, the MPU 51 judges whether the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is LH (step S4402).
Immediately before returning the retention box 39 from the lowering level 4 to the lowering level 0, the MPU 51
The MPU 51 determines whether the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter is consistent with the downward movement level based on the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B.
It is determined whether the combination of output levels 0A and 40B is HL (step S44
03). Then, when the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter is not consistent with the downward movement level based on the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B at the timing to return the retention box 39 or immediately after returning the retention box 39 (No in step S4402 or S4403), the MPU 51 executes a third drive abnormality process (step S4304).

In addition, the determination as to whether the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter and the downward movement level based on the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B are consistent is performed by the retention box 3.
The adjustment is not limited to being performed both before and after the retention box 39 is returned (moved upward), but may be performed only before or after the retention box 39 is returned.

As described above, when the visibility of the special main display section 37a is changed by the vertical movement of the retention box 39, it is assumed that a drive abnormality of the retention box 39 occurs due to an abnormality in the motor 39a or drive system connected to the retention box 39. In this embodiment, the retention box 39 is checked by an operation check executed after the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned on.
It is determined whether there is a drive abnormality in retention box 39. Even if it is determined that there is no drive abnormality in this operation check, it is assumed that a drive abnormality will occur in retention box 39 during play.

In contrast, in the embodiment, when the retention box 39 is moved down during play and when the retention box 39 is returned (moved up), it is determined whether there is a drive abnormality in the retention box 39, and if there is a drive abnormality, a drive abnormality process is executed. This allows the game to continue even if a drive abnormality occurs in the retention box 39 during play. In particular, since the retention box 39 is moved up and down during a jackpot game, it is very significant that the game can be continued when a drive abnormality occurs in the retention box 39.

In this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the fifth embodiment described above can be made within an applicable range.

Summary of the Invention
Below, an outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments will be added. Note that, for the sake of convenience, symbols may be added to the description in order to facilitate understanding of the correspondence between each of the additions and each of the embodiments, but the invention related to the additions is not limited to the specific configurations to which the symbols are added. In addition, it is possible to select and combine the respective configurations and processing functions described below in any desired manner.

[Appendix A1]
A storage means (412) for storing performance information (such as a game setting value, a unit number of lottery draws for a big win, a base, a consecutive role ratio, and a role ratio) that is an index showing ball output performance;
A performance information display means (3) for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means (412).
7a) and
A performance information display control means (37a) for causing the performance information display means (37b) to display the performance information
41) and
a visibility limiting means (39, 39A) for making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to view;
a visibility state control means (51) for controlling the visibility restriction means (39, 39A) when a specific condition is satisfied, and making at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) visible;
A gaming machine comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appended note A1, at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is made visible when a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, when a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible, the player can enjoy guessing the ball-out performance of the gaming machine during play based on the visible part. Also, when all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible, the ball-out performance of the gaming machine during play can be grasped. Therefore, being able to guess or grasp the ball-out performance of the gaming machine during play improves the gameplay and motivates the player to continue playing.

[Appendix A2]
a transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
a probability setting means (41) for setting a probability of determining that a transition to the special game state is to be made in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from among a plurality of different probability of determining an advantage;
Further equipped with
The gaming machine described in Appendix A1, characterized in that the performance information includes information (game setting value) regarding the advantageous judgment probability set by the advantageous judgment probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appended note A2, the performance information includes information on the probability of a favorable judgment, which has a large effect on the ball-out performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, by evaluating the ball-out performance based on the information on the probability of a favorable judgment, it becomes possible to suggest the ball-out performance based on an index that more appropriately reflects the ball-out performance of the gaming machine. In addition, by displaying a part or all of the information on the probability of a favorable judgment on the performance information display means, the player can enjoy guessing the probability of a favorable judgment, and when the probability of a favorable judgment is grasped, the player is given an opportunity to decide whether to continue playing with the gaming machine based on the probability of a favorable judgment.

[Appendix A3]
The machine further includes a plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) for dispensing a certain number of game balls according to the type of the winning hole based on the entry of the game balls,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A1 or Appendix A2, characterized in that the performance information includes information indicating ball-out performance based on at least one of the multiple winning ports (313 to 316).

The gaming machine according to appended note A3 includes performance information indicating ball-out performance based on at least one of the multiple winning ports. Therefore, by displaying a part or all of the performance information indicating the ball-out performance based on the winning port on the performance information display means, the player can guess or recognize the ball-out performance that reflects the variation in winning performance for the winning port between gaming machines due to, for example, individual differences at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine or changes over time. This allows the player to enjoy guessing the ball-out performance based on the winning port, and when the ball-out performance based on the winning port can be grasped, the player is given an opportunity to decide whether to continue playing with the gaming machine in question based on the performance information.

[Appendix A4]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) are determined by the transition determination means (4) when a game ball enters the winning hole.
A first winning port (314) that provides an opportunity to make the transition determination according to 1),
The game machine further includes a unit judgment number calculation means (41) for calculating the number of unit judgments for which the transition judgment means (41) has performed the transition judgment in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) until the difference in the number of balls reaches a predetermined number of balls or until the number of game balls shot to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A3, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the unit judgment count calculated by the unit judgment count calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A4, the performance information includes performance information on the number of unit judgments. Here, the number of unit judgments is the number of times that a transition judgment is made triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning slot until the difference in the number of balls reaches a minus of a predetermined number of balls or the number of launched gaming balls reaches a specific number of balls. In other words, the number of unit judgments is an index showing the ease of a transition judgment in a normal gaming state (a state in which the game is in a low probability mode and not in a time-saving mode). Therefore, since a part or all of the information on the number of unit judgments is displayed, a player can guess or recognize the information on the number of unit judgments, and thus it becomes possible to know the ease of a transition judgment. This allows a player to enjoy guessing the number of unit judgments, and when the number of unit judgments can be grasped, the player is given an opportunity to decide whether to continue playing on the gaming machine being played based on the number of unit judgments.

[Appendix A5]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) which causes a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry of a game ball and triggers the transition determination means (41) to make the transition determination based on the entry of a game ball, and a general winning opening (313) which causes a specific number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry of a game ball and has a function different from that of the first winning opening,
The game machine further includes a ball payout rate calculation means (41) for calculating a ball payout rate (base) which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls, which is the number of payout balls for game balls entering the first winning opening (314) and the number of payout balls for game balls entering the general winning opening (313), to the number of game balls shot to the game board (31);
The gaming machine described in Appendix A3, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the ball payout rate calculated by the ball payout rate calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A5, the performance information includes information on the payout rate. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of paid-out balls from the first winning port and the general winning port to the number of shot balls. In other words, the payout rate is an index showing the ease of winning at the first winning port and the general winning port. Therefore, since the performance information displays part or all of the information on the payout rate, the player can guess or recognize the payout rate, and can know the ease of winning at the first winning port and the general winning port. This allows the player to enjoy guessing the payout rate, and if the payout rate can be grasped, the player is given the opportunity to decide whether to continue playing with the gaming machine he is playing based on the payout rate.

[Appendix A6]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) into which a game ball can enter in the special game state,
The game machine further includes a continuous feature ratio calculation means (41) for calculating a continuous feature ratio, which is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the number of game balls entering the variable winning port (316) to the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls to the number of game balls entering the multiple winning ports (313 to 316),
The gaming machine described in Appendix A3, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the consecutive feature ratio calculated by the consecutive feature ratio calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A6, the performance information includes information on the continuous feature ratio. Here, the continuous feature ratio is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the number of game balls entering a variable winning port to the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls to the number of game balls entering a plurality of winning ports. In other words, the continuous feature ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment causes a transition to a special game (stay ratio in the special game state) and the ease of winning a prize at a variable winning port (payout rate in the special game state).
It is an index showing the ratio of consecutive features. Therefore, by displaying a part or all of the information on the ratio of consecutive features, the player can guess or recognize the ratio of consecutive features, and can know the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment will transition to a special game (the ratio of staying in the special game state) and the ease of winning at the variable winning port. This allows the player to enjoy guessing the ratio of consecutive features, and when the ratio of consecutive features is grasped, the player is given the opportunity to decide whether to continue playing on the gaming machine in question based on the ratio of consecutive features.

[Appendix A7]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) are determined by the transition determination means (4) when a game ball enters the winning hole.
the first winning hole (314) which triggers the transition determination by the transition determination means (41), a second winning hole (315) into which a game ball can enter with the support of an electric device, and which triggers the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) when the game ball enters the second winning hole (315), and a variable winning hole (316) into which a game ball can enter in the special game state,
a role ratio calculation means (41) for calculating a role ratio which is the ratio of the total number of paid-out balls, which is the total number of paid-out balls for game balls entering the variable winning port (316) and the total number of paid-out balls for game balls entering the second winning port (315), to the total number of paid-out balls, which is the total number of paid-out balls for game balls entering the multiple winning ports (313 to 316);
Further equipped with
The gaming machine described in Appendix A3, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the role ratio calculated by the role ratio calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A7, the performance information includes information on the ratio of game balls. Here, the ratio of game balls is the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the variable winning port and the second winning port to the total number of paid-out balls, which is the sum of the number of paid-out balls to the multiple winning ports. In other words, the ratio of game balls is the frequency with which the result of the transition judgment will transition to a special game (
The indicators indicate the ratio of stay in the special game state, the ratio of stay in the support game state (time-saving game state) supported by the electric role, and the ease of winning in the variable winning port and the second winning port (the ball payout rate in the special game state). Therefore, since the player can guess or recognize the role ratio by displaying a part or all of the information on the role ratio, it becomes possible to know the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment is to transition to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), the ratio of stay in the support game state (time-saving game state) supported by the electric role, and the ease of winning in the variable winning port and the second winning port (the ball payout rate in the special game state). This allows the player to enjoy guessing the role ratio, and if the role ratio can be grasped, the player is given the opportunity to decide whether to continue playing with the gaming machine being played based on the role ratio.

[Appendix A8]
The visibility limiting means (39) is a first position (upper limit position) at which the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not visible or is difficult to view, and a second position (upper limit position) at which the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not visible or is difficult to view.
) is movable between a second position (lower limit position) at which the entire performance information displayed on the display unit can be viewed,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices A1 to A7, characterized in that the visibility state control means (51) moves the visibility restriction means (39) in a predetermined direction (downward) from the first position toward the second position when the specific condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A8, a state in which part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible can be realized by the simple method of moving the visibility restriction means in a predetermined direction.

[Appendix A9]
The visibility limiting means (39) is moved from the first position to the second position when the specific condition is satisfied multiple times,
The visibility state control means (51) controls the visibility limiting means (39) to be moved from the first position to the second position each time the specific condition is satisfied.
39) in the predetermined direction in a stepwise manner.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A9, the visibility limiting means is moved stepwise in a predetermined direction each time a specific condition is satisfied, so that the visible area of the performance information displayed on the performance information displaying means is gradually enlarged. As a result, the performance information displayed on the performance information displaying means becomes gradually clear, so that the player can enjoy guessing the performance information until the performance information becomes comprehensible.
This can increase motivation to continue playing until performance information is understood, and increases interest in the game.

[Appendix A10]
The visibility state control means (51) controls the visibility limiting means (39) to at least one intermediate position set between the first position and the second position when the specific condition is satisfied.
) can be stopped,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A9 is characterized in that the intermediate position is set at a position (e.g., an intermediate position of downward movement level 1) where a portion of the performance information is visible and where it is impossible or difficult to distinguish between two or more contents (e.g., game setting values 2, 3, 5 and 6) among a plurality of contents (e.g., game setting values 1 to 6) that are set as the same type of performance information (e.g., game setting values).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A10, when a certain condition is satisfied and the visibility limiting means is moved in a predetermined direction, a part of the performance information becomes visible, but it is impossible or difficult to distinguish between two or more contents. Therefore, it becomes possible to narrow down the multiple contents to a smaller number and make an inference until the content of the performance information becomes recognizable by satisfying a certain condition.
As a player encounters certain conditions being satisfied multiple times, the player is able to guess performance information in stages and gradually improve the accuracy of the guess, allowing the player to enjoy the process of guessing such performance information.

[Appendix A11]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A8, characterized in that the visibility state control means (51) moves the visibility restriction means (39) from the first position to the second position when the specific condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine according to appended note A11, when a specific condition is satisfied, the visibility limiting means moves from a first position where the performance information is not visible or difficult to be visible to a second position where the performance information is entirely visible. Therefore, a game feature is provided in which the performance information is immediately visible when a specific condition is satisfied, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix A12]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices A8 to A11, characterized in that the visibility state control means (51) moves the visibility restriction means (39) to the first position after a predetermined time has elapsed since the visibility restriction means (39) started to move from the first position.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A12, the visibility limiting means returns to the first position where the performance information is not visible or difficult to see after a predetermined time has elapsed since the movement is started from the first position. This makes it possible to prevent the visibility limiting means from being present for a long time in a position where part or all of the performance information is visible, and therefore to prevent the performance information from being left for a long time in a state where it can be guessed or understood. This makes it possible to prevent players who are not playing from guessing or understanding the performance information.

[Appendix A13]
A game board (31) in which a game area into which game balls flow down is set;
A plurality of winning holes (3) are provided in the game area, and winning balls are paid out when a game ball enters the winning hole (3).
13-316) and
an outlet (318) for discharging game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) to the rear side of the game board;
A special outlet (313 to 316) is provided above the game area relative to at least one of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) and is used to discharge game balls to the rear side of the game board.
63) and
Further equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1 to Appendix A12, wherein the specific condition is that a gaming ball enters the special outlet (363).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A13, when a gaming ball enters the special outlet, the visibility limiting means is moved in a predetermined direction, and the visible area of the performance information is expanded. Therefore, the interest of the game is increased because the player can enjoy the game not only by the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means but also by paying attention to whether the gaming ball enters the special outlet.

[Appendix A14]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A13, characterized in that the visibility restriction means (39) is capable of storing a gaming ball that has entered the special discharge port (363) and is capable of discharging the stored gaming ball when moved to the second position by the visibility state control means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A14, the gaming balls in the visual restriction means are discharged when the visual restriction means is moved to the second position. This makes it possible to prevent the gaming balls in the visual restriction means from spilling out.

[Appendix A15]
The at least one winning hole (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) into which a game ball can enter in the special game,
A normal ball entry port (316) that guides the game ball that entered the variable winning port (316) to a position where the game ball can enter.
A distribution device (387) that distributes game balls to either the special outlet (363) or the special outlet (364).
6). The gaming machine according to claim A13 or A14, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A15, in a special game in which game balls can enter a variable winning hole, a ball sorting device sorts game balls into a normal ball entry hole and a special ball exit hole. That is, in at least the special game, game balls can enter a special ball exit hole that changes the visual state of the performance information. Therefore, an opportunity to guess or understand the performance information is given in the special game, and the fun of guessing or understanding the performance information can be added to the special game, which tends to proceed inorganically.

[Appendix A16]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) are determined by the transition determination means (4) when a game ball enters the winning hole.
A first winning port (314) that provides an opportunity to make the transition determination according to 1),
The first winning hole (314) is capable of receiving a game ball shot into the left side area of the game board (31);
The variable winning hole (316) is capable of receiving a game ball shot into the right area of the game board (31);
The distribution device (36) distributes the game balls shot into the right area to the normal ball entrance (387
) and the special outlet (363).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A16, since the gaming balls launched into the left area of the gaming board can enter the first winning hole, it is necessary to perform a so-called left shot in order to receive a transition judgment to the special game. On the other hand, since the gaming balls launched into the right area of the gaming board can enter the variable winning hole, it is necessary to perform a so-called right shot in the special game. And, a distribution device having a special discharge port in which the visual state of the performance information can be expected to change due to the entry of the gaming ball can distribute the gaming balls launched into the right area of the gaming board to the special discharge port. Therefore, the visual state of the performance information does not change in the game for receiving the transition judgment to the special game, but the visual state of the performance information can change in the special game. In this way, since the visual state of the performance information can change when hitting the right side of the special game, etc., it is possible to motivate a player who is interested in guessing or understanding the performance information to continue playing until the result of the transition judgment is to transition to the special game.

[Appendix A17]
A gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A13 to Appendix A16, characterized in that the special outlet (363) is more difficult to insert a ball into than the normal ball inlet (387).

[Appendix A18]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A17, wherein the special outlet (363) is located above the normal ball inlet (387).

[Appendix A19]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A17 or Appendix A18, wherein the special outlet (363) has an opening area smaller than that of the normal ball inlet (387).

[Appendix A20]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendices A17 to A19, characterized in that the distribution device (36) has an obstruction means (365) for obstructing the entry of gaming balls into the special discharge port (363).

[Appendix A21]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A20, wherein the obstruction means (365) is a wall portion surrounding the special discharge port (363).

In the gaming machines according to appendix A17 to appendix A21, since it is difficult for a gaming ball to enter the special outlet compared to the normal ball inlet, it is not easy to grasp the performance information. Therefore, when the ball output performance is low, for example, when the probability of an advantageous judgment is low, the player can easily grasp that the probability of an advantageous judgment is low, and it is possible to suppress early discontinuation of play on the gaming machine 10.

[Appendix A22]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices A1 to A7, characterized in that the visibility restriction means (39A) changes the visibility state of the performance information in the performance information display means (37a) by control by the visibility state control means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A22, the visibility limiting means is controlled by the visibility state control means to change the visibility state of the performance information display means. Therefore, by the simple method of changing the visibility state of the performance information, a state in which part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible can be realized.

[Appendix A23]
The gaming machine according to appendix A22, wherein the visibility limiting means (39A) is a light-transmitting display device whose light-blocking property can be changed by control of the visibility state control means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A23, the visibility of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is changed by changing the light-blocking property of the light-transmitting display device. For example, the visibility of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is improved by reducing the light-blocking property of a part or the whole of the light-transmitting display device. Therefore, by the simple method of changing the light-blocking property of the light-transmitting display device,
It is possible to realize a state in which part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible.

[Appendix A24]
The visual recognition state control means (51)
When the specific condition is satisfied multiple times, a visibility state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is changed from a first state (visibility level 0) in which the performance information is not visible or is difficult to view, to a second state (visibility level 4) in which the entire performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is visible;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A23, characterized in that the visibility limiting means (39) gradually expands the visible area in the translucent display device (39A) each time the specific condition is satisfied while the visibility limiting means (39) is being changed from the first state to the second state.

In the gaming machine according to appended note A24, the transparent area in the translucent display device is expanded step by step each time a specific condition is satisfied, so that the visible area of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is gradually expanded. As a result, the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is gradually revealed, so that the player can enjoy guessing the performance information in the process. This can increase the player's motivation to continue playing until the performance information can be confirmed, and increase the interest of the game.

[Appendix A25]
The light-transmitting display device (39A) has a plurality of regions that make parts of the performance information visible in a predetermined order;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A24, characterized in that the visibility state control means (51) makes a portion of the performance information visible in one or more of the multiple areas each time the specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix A26]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A25, wherein the multiple regions are discretely arranged in the translucent display device (39A).

[Appendix A27]
The performance information display means (37a) has a plurality of light emitting regions,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A25 or Appendix A26, wherein the multiple areas are provided corresponding to the multiple light emitting areas.

In the gaming machines according to appendix A25 to appendix A27, a part of the performance information is made visible in one or more of the multiple regions of the translucent display device each time a specific condition is satisfied, so that the performance information displayed on the performance information display means gradually becomes visible. As a result, the performance information displayed on the performance information display means gradually becomes clear, so that the player can enjoy guessing the performance information until the performance information can be grasped. This can increase the player's motivation to continue playing until the performance information can be confirmed, and increase the interest in the game.

[Appendix A28]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A22, characterized in that, when the specific condition is satisfied, the visibility state control means (51) changes the translucent display device (39A) from a first state (visibility level 0) in which the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not visible or is difficult to see, to a second state (visibility level 4) in which the entire performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is visible.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A28, when a specific condition is satisfied, the light-transmitting display device is changed from a light-blocking state in which the performance information is not visible or difficult to be seen to a transparent state in which the performance information is visible in its entirety. Therefore, a game feature is provided in which the performance information is immediately visible when a specific condition is satisfied, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix A29]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices A22 to A28, characterized in that the visibility state control means (51) moves the visibility restriction means (39) to the first position after a predetermined time has elapsed since the visibility restriction means (39) started to move from the first position.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A29, the visibility limiting means returns to the first position where the performance information is not visible or difficult to see after a predetermined time has elapsed since the movement is started from the first position. This makes it possible to prevent the visibility limiting means from being present for a long time in a position where part or all of the performance information is visible, and therefore to prevent the performance information from being left for a long time in a state where it can be guessed or understood. This makes it possible to prevent players who are not playing from guessing or understanding the performance information.

[Appendix A30]
The performance information display means (37a) has a plurality of light emitting regions,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices A22 to A29, characterized in that the performance information display means (37a) displays the specific performance information by the luminous color or blinking pattern of the multiple luminous areas when the specific condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A30, the specific performance information can be easily indicated by the light emission color or blinking pattern of the light emitting area of the performance information display means.

[Appendix A31]
The game machine further includes a transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition,
The specific conditions are:
The number of times the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means (41) reaches a predetermined number of times;
The result of the transition determination is not to transition to the special game state a predetermined number of times in succession;
The result of the transition determination that the special game state is to be transitioned to reaches a predetermined number of times.
The total number of game balls shot into the game area of the game board (31) reaches a certain number, or the total number of game balls shot into the game area of the game board (31) and the number of winning holes (3
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1 to Appendix A30, characterized in that the difference in the number of balls paid out by the entry of game balls into any one of the slots (13 to 316) exceeds a predetermined number.

In the gaming machine according to appended note A31, the performance information is displayed on the performance information display means when a specific condition is satisfied, so that the player can predict the timing when the performance information will be displayed on the performance information display means. This allows the player to play the game while anticipating the timing when the performance information will be displayed and looking forward to that timing, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Appendix B1]
A game board (31) in which a game area into which game balls flow down is set;
A plurality of winning holes (3) are provided in the game area, and winning balls are paid out when a game ball enters the winning hole (3).
13-316) and
an outlet (318) for discharging game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) to the rear side of the game board;
A special outlet (363) that is provided above the game area relative to at least one of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) and that discharges game balls to the rear side of the game board;
A storage means (412) for storing performance information (such as a game setting value, a unit number of lottery draws for a big win, a base, a consecutive role ratio, and a role ratio) that is an index showing ball output performance;
A performance information display means (3) for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means (412).
7a) and
A performance information display control means (37a) for causing the performance information display means (37b) to display the performance information
41) and
a visibility limiting means (39, 39A) for making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to view;
The visibility limiting means (39, 39) is operated based on the entry of a game ball into the special outlet (363).
A) to make at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) visible;
A gaming machine comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is made visible when a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, when a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible, the performance information can be inferred and enjoyed based on the visible part. Also, when all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible, the performance information can be understood. Therefore, the ability to infer or understand the performance information improves the gameplay and provides motivation to continue playing the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, at least a part of the performance information can be visually confirmed by the game ball entering the special outlet. Therefore, the interest of the game is increased because the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether the game ball enters the special outlet.

[Appendix B2]
a transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
a probability setting means (41) for setting a probability of determining that a transition to the special game state is to be made in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from among a plurality of different probability of determining an advantage;
Further equipped with
The gaming machine described in Appendix B1, characterized in that the performance information includes information (game setting value) regarding the advantageous judgment probability set by the advantageous judgment probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B2, the performance information includes information on the probability of a favorable judgment, which has a large effect on the ball-out performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, by evaluating the ball-out performance based on the information on the probability of a favorable judgment, it becomes possible to suggest the ball-out performance based on an index that more appropriately reflects the ball-out performance of the gaming machine. In addition, by displaying a part or all of the information on the probability of a favorable judgment on the performance information display means, the player can enjoy guessing the probability of a favorable judgment, and when the probability of a favorable judgment is grasped, the player is given an opportunity to decide whether to continue playing with the gaming machine based on the probability of a favorable judgment.

[Appendix B3]
The machine further includes a plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) for dispensing a certain number of game balls according to the type of the winning hole based on the entry of the game balls,
The gaming machine described in Appendix B1 or Appendix B2, characterized in that the performance information includes information indicating ball-out performance based on at least one of the multiple winning ports (313 to 316).

The gaming machine according to Appendix B3 includes performance information indicating ball-out performance based on at least one of the multiple winning ports. Therefore, by displaying a part or all of the performance information indicating the ball-out performance based on the winning port on the performance information display means, the player can guess or recognize the ball-out performance that reflects the variation in winning performance for the winning port between gaming machines due to, for example, individual differences at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine or changes over time. This allows the player to enjoy guessing the ball-out performance based on the winning port, and when the ball-out performance based on the winning port can be grasped, the player is given an opportunity to decide whether to continue playing with the gaming machine in question based on the performance information.

[Appendix B4]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) are determined by the transition determination means (4) when a game ball enters the winning hole.
A first winning port (314) that provides an opportunity to make the transition determination according to 1),
The game machine further includes a unit judgment number calculation means (41) for calculating the number of unit judgments for which the transition judgment means (41) has performed the transition judgment in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) until the difference in the number of balls reaches a predetermined number of balls or until the number of game balls shot to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls,
The gaming machine described in Appendix B3, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the unit judgment count calculated by the unit judgment count calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B4, the performance information includes performance information on the number of unit judgments. Here, the number of unit judgments is the number of times that a transition judgment is made triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning slot until the difference in the number of balls reaches a minus of a predetermined number of balls or until the number of launched gaming balls reaches a specific number of balls. In other words, the number of unit judgments is an index showing the ease of a transition judgment in a normal gaming state (a state in which the mode is a low probability mode and not a high frequency support mode). Therefore, since a part or all of the information on the number of unit judgments is displayed, a player can guess or recognize the information on the number of unit judgments, and thus it becomes possible to know the ease of a transition judgment. This allows a player to enjoy guessing the number of unit judgments, and when the number of unit judgments can be grasped, an opportunity is given to the player to decide whether to continue playing on the gaming machine being played based on the number of unit judgments.

[Appendix B5]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) which causes a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry of a game ball and triggers the transition determination means (41) to make the transition determination based on the entry of a game ball, and a general winning opening (313) which causes a specific number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry of a game ball and has a function different from that of the first winning opening,
The game machine further includes a ball payout rate calculation means (41) for calculating a ball payout rate (base) which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls, which is the number of payout balls for game balls entering the first winning opening (314) and the number of payout balls for game balls entering the general winning opening (313), to the number of game balls shot to the game board (31);
The gaming machine described in Appendix B3, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the ball payout rate calculated by the ball payout rate calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B5, the performance information includes information on the payout rate. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of paid-out balls from the first winning port and the general winning port to the number of shot balls. In other words, the payout rate is an index showing the ease of winning at the first winning port and the general winning port. Therefore, since the performance information displays part or all of the information on the payout rate, the player can guess or recognize the payout rate, and can know the ease of winning at the first winning port and the general winning port. This allows the player to enjoy guessing the payout rate, and if the payout rate can be grasped, the player is given the opportunity to decide whether to continue playing with the gaming machine he is playing based on the payout rate.

[Appendix B6]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) into which a game ball can enter in the special game state,
The game machine further includes a continuous feature ratio calculation means (41) for calculating a continuous feature ratio, which is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the number of game balls entering the variable winning port (316) to the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls to the number of game balls entering the multiple winning ports (313 to 316),
The gaming machine described in Appendix B3, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the consecutive feature ratio calculated by the consecutive feature ratio calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B6, the performance information includes information on the continuous feature ratio. Here, the continuous feature ratio is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the number of game balls entering a variable winning port to the total number of balls paid out, which is the sum of the number of game balls paid out to the game balls entering a plurality of winning ports. In other words, the continuous feature ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment causes a transition to a special game (stay ratio in the special game state) and the ease of winning a prize at a variable winning port (payout rate in the special game state).
It is an index showing the ratio of consecutive features. Therefore, by displaying a part or all of the information on the ratio of consecutive features, the player can guess or recognize the ratio of consecutive features, and can know the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment will transition to a special game (the ratio of staying in the special game state) and the ease of winning at the variable winning port. This allows the player to enjoy guessing the ratio of consecutive features, and when the ratio of consecutive features is grasped, the player is given the opportunity to decide whether to continue playing on the gaming machine in question based on the ratio of consecutive features.

[Appendix B7]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) are determined by the transition determination means (4) when a game ball enters the winning hole.
the first winning hole (314) which triggers the transition determination by the transition determination means (41), a second winning hole (315) into which a game ball can enter with the support of an electric device, and which triggers the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) when the game ball enters the second winning hole (315), and a variable winning hole (316) into which a game ball can enter in the special game state,
a role ratio calculation means (41) for calculating a role ratio which is the ratio of the total number of paid-out balls, which is the total number of paid-out balls for game balls entering the variable winning port (316) and the total number of paid-out balls for game balls entering the second winning port (315), to the total number of paid-out balls, which is the total number of paid-out balls for game balls entering the multiple winning ports (313 to 316);
Further equipped with
The gaming machine described in Appendix B3, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the role ratio calculated by the role ratio calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B7, the performance information includes information on the ratio of game balls. Here, the ratio of game balls is the ratio of the number of paid-out balls to the variable winning port and the second winning port to the total number of paid-out balls, which is the sum of the number of paid-out balls to the multiple winning ports. In other words, the ratio of game balls is the frequency with which the result of the transition judgment will transition to a special game (
The indicators indicate the ratio of stay in the special game state, the ratio of stay in the support game state (time-saving game state) supported by the electric role, and the ease of winning in the variable winning port and the second winning port (the ball payout rate in the special game state). Therefore, since the player can guess or recognize the role ratio by displaying a part or all of the information on the role ratio, it becomes possible to know the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment is to transition to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), the ratio of stay in the support game state (time-saving game state) supported by the electric role, and the ease of winning in the variable winning port and the second winning port (the ball payout rate in the special game state). This allows the player to enjoy guessing the role ratio, and if the role ratio can be grasped, the player is given the opportunity to decide whether to continue playing with the gaming machine being played based on the role ratio.

[Appendix B8]
The at least one winning hole (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) into which a game ball can enter in the special game,
A normal ball entry port (387) that guides the game ball to a position where it can enter the variable winning port (316).
and a distribution device (36) for distributing game balls to either the special outlet (363).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B8, in a special game in which a game ball can enter a variable winning hole,
The balls are distributed to the normal ball entrance and the special ball exit by the distribution device. In other words, at least in the special game, it is possible for the ball to enter the special ball exit, which changes the visual state of the performance information. Therefore, the special game provides an opportunity to guess or understand the performance information, and the fun of guessing or understanding the performance information can be added to the special game, which tends to proceed inorganically.

[Appendix B9]
The game machine further includes a transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition,
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) are determined by the transition determination means (4) when a game ball enters the winning hole.
A first winning port (314) that provides an opportunity to make the transition determination according to 1),
The first winning hole (314) is capable of receiving a game ball shot into the left side area of the game board (31);
The variable winning hole (316) is capable of receiving a game ball shot into the right area of the game board (31);
The distribution device (36) distributes the game balls shot into the right area to the normal ball entrance (387
) and the special outlet (363).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B9, since the gaming ball shot to the left area of the gaming board can enter the first winning hole, it is necessary to perform a so-called left shot in order to receive a transition judgment to the special game. On the other hand, since the gaming ball shot to the right area of the gaming board can enter the variable winning hole,
In the special game, it is necessary to hit from the right side. The distribution device equipped with a special outlet that can change the visual state of the performance information due to the entrance of the game ball can distribute the game balls shot to the right side area of the game board to the special outlet. Therefore, the visual state of the performance information does not change in the game for receiving the transition judgment to the special game, but the visual state of the performance information can change in the special game. In this way, since the visual state of the performance information can change when hitting from the right side in the special game, etc., it is possible to motivate a player who is interested in guessing or understanding the performance information to continue playing until the result of the transition judgment is to transition to the special game.

[Appendix B10]
The gaming machine described in Appendix B8 or Appendix B9, wherein the special outlet (363) is more difficult to insert a ball into than the normal ball inlet (387).

[Appendix B11]
The gaming machine described in Appendix B10, wherein the special outlet (363) is located above the normal ball inlet (387).

[Appendix B12]
The gaming machine described in Appendix B10 or Appendix B11, wherein the special outlet (363) has an opening area smaller than that of the normal ball inlet (387).

[Appendix B13]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix B10 to Appendix B12, characterized in that the distribution device (36) has an obstruction means (365) for obstructing the entry of gaming balls into the special discharge port (363).

[Appendix B14]
The gaming machine described in Appendix B13, wherein the obstruction means (365) is a wall portion surrounding the special discharge port (363).

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes B10 to B14, since it is more difficult for a gaming ball to enter the special outlet than the normal ball inlet, it is not easy to grasp the performance information. Therefore, for example, when the probability of an advantageous judgment is low, the player can easily understand that the probability of an advantageous judgment is low, and this can prevent the player from ceasing playing on the gaming machine 10 early.

[Appendix C1]
A storage means (412) for storing performance information (such as a game setting value, a unit number of lottery draws for a big win, a base, a consecutive role ratio, and a role ratio) that is an index showing ball output performance;
A performance information display means (3) for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means (412).
7a) and
A performance information display control means (37a) for causing the performance information display means (37b) to display the performance information
41) and
a visibility limiting means (39, 39A) for making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to view;
a visibility state control means (51) for controlling the visibility restriction means (39, 39A) when a specific condition is satisfied, and making at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) visible;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the visibility limiting means (39A) changes the visibility state of the performance information on the performance information display means (37a) under the control of the visibility state control means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appended note C1, at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is made visible when a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, when a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible, the player can enjoy guessing the ball-out performance of the gaming machine during play based on the visible part. Also, when all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible, the ball-out performance of the gaming machine during play can be grasped. Therefore, being able to guess or grasp the ball-out performance of the gaming machine during play improves the gameplay and provides motivation to continue playing.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix C1, the visibility limiting means is controlled by the visibility state control means to change the visibility state of the performance information display means. Therefore, by the simple method of changing the visibility state of the performance information, a state in which part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible can be realized.

[Appendix C2]
The visual recognition state control means (51)
When the specific condition is satisfied multiple times, a visibility state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is changed from a first state (visibility level 0) in which the performance information is not visible or is difficult to view, to a second state (visibility level 4) in which the entire performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is visible;
The gaming machine described in Appendix C1, characterized in that the visibility limiting means (39) gradually expands the visible area in the translucent display device (39A) each time the specific condition is satisfied while the visibility limiting means (39) is being changed from the first state to the second state.

In the gaming machine according to appended claim C2, the transparent area in the translucent display device is expanded step by step each time a specific condition is satisfied, so that the visible area of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is gradually expanded. As a result, the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is gradually revealed, so that the player can enjoy guessing the performance information in the process. This can increase the player's motivation to continue playing until the performance information can be confirmed, and increase the interest of the game.

[Appendix C3]
The gaming machine according to claim C1 or C2, wherein the visibility limiting means (39A) is a light-transmitting display device whose light-blocking property can be changed by control of the visibility state control means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appended note C3, the visibility of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is changed by changing the light-blocking property of the light-transmitting display device. For example, the visibility of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is improved by reducing the light-blocking property of a part or all of the light-transmitting display device. Therefore, a state in which a part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible can be achieved by the simple method of changing the light-blocking property of the light-transmitting display device.

[Appendix C4]
The light-transmitting display device (39A) has a plurality of regions that make parts of the performance information visible in a predetermined order;
The gaming machine described in Appendix C3, characterized in that the visibility state control means (51) makes a portion of the performance information visible in one or more of the multiple areas each time the specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix C5]
The gaming machine described in Appendix C4, wherein the multiple regions are discretely arranged in the translucent display device (39A).

[Appendix C6]
The performance information display means (37a) has a plurality of light emitting regions,
The gaming machine described in Appendix C4 or Appendix C5, wherein the multiple areas are provided corresponding to the multiple light emitting areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C4 to appendix C6, a part of the performance information is made visible in one or more areas among the multiple areas of the light-transmitting display device every time a specific condition is satisfied.
The performance information displayed on the performance information display means becomes gradually visible. As a result, the performance information displayed on the performance information display means becomes gradually clear, so that the player can enjoy guessing the performance information until the performance information can be grasped. This increases the player's motivation to continue playing until the performance information can be confirmed, and increases the interest of the game.

[Appendix C7]
The gaming machine described in Appendix C1, characterized in that, when the specific condition is satisfied, the visibility state control means (51) changes the translucent display device (39A) from a first state (visibility level 0) in which the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not visible or is difficult to see, to a second state (visibility level 4) in which the entire performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is visible.

In the gaming machine according to appended claim C7, when a specific condition is satisfied, the light-transmitting display device is changed from a light-blocking state in which the performance information is not visible or difficult to be seen to a transparent state in which the performance information is visible in its entirety. Therefore, a game feature is provided in which the performance information is immediately visible when a specific condition is satisfied, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Appendix C8]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices C1 to C7, characterized in that the visibility state control means (51) moves the visibility restriction means (39) to the first position after a predetermined time has elapsed since the visibility restriction means (39) started to move from the first position.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C8, the visibility limiting means returns to the first position where the performance information is not visible or difficult to see after a predetermined time has elapsed since the movement is started from the first position. This makes it possible to prevent the visibility limiting means from being present for a long time in a position where part or all of the performance information is visible, and therefore to prevent the performance information from being left for a long time in a state where it can be guessed or understood. This makes it possible to prevent players who are not playing the game from guessing or understanding the performance information.

[Appendix C9]
The performance information display means (37a) has a plurality of light emitting regions,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices C1 to C8, characterized in that the performance information display means (37a) displays the specific performance information by the light emission color or blinking pattern of the multiple light-emitting areas when the specific condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C9, the specific performance information can be easily indicated by the light emission color or blinking pattern of the light emitting area of the performance information display means.

[Appendix C10]
a transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
a probability setting means (41) for setting a probability of determining that a transition to the special game state is to be made in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from among a plurality of different probability of determining an advantage;
Further equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendices C1 to C9, characterized in that the performance information includes information (game setting value) regarding the advantageous judgment probability set by the advantageous judgment probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appended note C10, the performance information includes information on the probability of a favorable judgment, which has a large effect on the ball-out performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, by evaluating the ball-out performance based on the information on the probability of a favorable judgment, it becomes possible to suggest the ball-out performance based on an index that more appropriately reflects the ball-out performance of the gaming machine. In addition, by displaying a part or all of the information on the probability of a favorable judgment on the performance information display means, the player can enjoy guessing the probability of a favorable judgment, and when the probability of a favorable judgment is grasped, the player is given an opportunity to decide whether to continue playing with the gaming machine based on the probability of a favorable judgment.

[Appendix C11]
The machine further includes a plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) for dispensing a certain number of game balls according to the type of the winning hole based on the entry of the game balls,
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendices C1 to C10, characterized in that the performance information includes information indicating ball output performance based on at least one of the multiple winning ports (313 to 316).

The gaming machine according to appended claim C11 includes performance information indicating ball-out performance based on at least one of the multiple winning ports. Therefore, by displaying a part or all of the performance information indicating the ball-out performance based on the winning port on the performance information display means, the player can guess or recognize the ball-out performance that reflects the variation in winning performance for the winning port between gaming machines due to, for example, individual differences at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine or changes over time. This allows the player to enjoy guessing the ball-out performance based on the winning port, and when the ball-out performance based on the winning port can be grasped, the player is given an opportunity to decide whether to continue playing with the gaming machine in question based on the performance information.

[Appendix C12]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) are determined by the transition determination means (4) when a game ball enters the winning hole.
A first winning port (314) that provides an opportunity to make the transition determination according to 1),
The game machine further includes a unit judgment number calculation means (41) for calculating the number of unit judgments for which the transition judgment means (41) has performed the transition judgment in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) until the difference in the number of balls reaches a predetermined number of balls or until the number of game balls shot to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls,
The gaming machine described in Appendix C11, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the unit judgment count calculated by the unit judgment count calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C12, the performance information includes performance information on the number of unit judgments. Here, the number of unit judgments is the number of times that a transition judgment is made triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning slot until the difference in the number of balls reaches a minus of a predetermined number of balls or the number of launched gaming balls reaches a specific number of balls. In other words, the number of unit judgments is an index showing the ease of a transition judgment in a normal gaming state (a state in which the game is in a low probability mode and not in a time-saving mode). Therefore, since a part or all of the information on the number of unit judgments is displayed, a player can guess or recognize the information on the number of unit judgments, and thus it becomes possible to know the ease of a transition judgment. This allows a player to enjoy guessing the number of unit judgments, and when the number of unit judgments can be grasped, the player is given an opportunity to decide whether to continue playing on the gaming machine being played based on the number of unit judgments.

[Appendix C13]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) which causes a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry of a game ball and triggers the transition determination means (41) to make the transition determination based on the entry of a game ball, and a general winning opening (313) which causes a specific number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry of a game ball and has a function different from that of the first winning opening,
The game machine further includes a ball payout rate calculation means (41) for calculating a ball payout rate (base) which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls, which is the number of payout balls for game balls entering the first winning opening (314) and the number of payout balls for game balls entering the general winning opening (313), to the number of game balls shot to the game board (31);
The gaming machine described in Appendix C11, characterized in that the performance information includes information regarding the ball payout rate calculated by the ball payout rate calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C13, the performance information includes information on the payout rate. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls from the first winning port and the general winning port to the number of shot balls.
The payout rate is an index showing the ease of winning at the first winning slot and the general winning slot. Therefore, since the performance information displays part or all of the information related to the payout rate, the player can guess or recognize the payout rate, and can know the ease of winning at the first winning slot and the general winning slot. This allows the player to enjoy guessing the payout rate, and if the payout rate can be known, the player is given the opportunity to decide whether to continue playing on the gaming machine based on the payout rate.

[Appendix C14]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) into which a game ball can enter in the special game state,
The game machine further includes a continuous feature ratio calculation means (41) for calculating a continuous feature ratio, which is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the number of game balls entering the variable winning port (316) to the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls to the number of game balls entering the multiple winning ports (313 to 316),
The gaming machine described in Appendix C11, characterized in that the performance information includes information regarding the consecutive feature ratio calculated by the consecutive feature ratio calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C14, the performance information includes information on the ratio of consecutive bonuses.
The continuous feature ratio is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the number of balls entering the variable winning slots to the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls to the number of balls entering the multiple winning slots. In other words, the continuous feature ratio is the frequency with which the result of the transition judgment will transition to a special game (
It is an index showing the ratio of staying in the special game state) and the ease of winning in the variable winning port (the ball payout rate in the special game state). Therefore, since the player can guess or recognize the ratio of consecutive games by displaying a part or all of the information on the ratio of consecutive games, it becomes possible to know the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment will transition to a special game (the ratio of staying in the special game state) and the ease of winning in the variable winning port. This allows the player to enjoy guessing the ratio of consecutive games, and when the ratio of consecutive games can be grasped, the player is given the opportunity to decide whether to continue playing on the gaming machine being played based on the ratio of consecutive games.

[Appendix C15]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) are determined by the transition determination means (4) when a game ball enters the winning hole.
the first winning hole (314) which triggers the transition determination by the transition determination means (41), a second winning hole (315) into which a game ball can enter with the support of an electric device, and which triggers the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) when the game ball enters the second winning hole (315), and a variable winning hole (316) into which a game ball can enter in the special game state,
a role ratio calculation means (41) for calculating a role ratio which is the ratio of the total number of paid-out balls, which is the total number of paid-out balls for game balls entering the variable winning port (316) and the total number of paid-out balls for game balls entering the second winning port (315), to the total number of paid-out balls, which is the total number of paid-out balls for game balls entering the multiple winning ports (313 to 316);
Further equipped with
The gaming machine described in Appendix C11, characterized in that the performance information includes information regarding the reel ratio calculated by the reel ratio calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C15, the performance information includes information on the ratio of the game balls. Here, the ratio of the game balls is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the variable winning port and the second winning port to the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls to the multiple winning ports. In other words, the ratio of the game balls is an index showing the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment is to transition to a special game (stay ratio in the special game state), the stay ratio in the support game state (time-saving game state) supported by the electric game ball, and the ease of winning the variable winning port and the second winning port (payout rate in the special game state). Therefore, since the player can guess or recognize the ratio of the special features by displaying some or all of the information on the ratio of the special features, the player can know the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment will transition to a special game (stay ratio in the special game state), the stay ratio in the support game state (time-saving game state) in which the player receives support from the electric feature, and the ease of winning in the variable winning port and the second winning port (ball payout rate in the special game state). This allows the player to enjoy guessing the ratio of the special features, and if the ratio of the special features can be grasped, the player is given the opportunity to decide whether to continue playing on the gaming machine in question based on the ratio of the special features.

[Appendix D1]
A storage means (412) for storing performance information (such as a game setting value, a unit number of lottery draws for a big win, a base, a consecutive role ratio, and a role ratio) that is an index showing ball output performance;
A performance information display means (3) for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means (412).
7a) and
A performance information display control means (37a) for causing the performance information display means (37b) to display the performance information
41) and
a visibility limiting means (39) for making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to view;
a visibility state control means (51) for controlling the visibility restriction means (39) when a specific condition is satisfied, and making at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) visible;
an abnormality determination means (51) for determining whether the visual recognition state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is a desired visual recognition state of the performance information;
A gaming machine comprising:

[Appendix D2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix D2 is characterized in that it further comprises a response processing execution means (51) which executes response processing to the abnormality when the abnormality judgment means (51) judges that an abnormality has occurred in the visual state of the performance information.

In the gaming machines according to appendix D1 and appendix D2, it is possible to determine whether the visual state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is the visual state of the desired performance information. This makes it possible to respond when the visual state of the performance information is different from the desired one.

[Appendix D3]
The visibility limiting means (39A) is a forced visibility limiting means (39A) whose visibility can be changed by the control of the visibility state control means (51) and is different from the visibility limiting means (39).
and,
A forced visibility state control means (51) for controlling visibility in the forced visibility limiting means (39A)
and,
Further equipped with
The visibility limiting means (39) is a first position (upper limit position) at which the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not visible or is difficult to view, and a second position (upper limit position) at which the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not visible or is difficult to view.
) is movable between a first position (lower limit position) and a second position (lower limit position) in which the entire performance information displayed on the display unit can be viewed;
The abnormality determination means (51) is capable of determining that the visibility restriction means (39) cannot move to the second position,
When the abnormality determination means (51) determines that the visibility limiting means (39) cannot be moved to the second position, the countermeasure execution means (51) executes the forced visibility limiting means (39) so as to make the performance information invisible or difficult to be viewed on the performance information display means (37a).
9A).

In the gaming machine according to appended claim D3, when the visibility limiting means cannot be moved to the second position where the performance information on the performance information display means is invisible or difficult to view, the performance information on the performance information display means can be made invisible or difficult to view by the forced visibility limiting means. This makes it possible to prevent a state where a part or all of the performance information on the performance information display means is visible from being maintained.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a part or all of the performance information is visible on the performance information display means and the performance information is guessed or recognized by the player even when a specific condition is not satisfied.

[Appendix D4]
The gaming machine according to appendix D3, wherein the compulsory visibility limiting means (39A) is capable of changing the visible light transmittance by control of the compulsory visibility state control means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appended claim D4, the visibility of the performance information on the performance information display means can be changed by changing the visible light transmittance of the forced visibility state control means. This makes it possible to prevent a state in which part or all of the performance information on the performance information display means is visible from being maintained by a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix D5]
The gaming machine described in Appendix D3, characterized in that the forced visibility limiting means (39A) can be moved to a position covering the performance information display means (37a) by control of the forced visibility state control means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appended claim D5, the visibility of the performance information on the performance information display means can be changed by moving the performance information display means to a position where the performance information display means is covered by the forced visibility control means. This makes it possible to prevent a state in which part or all of the performance information on the performance information display means is visible from being maintained by a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix D6]
The gaming machine described in Appendix D3, characterized in that the forced visibility restriction means (39A) comprises a light source controlled by the forced visibility state control means (51) and an optical element into which light emitted from the light source is incident and which can diffuse or guide the incident light.

In the gaming machine according to appended claim D6, the visibility of the performance information on the performance information display means can be changed by turning on or off the light source. This allows the following to be achieved with a simple configuration and control:
This makes it possible to prevent a state in which part or all of the performance information is visible on the performance information display means from being maintained.

[Appendix D7]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices D3 to D6, characterized in that when the abnormality judgment means (51) judges that an abnormality has occurred in the visibility state of the performance information, the forced visibility control means (51) controls the forced visibility restriction means (39A) when the specific condition is satisfied, thereby making at least a portion of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) visible.

In the gaming machine according to appended note D7, when an abnormality occurs in the visibility state of the performance information, the forced visibility limiting means is controlled to make at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information displaying means visible. In other words, when a drive abnormality occurs in the visibility limiting means, the visibility of the performance information is changed by the forced visibility limiting means instead of the visibility limiting means. In this way, even if the visibility of the performance information cannot be changed by the visibility limiting means, the visibility of the performance information can be changed by the forced visibility limiting means.

[Appendix D8]
The visibility limiting means (39) is a first position (upper limit position) at which the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not visible or is difficult to view, and a second position (upper limit position) at which the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not visible or is difficult to view.
) is movable between a first position (lower limit position) and a second position (lower limit position) in which the entire performance information displayed on the display unit can be viewed;
The performance information display means (37a) is configured such that at least the visibility limiting means (39) is
When the visibility limiting means (39) is in the position, the visibility limiting means (39) can be moved to a position where the visibility limiting means (39) is hidden by the visibility limiting means (39),
The abnormality determination means (51) is capable of determining that the visibility restriction means (39) cannot move to the second position,
The gaming machine described in Appendix D3, characterized in that the response processing execution means (51) moves the performance information display means (37a) to a position hidden by the visibility restriction means (39) when the abnormality determination means (51) determines that the visibility restriction means (39) cannot be moved to the second position.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D8, the visibility of the performance information on the performance information display means can be changed by moving the performance information display means. This makes it possible to prevent a state in which part or all of the performance information on the performance information display means is visible from being maintained by a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix D9]
The abnormality determination means (51) includes a detection means (40A) capable of detecting that the visibility limiting means (39A) is in the second position,
The abnormality determination means (51) determines that the visibility limiting means (39) cannot be moved to the second position when the visibility state control means (51) controls the visibility limiting means (39) to move to the second position and the detection means (40A) does not detect that the visibility limiting means (39A) is at the second position.
3 to Appendix D8.

In the gaming machine according to the appended claim D9, the detection means can determine whether the visibility limiting means cannot be moved to the second position. This makes it possible to detect whether there is an abnormality in the visibility limiting means with a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix D10]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices D1 to D9, characterized in that the abnormality judgment means (51) judges whether an abnormality has occurred in the visibility restriction means (39) between the time the main power of the gaming machine is turned on and the time game play can be started.

In the gaming machine according to appended claim D10, it is determined whether or not an abnormality occurs in the visual recognition limiting means during the period from when the main power source of the gaming machine is turned on until the start of a game.
It is possible to prevent a state in which a game can be started when an abnormality occurs in the visibility limiting means. Also, when an abnormality occurs in the visibility limiting means, it becomes possible to deal with the abnormality.

[Appendix D11]
The abnormality determination means (51) is configured to determine whether or not the visual recognition limiting means (39) is activated after the start of a game is enabled.
A gaming machine as described in any one of Appendices D1 to D10, characterized in that it determines whether an abnormality has occurred in the game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appended note D11, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the visual restriction means after the start of a game. This makes it possible to find the abnormality in the visual restriction means even if an abnormality occurs in the visual restriction means after the start of a game is enabled, and to deal with the abnormality.

[Appendix D12]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices D1 to D11, further comprising an alarm means (341, 26) for notifying that an abnormality has occurred when the abnormality judgment means (51) judges that the visual state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not the desired visual state of the performance information.

In the gaming machine according to appended claim D12, when the visual recognition state of the performance information is not as intended, the occurrence of an abnormality is notified. This allows the gaming hall to know that an abnormality has occurred in the visual recognition limiting means, and enables the gaming hall to respond to the abnormality.

[Appendix D13]
When the abnormality determination means (51) determines that the visual confirmation state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not the intended visual confirmation state of the performance information,
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D12, further comprising a selection means (341, 20) for enabling selection of whether or not to allow execution of a game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D13, whether to allow a game to be played when the visual state of the performance information is not as desired can be selected. This makes it possible to leave the decision of whether to allow a player to use the gaming machine to the gaming hall when there is no abnormality other than in the visual restriction means and there is no problem with playing the game.

[Appendix D14]
a transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
a probability setting means (41) for setting a probability of determining that a transition to the special game state is to be made in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from among a plurality of different probability of determining an advantage;
Further equipped with
The gaming machine described in Appendices D1 to D13, characterized in that the performance information includes information (game setting value) regarding the advantageous judgment probability set by the advantageous judgment probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appended note D14, the performance information includes information on the probability of a favorable judgment, which has a large effect on the ball-out performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, by evaluating the ball-out performance based on the information on the probability of a favorable judgment, it becomes possible to suggest the ball-out performance based on an index that more appropriately reflects the ball-out performance of the gaming machine. In addition, by displaying a part or all of the information on the probability of a favorable judgment on the performance information display means, the player can enjoy guessing the probability of a favorable judgment, and when the probability of a favorable judgment is grasped, the player is given an opportunity to decide whether to continue playing with the gaming machine based on the probability of a favorable judgment.

[Appendix D15]
The machine further includes a plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) for dispensing a certain number of game balls according to the type of the winning hole based on the entry of the game balls,
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendices D1 to D14, characterized in that the performance information includes information indicating ball-out performance based on at least one of the multiple winning ports (313 to 316).

The gaming machine according to appendix D15 includes performance information indicating ball-out performance based on at least one of the multiple winning ports. Therefore, by displaying a part or all of the performance information indicating the ball-out performance based on the winning port on the performance information display means, the player can guess or recognize the ball-out performance that reflects the variation in winning performance for the winning port between gaming machines due to, for example, individual differences at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine or changes over time. This allows the player to enjoy guessing the ball-out performance based on the winning port, and when the ball-out performance based on the winning port can be grasped, the player is given an opportunity to decide whether to continue playing with the gaming machine in question based on the performance information.

[Appendix D16]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) are determined by the transition determination means (4) when a game ball enters the winning hole.
A first winning port (314) that provides an opportunity to make the transition determination according to 1),
The game machine further includes a unit judgment number calculation means (41) for calculating the number of unit judgments for which the transition judgment means (41) has performed the transition judgment in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) until the difference in the number of balls reaches a predetermined number of balls or until the number of game balls shot to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls,
The gaming machine described in Appendix D15, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the unit judgment count calculated by the unit judgment count calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix D16, the performance information includes performance information on the number of unit judgments. Here, the number of unit judgments is the number of times that a transition judgment is made triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning slot until the difference in the number of balls reaches a minus of a predetermined number of balls or the number of launched gaming balls reaches a specific number of balls. In other words, the number of unit judgments is an index showing the ease of a transition judgment in a normal gaming state (a state in which the game is in a low probability mode and not in a time-saving mode). Therefore, since a part or all of the information on the number of unit judgments is displayed, a player can guess or recognize the information on the number of unit judgments, and thus it becomes possible to know the ease of a transition judgment. This allows a player to enjoy guessing the number of unit judgments, and when the number of unit judgments can be grasped, the player is given an opportunity to decide whether to continue playing on the gaming machine being played based on the number of unit judgments.

[Appendix D17]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) which causes a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry of a game ball and triggers the transition determination means (41) to make the transition determination based on the entry of a game ball, and a general winning opening (313) which causes a specific number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry of a game ball and has a function different from that of the first winning opening,
The game machine further includes a ball payout rate calculation means (41) for calculating a ball payout rate (base) which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls, which is the number of payout balls for game balls entering the first winning opening (314) and the number of payout balls for game balls entering the general winning opening (313), to the number of game balls shot to the game board (31);
The gaming machine described in Appendix D15, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the ball payout rate calculated by the ball payout rate calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to the appended note D17, the performance information includes information on the payout rate. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls from the first winning port and the general winning port to the number of shot balls. In other words,
The payout rate is an index showing the ease of winning at the first winning slot and the general winning slot. Therefore, since the performance information displays part or all of the information related to the payout rate, the player can guess or recognize the payout rate, and can know the ease of winning at the first winning slot and the general winning slot. This allows the player to enjoy guessing the payout rate, and if the payout rate can be known, the player is given the opportunity to decide whether to continue playing on the gaming machine based on the payout rate.

[Appendix D18]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) into which a game ball can enter in the special game state,
The game machine further includes a continuous feature ratio calculation means (41) for calculating a continuous feature ratio, which is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the number of game balls entering the variable winning port (316) to the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls to the number of game balls entering the multiple winning ports (313 to 316),
The gaming machine described in Appendix D15, characterized in that the performance information includes information regarding the consecutive feature ratio calculated by the consecutive feature ratio calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appended claim D18, the performance information includes information on the ratio of consecutive bonuses.
The continuous feature ratio is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the number of balls entering the variable winning slots to the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls to the number of balls entering the multiple winning slots. In other words, the continuous feature ratio is the frequency with which the result of the transition judgment will transition to a special game (
It is an index showing the ratio of staying in the special game state) and the ease of winning in the variable winning port (the ball payout rate in the special game state). Therefore, since the player can guess or recognize the ratio of consecutive games by displaying a part or all of the information on the ratio of consecutive games, it becomes possible to know the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment will transition to a special game (the ratio of staying in the special game state) and the ease of winning in the variable winning port. This allows the player to enjoy guessing the ratio of consecutive games, and when the ratio of consecutive games can be grasped, the player is given the opportunity to decide whether to continue playing on the gaming machine being played based on the ratio of consecutive games.

[Appendix D19]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) are determined by the transition determination means (4) when a game ball enters the winning hole.
the first winning hole (314) which triggers the transition determination by the transition determination means (41), a second winning hole (315) into which a game ball can enter with the support of an electric device, and which triggers the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) when the game ball enters the second winning hole (315), and a variable winning hole (316) into which a game ball can enter in the special game state,
a role ratio calculation means (41) for calculating a role ratio which is the ratio of the total number of paid-out balls, which is the total number of paid-out balls for game balls entering the variable winning port (316) and the total number of paid-out balls for game balls entering the second winning port (315), to the total number of paid-out balls, which is the total number of paid-out balls for game balls entering the multiple winning ports (313 to 316);
Further equipped with
The gaming machine described in Appendix D15, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the reel ratio calculated by the reel ratio calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix D19, the performance information includes information on the ratio of the game balls. Here, the ratio of the game balls is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the variable winning port and the second winning port to the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls to the multiple winning ports. In other words, the ratio of the game balls is an index indicating the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment is to transition to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), the stay ratio in the support game state (time-saving game state) supported by the electric game ball, and the ease of winning the variable winning port and the second winning port (payout rate in the special game state). Therefore, since the player can guess or recognize the ratio of the special features by displaying some or all of the information on the ratio of the special features, the player can know the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment will transition to a special game (stay ratio in the special game state), the stay ratio in the support game state (time-saving game state) in which the player receives support from the electric feature, and the ease of winning in the variable winning port and the second winning port (ball payout rate in the special game state). This allows the player to enjoy guessing the ratio of the special features, and if the ratio of the special features can be grasped, the player is given the opportunity to decide whether to continue playing on the gaming machine in question based on the ratio of the special features.

[Appendix E1]
A game board (31) in which a game area into which game balls flow down is set;
A plurality of winning holes (3) are provided in the game area, and winning balls are paid out when a game ball enters the winning hole (3).
13-316) and
an outlet (318) for discharging game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) to the rear side of the game board;
A special outlet (313 to 316) is provided above the game area relative to at least one of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) and is used to discharge game balls to the rear side of the game board.
63) and
A storage means (412) for storing performance information (such as a game setting value, a unit number of lottery draws for a big win, a base, a consecutive role ratio, and a role ratio) that is an index showing ball output performance;
A performance information display means (3) for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means (412).
7a) and
A performance information display control means (37a) for causing the performance information display means (37b) to display the performance information
41) and
a visibility restriction means (39) for making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to view and capable of accommodating game balls that have entered the special outlet (363);
The visual confirmation limiting means (39) is configured to limit the number of times a game ball enters the visual confirmation limiting means (39) on the condition that the game ball enters the visual confirmation limiting means (39).
a visibility state control means (51) for controlling the performance information display means (37a) to make at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) visible;
an abnormality determination means (51) for determining whether the visual recognition state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is a desired visual recognition state of the performance information;
a switching means (319B) capable of switching between a first state in which a game ball that has entered the special outlet (363) is permitted to enter the visibility restriction means (39) and a second state in which a game ball that has entered the special outlet (363) is restricted from entering the visibility restriction means (39);
a switching control means (51) for controlling the switching means (319B) to the second state when the abnormality determination means (51) determines that the visual confirmation state of the performance information is not a desired visual confirmation state; and
A gaming machine comprising:

[Appendix E2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix E1, characterized in that the visibility limiting means (39) is capable of discharging the stored gaming balls when moved to the second position by the visibility state control means (51).

In the gaming machine according to the appendix E1 and appendix E2, when it is determined that the visibility state of the performance information is not the desired visibility state, the switching means is set to the second state, thereby restricting the entry of the gaming ball into the visibility limiting means. This makes it possible to prevent inconvenience caused by the gaming ball entering the visibility limiting means. For example, when the visibility limiting means is moved to the second position to discharge the gaming ball, if the visibility limiting means cannot move to the second position where the gaming ball can be discharged, the gaming ball is prevented from entering the visibility limiting means. This makes it possible to prevent the visibility limiting means from storing more than the capacity of the gaming ball, and to prevent the gaming ball from overflowing from the visibility limiting means. Therefore, even if a drive abnormality occurs in which the visibility limiting means is not moved from the first position, it is possible to execute a game as usual in the gaming machine.

[Appendix E3]
The switching means (319B) is configured to switch between a third position (standby position) for allowing the game ball that has entered the special outlet (363) to enter the visibility restriction means (39) and a second position (standby position) for allowing the game ball that has entered the special outlet (363) to enter the visibility restriction means (39).
3) to a fourth position (operating position) that restricts the entry of a game ball into the visibility restriction means (39);
The switching control means (51) controls the visibility limiting means (
When it is determined that the switching means (319B) is not in the second position,
The gaming machine according to claim E1 or E2, wherein the game machine moves the ball from the position to the fourth position.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E3, the game ball that has entered the special outlet can be restricted from entering the visibility restriction means by moving the switching means from the third position to the fourth position. This makes it possible to restrict the game ball from entering the visibility restriction means when an abnormality occurs in the visibility restriction means with a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix E4]
The abnormality determination means (51) includes a detection means (40B) capable of detecting that the visibility limiting means (39A) is in the second position,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices E1 to E3, characterized in that the abnormality judgment means (51) judges that the visibility restriction means (39) is not at the second position when the visibility state control means (51) controls the visibility restriction means (39) to move to the second position and the detection means (40B) does not detect that the visibility restriction means (39A) is at the second position.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E4, the detection means can determine that the visibility limiting means is not in the second position. This makes it possible to detect whether there is an abnormality in the visibility limiting means with a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix E5]
A gaming machine as described in any one of Appendices E1 to E4, characterized in that the abnormality judgment means (51) judges whether an abnormality has occurred in the visibility restriction means (39) between the time when the main power supply of the gaming machine is turned on and the time when play can be started.

In the gaming machine according to appended claim E5, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the visual restriction means during the period from when the main power supply of the gaming machine is turned on until the start of a game is possible. This makes it possible to prevent the game from being made ready to start in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the visual restriction means. In addition, when an abnormality has occurred in the visual restriction means, it becomes possible to respond to the abnormality.

[Appendix E6]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendices E1 to E5, characterized in that the abnormality judgment means (51) judges whether an abnormality has occurred in the visibility restriction means (39) after a game is started.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E6, after the start of a game, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the visual restriction means. This makes it possible to find the abnormality in the visual restriction means even if an abnormality occurs in the visual restriction means after the start of a game is enabled, and to deal with the abnormality.

[Appendix E7]
A gaming machine as described in any of Appendices E1 to E6, further comprising an alarm means (341, 26) for notifying that an abnormality has occurred when the abnormality judgment means (51) judges that the visual state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not the desired visual state of the performance information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E7, when the visual recognition state of the performance information is not as intended, the occurrence of an abnormality is notified. This allows the gaming hall to know that an abnormality has occurred in the visual recognition limiting means, and enables the gaming hall to respond to the abnormality.

[Appendix E8]
When the abnormality determination means (51) determines that the visual confirmation state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not the intended visual confirmation state of the performance information,
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E7, further comprising a selection means (341, 20) for selecting whether or not to enable execution of a game.

In the gaming machine according to the appended claim E8, it is possible to select whether to allow the execution of the game when the visual recognition state of the performance information is not as intended.
If there is no problem with playing a game, it becomes possible to leave it to the gaming hall to decide whether or not to allow the player to use the gaming machine.

[Appendix E9]
a transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
a probability setting means (41) for setting a probability of determining that a transition to the special game state is to be made in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from among a plurality of different probability of determining an advantage;
Further equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendices E1 to E8, characterized in that the performance information includes information (game setting value) regarding the advantageous judgment probability set by the advantageous judgment probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appended claim E9, the performance information includes information on the probability of a favorable judgment, which has a large effect on the ball-out performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, by evaluating the ball-out performance based on the information on the probability of a favorable judgment, it becomes possible to suggest the ball-out performance based on an index that more appropriately reflects the ball-out performance of the gaming machine. In addition, by displaying a part or all of the information on the probability of a favorable judgment on the performance information display means, the player can enjoy guessing the probability of a favorable judgment, and when the probability of a favorable judgment is grasped, the player is given an opportunity to decide whether to continue playing with the gaming machine based on the probability of a favorable judgment.

[Appendix E10]
The machine further includes a plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) for dispensing a certain number of game balls according to the type of the winning hole based on the entry of the game balls,
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendices E1 to E9, characterized in that the performance information includes information indicating ball-out performance based on at least one of the multiple winning ports (313 to 316).

The gaming machine according to appended claim E10 includes performance information indicating ball-out performance based on at least one of the multiple winning ports. Therefore, by displaying a part or all of the performance information indicating the ball-out performance based on the winning port on the performance information display means, the player can guess or recognize the ball-out performance that reflects the variation in winning performance for the winning port between gaming machines due to, for example, individual differences at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine or changes over time. This allows the player to enjoy guessing the ball-out performance based on the winning port, and when the ball-out performance based on the winning port can be grasped, the player is given an opportunity to decide whether to continue playing with the gaming machine in question based on the performance information.

[Appendix E11]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) are determined by the transition determination means (4) when a game ball enters the winning hole.
A first winning port (314) that provides an opportunity to make the transition determination according to 1),
The game machine further includes a unit judgment number calculation means (41) for calculating the number of unit judgments for which the transition judgment means (41) has performed the transition judgment in response to a game ball entering the first winning hole (314) until the difference in the number of balls reaches a predetermined number of balls or until the number of game balls shot to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls,
The gaming machine described in Appendix E10, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the unit judgment count calculated by the unit judgment count calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to the appended note E11, the performance information includes performance information on the number of unit judgments. Here, the number of unit judgments is the number of times that a transition judgment is made triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning slot until the difference in the number of balls reaches a minus of a predetermined number of balls or the number of launched gaming balls reaches a specific number of balls. In other words, the number of unit judgments is an index showing the ease of a transition judgment in a normal gaming state (a state in which the mode is a low probability mode and not a time-saving mode). Therefore, since a part or all of the information on the number of unit judgments is displayed, a player can guess or recognize the information on the number of unit judgments, and thus it becomes possible to know the ease of a transition judgment. This allows a player to enjoy guessing the number of unit judgments, and when the number of unit judgments can be grasped, the player is given an opportunity to decide whether to continue playing on the gaming machine being played based on the number of unit judgments.

[Appendix E12]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) which causes a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry of a game ball and triggers the transition determination means (41) to make the transition determination based on the entry of a game ball, and a general winning opening (313) which causes a specific number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry of a game ball and has a function different from that of the first winning opening,
The game machine further includes a ball payout rate calculation means (41) for calculating a ball payout rate (base) which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls, which is the number of payout balls for game balls entering the first winning opening (314) and the number of payout balls for game balls entering the general winning opening (313), to the number of game balls shot to the game board (31);
The gaming machine described in Appendix E10, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the ball payout rate calculated by the ball payout rate calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E12, the performance information includes information on the payout rate. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls from the first winning port and the general winning port to the number of shot balls. In other words,
The payout rate is an index showing the ease of winning at the first winning slot and the general winning slot. Therefore, since the performance information displays part or all of the information related to the payout rate, the player can guess or recognize the payout rate, and can know the ease of winning at the first winning slot and the general winning slot. This allows the player to enjoy guessing the payout rate, and if the payout rate can be known, the player is given the opportunity to decide whether to continue playing on the gaming machine based on the payout rate.

[Appendix E13]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) into which a game ball can enter in the special game state,
The game machine further includes a continuous feature ratio calculation means (41) for calculating a continuous feature ratio, which is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the number of game balls entering the variable winning port (316) to the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls to the number of game balls entering the multiple winning ports (313 to 316),
The gaming machine described in Appendix E10, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the consecutive feature ratio calculated by the consecutive feature ratio calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E13, the performance information includes information on the ratio of consecutive games.
The continuous feature ratio is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the number of balls entering the variable winning slots to the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls to the number of balls entering the multiple winning slots. In other words, the continuous feature ratio is the frequency with which the result of the transition judgment will transition to a special game (
It is an index showing the ratio of staying in the special game state) and the ease of winning in the variable winning port (the ball payout rate in the special game state). Therefore, since the player can guess or recognize the ratio of consecutive games by displaying a part or all of the information on the ratio of consecutive games, it becomes possible to know the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment will transition to a special game (the ratio of staying in the special game state) and the ease of winning in the variable winning port. This allows the player to enjoy guessing the ratio of consecutive games, and when the ratio of consecutive games can be grasped, the player is given the opportunity to decide whether to continue playing on the gaming machine being played based on the ratio of consecutive games.

[Appendix E14]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) are determined by the transition determination means (4) when a game ball enters the winning hole.
the first winning hole (314) which triggers the transition determination by the transition determination means (41), a second winning hole (315) into which a game ball can enter with the support of an electric device, and which triggers the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) when the game ball enters the second winning hole (315), and a variable winning hole (316) into which a game ball can enter in the special game state,
a role ratio calculation means (41) for calculating a role ratio which is the ratio of the total number of paid-out balls, which is the total number of paid-out balls for game balls entering the variable winning port (316) and the total number of paid-out balls for game balls entering the second winning port (315), to the total number of paid-out balls, which is the total number of paid-out balls for game balls entering the multiple winning ports (313 to 316);
Further equipped with
The gaming machine described in Appendix E10, wherein the performance information includes information regarding the reel ratio calculated by the reel ratio calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to the appended note E14, the performance information includes information on the ratio of the game balls. Here, the ratio of the game balls is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the variable winning port and the second winning port to the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls to the game balls that enter the multiple winning ports. In other words, the ratio of the game balls is an index indicating the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment is to transition to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), the stay ratio in the support game state (time-saving game state) supported by the electric game ball, and the ease of winning the variable winning port and the second winning port (payout rate in the special game state). Therefore, since the player can guess or recognize the ratio of the special features by displaying some or all of the information on the ratio of the special features, the player can know the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment will transition to a special game (stay ratio in the special game state), the stay ratio in the support game state (time-saving game state) in which the player receives support from the electric feature, and the ease of winning in the variable winning port and the second winning port (ball payout rate in the special game state). This allows the player to enjoy guessing the ratio of the special features, and if the ratio of the special features can be grasped, the player is given the opportunity to decide whether to continue playing on the gaming machine in question based on the ratio of the special features.

10: Game machine 313: General winning port 314: First winning port 315: Second winning port 316: Variable winning port 341: Pattern display section 35a: Special out ball sensor 36: Clone device 363: Special out ball port 364: Special out ball passage 365: Obstruction wall 367: Normal ball entry port 368: Normal passage 37a: Special main display section 38: Sub image display section 39: Retention box 39A: Translucent monitor 319: Discharge port 319B: Forced discharge member 4: Main control device 40A: Upper limit position detection sensor 40B: Lower limit position detection sensor 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
412d: Game information storage area 4A: Performance information display device 43: Performance display monitor 44: Performance display switch 45: Game setting value display section 46: Setting value change operation section 47: ROM
5: Voice and lamp control device 51: MPU
6: Display control device

The gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises:
a transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means for storing performance information that is an index showing ball output performance;
a performance information display means for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means;
a performance information display control means for causing the performance information display means to display the performance information;
a visibility limiting means for moving the performance information displayed on the performance information display means between a first position where the performance information is not visible or is difficult to view from a specific direction of the front and a second position where the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is entirely visible from the specific direction of the front;
a defining means for limiting movement of the visibility limiting means from the first position to the second position;
Equipped with
the visibility restriction means makes at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means visible from the specific direction of the front when a specific condition is satisfied,
When a movement start condition is satisfied in the special game state, the visibility limiting means is allowed to move from the first position to the second position,
a position of the performance information display means is not changed even when the visibility limiting means is located at the first position or when the visibility limiting means is located at the second position,
A performance display means for displaying performance information is provided separately from the performance information display means,
The performance information display means is configured to display the performance information even when the performance display means is performing a performance display,
The present invention is characterized by comprising a detection means capable of detecting whether or not the visibility limiting means is in the first position, and an output means capable of outputting information based on the detection result of the detection means .
The gaming machine according to claim 2 comprises:
a transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means for storing performance information that is an index showing ball output performance;
a performance information display means for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means;
a performance information display control means for causing the performance information display means to display the performance information;
a visibility limiting means for moving the performance information displayed on the performance information display means between a first position where the performance information is not visible or is difficult to view from a specific direction of the front and a second position where the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is entirely visible from the specific direction of the front;
a defining means for limiting movement of the visibility limiting means from the first position to the second position;
Equipped with
the visibility limiting means makes at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means visible from the specific direction of the front when a specific condition is satisfied ,
When a movement start condition is satisfied in the special game state, the visibility limiting means is allowed to move from the first position to the second position,
The visibility limiting means has an opaque portion that makes the back side invisible and a transparent portion that makes the back side visible,
When the visibility limiting means is in the first position, the performance information display means cannot be viewed through the transparent portion,
A performance display means for displaying performance information is provided separately from the performance information display means,
The performance information display means is configured to display the performance information even when the performance display means is performing a performance display,
The present invention is characterized by comprising a detection means capable of detecting whether or not the visibility limiting means is in the first position, and an output means capable of outputting information based on the detection result of the detection means.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises:
a transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means for storing performance information that is an index showing ball output performance;
a performance information display means for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means;
a performance information display control means for causing the performance information display means to display the performance information;
a visibility limiting means for moving the performance information displayed on the performance information display means between a first position where the performance information is not visible or is difficult to view from a specific direction of the front and a second position where the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is entirely visible from the specific direction of the front;
a defining means for limiting movement of the visibility limiting means from the first position to the second position;
Equipped with
the visibility restriction means makes at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means visible from the specific direction of the front when a specific condition is satisfied,
When a movement start condition is satisfied in the special game state, the visibility limiting means is allowed to move from the first position to the second position ,
The present invention is characterized by comprising a detection means capable of detecting whether or not the visibility limiting means is in the first position, and an output means capable of outputting information based on the detection result of the detection means .

Claims (1)

A storage means for storing performance information that is an index showing ball output performance;
a performance information display means for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means;
a performance information display control means for causing the performance information display means to display the performance information;
a visibility limiting means for making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means invisible or difficult to view;
a visibility state control means for controlling the visibility restriction means when a specific condition is satisfied, and making at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means visible;
A gaming machine comprising: